JP2023113958A - heating cooker - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker including multiple heating sources such as an induction heating source capable of increasing user convenience.SOLUTION: The heating cooker includes a heating chamber, first heating means, second heating means, an input operation unit, a first selection unit, a second selection unit, and a control unit. The first heating means heats an object to be heated placed on a top plate. The second heating means has multiple heating sources in the heating chamber. In a coordinated cooking mode where the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a given order, a cooking menu is displayed in a selectable manner out of multiple cooking menus by type of food to be cooked. The control unit has an executive function of the coordinated cooking mode for using both the first heating means and the second heating means, and is configured to execute an operation step A of determining cooking by the coordinated cooking mode, an operation step B of performing a first specific notification including information about food to be cooked where cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is performed, and an operation step C of shifting to the coordinated cooking mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present disclosure relates to a heating cooker that heats an object to be heated such as a pan placed on a top plate.

There are roughly three types of heating cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is a so-called "built-in type" installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas combustion table") or the like. The third type is a small and portable "desktop type" that is used by placing it at any position on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" heating cookers that are equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular because they can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture. The degree of difficulty is remarkably low, and the degree of difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in cooking device, a grill chamber heated by an induction heating source inside the main body (also called "oven chamber" or "heating chamber") is used to expand the range of cooking. (referred to as a "heating chamber"), and microwaves from a microwave heating source are introduced into the heating chamber (see Patent Documents 1 and 2, for example). A cooker equipped with a plurality of heat sources with different heating principles is called a composite heat cooker.

Moreover, in order to complete one cooking object, it has been proposed to move a cooking utensil such as a pot containing the cooking object between a plurality of heating places to heat and cook the object. Since the heating space (environment) is changed by changing the heating location, there is an advantage that various types of food can be handled (see Patent Documents 3 to 5, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-031202 (page 1, FIG. 5) JP 2016-207400 (page 5, FIG. 9) JP 2011-129529 A (page 1, FIG. 6) JP 2011-96484 A (page 1, FIG. 14) JP 2020-87506 (page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in Patent Documents 3 to 5 above, in the process of finishing one cooking, when using a plurality of heat sources located at separate positions, even if the user's operation command is incorrect, it is unintentional. Precautions must be taken to prevent the heating source from running or shutting down. If this countermeasure is not sufficient, it may cause user confusion and cooking failure. In other words, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as coordination of a plurality of heat sources and timely notification and display of the coordination status of the heat sources to the user.

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking by improving user operability.

The heating cooker related to the first disclosure includes
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate;
a second heating means comprising a plurality of heat sources for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
a notification means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
a control unit that controls the heating operation;
input means;
The control unit
a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone;
a combined cooking mode for automatically proceeding with a cooking process using the plurality of heat sources of the second heating means;
A linked cooking mode having a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are switched and executed by a command from the input means,
The single cooking mode determines the control pattern of the first heating means and starts the heating operation,
The combined cooking mode determines the control pattern of the second heating means and starts the heating operation,
In the linked cooking mode, the food to be cooked is determined by the input means and a heating operation is started.
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the second disclosure includes
a heating chamber;
display means;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input means;
A control unit that receives commands from the input means and controls the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit combines a single cooking mode for operating the first heating means alone, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. has the ability to run the cooking mode and
When the main power supply is turned on, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen on the display means, and during the period in which the standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) displaying, on the display means, identification information of at least one cooking object that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode when a first command is received from the input means;
(2) displaying information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode on the display means when a second command is received from the input means;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the third disclosure is
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate;
a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command signal;
A control unit that controls heating operations of the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode that uses both the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit determines whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is permitted for the specific food item selected by the input operation unit, and permits cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. case, an operation step B of performing a first specific notification including information about the food to be cooked in the linked cooking mode, and a case where a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit after the first specific notification , an operation step C for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the fourth disclosure is
a heating chamber;
display means;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
input means for giving commands to the first heating means and the second heating means;
A control unit that receives commands from the input means and controls the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit combines a single cooking mode for operating the first heating means alone, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. has the ability to run the cooking mode and
When the main power supply is turned on, the control unit automatically displays a standby initial screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means on the display means, and displays the standby initial screen. during the period shown
(1) upon receiving a first command specifying the cooperative cooking mode, switching from the standby initial screen to the first specific screen to display a cooking menu that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) When the first heating means receives a second command specifying a control pattern, causing the display means to display a specific screen different from the standby initial screen, thereby providing a control menu for the single cooking mode. to display the
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the fifth disclosure is
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
a control unit that controls the heating operation;
and an input means for giving a command to the control unit,
a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated using the first heating means; A function to execute a linked preheating cooking mode having a cooking step 1 of heating an object, and a cooking step 2 of using the second heating means after the cooking step 1,
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the sixth disclosure is
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
a control unit that controls the heating operation;
and an input means for giving a command to the control unit,
The control unit performs a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated using the first heating means, and a cooking step of heating the object to be cooked by the second heating means in parallel with the preheating step. 1, and after the cooking step 1, a cooking step 2 using the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step and the first heating means. Ta,
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the seventh disclosure is
a compound cooking mode with multiple control menus that operates two or more heat sources in a predetermined sequence;
a coordinated cooking mode having a plurality of coordinated cooking menus, in which food items placed in respective locations inside the heating chamber and above the top plate are cooked in a predetermined order;
display means for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu;
An input means that can select the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode,
When the start key of the input means is operated in a state in which at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the control displayed at a predetermined display position A of the display means One of the menus is selected as the "control menu to be executed" to shift to the cooking process of the combined cooking mode,
When the start key is operated while at least two of the linked cooking menus are displayed on the display means, one of the linked cooking menus displayed at the predetermined display position B is displayed. It is selected as a "cooking menu to be executed" and is shifted to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode,
The input means includes an input key for forwardly displaying the control menu at the display position A of the display means each time the input means is operated, and an input key for displaying the control menu backward at the display position A each time the control menu is operated. and the input keys next to each other, and
The input means includes an input key for forwardly displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time the input means is operated, and an input key for backwardly displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time the key is operated. Place the keys and , next to each other, and
The input key for forwardly and reversely feeding the control menu and the linked cooking menu and displaying them at the display position A and the display position B, respectively, is shared by the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode. there is
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the eighth disclosure is
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
a second heating source having a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
In a cooperative cooking mode in which one food item is heated twice or more by using the first heating means and the second heating means, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of food item is selected. a first selection unit for selecting one cooking menu;
In a compound cooking mode in which a plurality of heating sources are automatically combined to heat a single object to be cooked simultaneously or with a time lag, one of a plurality of control menus shared by multiple types of objects to be cooked is selected. a second selection unit for selecting;
a control unit that controls the first heating means and the second heating means in response to the selection of the first selection unit and the second selection unit;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the ninth disclosure is
a heating chamber;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
Display means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
selection means for selecting a cooperative cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode prepared for each type of food to be cooked, and a control menu shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked;
a control unit that receives a command from the selection unit and controls the display unit, the first heating unit, and the second heating unit;
and a function setting unit that limits the function of the control unit,
The control unit uses one or both of the plurality of heat sources of the second heating means in combination to execute a combined cooking mode having the control menu, and the first heating means. A function of executing a linked cooking mode combining a cooking process to be used and a cooking process using the second heating means, and a function of controlling the display means according to the information set by the function setting unit. have
After the main power supply is supplied and the display means is activated, the control unit selects the linked cooking menu or opens the door of the heating chamber. When the permission condition is satisfied, displaying the first specific screen for the cooperative cooking mode on the display means;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the tenth disclosure includes:
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
a control unit that controls the heating operation;
and an input means for giving a command to the control unit,
a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber using the second heating means; and a cooking step of heating the food using the second heating means after the preheating step. 1, and a cooking step 2 of further heating the object heated in the cooking step 1 by heating the object using the first heating means after the cooking step 1. Equipped with the function to execute the linked preheating cooking mode,
It is a configuration characterized by

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker capable of cooperating with a plurality of heating means to widely handle various types of cooking.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system between one house and the outside according to Embodiment 1; FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 1 showing the configuration of a kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the entire kitchen furniture on which a built-in combined cooking device according to Embodiment 1 is installed; FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of kitchen furniture before incorporating the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of work for incorporating the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 into kitchen furniture; FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture of FIG. 5 and the heating cooker. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front portion of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 when viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 6 is a plan view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 11; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 11 and showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line WW of FIG. 12; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line YY of FIG. 11; FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line VV of FIG. 12; FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line XX of FIG. 12; FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker of FIG. 5 is installed in the kitchen furniture; FIG. 6 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation section of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit and an integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation section and the right display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view of the left operating portion and the left display portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 25 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main configuration shown in FIG. 24; FIG. FIG. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 24; FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle; FIG. 4 is a simplified perspective view for explaining the positional relationship between cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board; Fig. 6 is a block diagram 1 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of Fig. 5; FIG. 6 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a block diagram 3 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing main cooling air passages of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between main (microwave grill) control menus and display areas in the integrated display section of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 and the central operation unit; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 and the central operation unit; FIG. FIG. 6 is a list of descriptions of cooking menus in the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and in the single cooking mode of induction heating; FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order; FIG. FIG. 6 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the type of cooking. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a control operation when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section immediately after the heating cooker of FIG. 5 is started; FIG. FIG. 6 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation unit of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section and the central operation section during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each input operation and process in the case of implementing cooperation cooking mode, compound cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of cooperative cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of cooperative cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys and cooking processes in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input operations and displays up to the transition to a combined cooking mode and a linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 1 is an explanatory drawing 1 showing a cooking process in a cooperative preheating cooking mode, which is one type of cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the cooking process of the cooperation preheating cooking mode which is 1 type of cooperation cooking modes. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 4 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 5 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the combined cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view 1 showing the control operation of the input operation section and the display section (integrated display section/left display section) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a plan view and an explanatory view showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in an integrated display part at the time of selecting cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected; It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display content of a display part and an input operation part at the time of selecting cooperative cooking mode. Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of an integrated display unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when "hamburger" is cooked in a cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of an integrated display unit and an input operation unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 10 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram 12 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 5 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control action of an integrated control apparatus at the time of selecting cooperation cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing, in chronological order, exchange of information between a refrigerator and a heating cooker during cooking in a cooperative cooking mode; 105 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing exchange of information among the refrigerator, the home gateway, and the heating cooker in the case shown in FIG. 104; FIG. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when cooking “fried chicken” in the cooperative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 104 ; 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the example shown in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 104; FIG. Figure 105 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway in the case shown in Figure 104; It is the flowchart which showed the operation|movement of the integrated control apparatus which shows the example of utilization of the inventory information of a refrigerator. 113 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 112. FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 112. FIG. FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 112; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the (built-in composite type) heating cooker according to Embodiment 2; 117 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the heating cooker of FIG. 116; FIG. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 116 with the top plate removed. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 116 with the top plate and IH coil removed. 117 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 116 with the top plate, IH coil and cover removed. FIG. FIG. 117 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the heating cooker of FIG. 116; 117 is a bottom (lower) view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 116. FIG. 117 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the heating cooker of FIG. 116; FIG. 117 is an enlarged plan view showing an input operation section and an integrated display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 116; FIG. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 116; FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 116 ; FIG. 10 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heat cooker and the type of heat cooking for disclosing Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 128 is a time chart 1 showing timings for starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127; 128 is a time chart 2 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127; 128 is a time chart 3 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127; 128 is a time chart 4 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127; 128 is a time chart 5 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the (built-in type) composite cooking device according to Embodiment 4; 134 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, information transfer between the heating cooker shown in FIG. 133 and an external information management device or the like. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 133; FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 133; FIG. FIG. 12 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 5; 138 is a block diagram showing main control function parts of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 137; FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 137 from when the main power is turned on to selection of a cooking mode or control menu. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 6; 141 is a block diagram showing main control function portions of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 141 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions; 141 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. 141 is a flowchart 3 showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. FIG. 11 is a block diagram 1 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker disclosed in Embodiment 7; 146 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 145; FIG. 146 is a time chart showing an operation example of the heating cooker of FIG. 145; FIG. 146 is a flow chart for explaining the entire control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 145 before cooking is started; FIG. 146 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation after starting cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 145; 3 is a block diagram showing main internal functions of the mobile information terminal; FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of a display operation of a portable information terminal; FIG. 2 is a diagram 2 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 of the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 4 is a diagram 4 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 of the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 6 is a diagram 6 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 7 of the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 of the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 of the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 10 is a diagram 10 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal; FIG. 10 shows an operation management system for a heating cooker and home electric appliances relating to a modification of Embodiment 7. FIG. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the display operation of the portable information terminal in the modified example shown in FIG. 161; 162 is a second diagram for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal in the modified example shown in FIG. 161; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys and cooking processes in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker disclosed in Embodiment 8;

(definition)
A “household appliance” 400 is an electrical appliance designed mainly for home use. The home appliances 400 include an induction heating cooker 1, a refrigerator 401, a television receiver 402, an air conditioner 403, an air cleaner 404, a ventilator 405, an electric rice cooker (including an electric jar rice cooker) 406, A microwave oven 408, a lighting fixture 409, and an air purifier 410 are included. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the term "refrigerator" includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The “device identification information” of home appliance 400 is unique information for specifying home appliance 400 . Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, the manufacturer's name of the home appliance 400, the model name (model name), the model number, the serial number, and the like.

A “home gateway” 411 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participates in coordinated operations. In addition to this, it gives an operation command signal to one home appliance 400 or performs an operation of acquiring information (also referred to as “data”) from one home appliance 400 .

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function for all or part of the home appliances 400 in order to manage the total power consumption of one household. In some cases, it may be called a “power control device” or “integrated management device”.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information about the current status of the electric home appliance 400, such as operation, stop, standby state, etc., from the electric home appliance 400 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 400 using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or a "power command device" for one home appliance (for example, the induction heating cooker 1) 400, other home appliances ( For example, if the lighting equipment 409) does not limit power consumption, it does not correspond to the "integrated management device" or the "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other home appliances 400 does not exceed the specified upper limit of the total power consumption. This is the case where there is no function for regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 409 itself. Therefore, the home gateway 411 is neither an integrated management device nor a power command device when viewed from the lighting equipment 409 .

Embodiment 1.
1 to 115 disclose the first embodiment. In this Embodiment 1, a built-in composite type (induction) heating cooker 1 is disclosed. It should be noted that in the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will simply be referred to as a "cooker".
In each figure, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the heating cooker 1, and the symbol LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this Embodiment 1, the "first heating means" HM1 means a heated heating device containing food to be cooked on the top plate 15, such as an induction heating source 9 or a gas combustor (burner), which will be described later. Means for heating the thing N. The object to be heated N is, for example, a metal pot or frying pan.

In the following description, the term "object to be heated N placed on the top plate" refers to the case where the object to be heated N such as a pan is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to be described later, and the case where the object to be heated N is placed directly on the upper surface of the top plate 15, which will be described later. (burner), etc., includes both when the object to be heated N is placed on a supporting member such as a trivet arranged above the top plate 15 and heated.

In this Embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a plurality of heating sources for heating the food stored inside the heating chamber 113, which will be described later. The heating source may be a microwave heating source 189, an oven heating source 188, or a gas combustor (burner) (not shown), which will be described later.

In this Embodiment 1, the "induction heating cooker" refers to one having a heating portion for heating the object N to be heated. When there are a plurality of heating units, there may be a heating source that heats using a method other than the induction heating method, such as a radiant electric heat source.

In this Embodiment 1, the "composite heating cooker" has a plurality of heating sources with different heating principles, such as the relationship between the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater, etc. It means that cooking can be performed in one heating chamber 113 by these two types of heat sources. The heating chamber 113 may be heated by both an oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Furthermore, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113 .

In this Embodiment 1, the “heating means (hereinafter referred to as “oven heating source”)” of the heating chamber 113 means a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and the inside of the heating chamber 113. Any heat source installed in the space may be used.
In addition, a heat generating member that becomes high temperature by an induction heating method is arranged, and the heat generating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside or heats the air inside the heating chamber 113. good.

For example, in Japanese Patent Documents, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305 discloses a second heating element ( A heating cooker has been proposed that includes an induction heating coil) and a third heating element (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and the IH heat Arrangements have been proposed for inductively heating a cooking plate placed over a coil. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be heated by induction. For example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material having a carbon content of 90% or more, and a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferro-silicon) as a conductive material are used.

In addition, as a representative example of arranging a heat-generating member that becomes hot by an induction heating method, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses that a high-frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. A high-frequency magnetic flux is interlinked with a heater arranged in a heating chamber so that an induced current flows through the heater, and the food to be cooked in the heating chamber is cooked by Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself. is disclosed.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, an electrically closed circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is linked to this heater. It has been proposed to heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat into the heating chamber. The heater here is an electrically closed circuit formed by bending a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high-nickel alloy into a predetermined shape and joining the ends together by welding or brazing. It is formed in an endless shape.

As a representative example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of the bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese patent document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is one that is configured by winding about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm.

Another patent document, JP-A-2018-32551, proposes an induction heating cooker using an annular conductor made of a flat plate-like conductive material and formed in an annular shape as an IH coil.
Any one of these forms corresponds to the “IH coil” which is the main part of the induction heating source 9 .

In this Embodiment 1, the term "coordinated cooking" refers to two or more different heating locations for one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) and for which heating operation conditions can be set independently. Cooking using a heat source.

The above-mentioned "cooperation cooking" corresponds to a case where a plurality of heat sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after completing microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another place, and at the place after the movement, it is heated by the IH coil 17L described later. In the case, it is a kind of "cooperation cooking" referred to here.

In addition, the object to be cooked is heated by a gas burner (burner) inside the heating chamber 113, and then the object to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 15 and heated by the gas burner (burner) or the induction heating source 9. Another form of ``co-cooking'' is to heat the food to improve the degree of perfection of the cooking.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in heating cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and home appliance operation management system)
First, the operation management system for home appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA indicates one house.
Although not shown, the inside of the house HA is partitioned into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors. One living space, the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), contains a refrigerator 401, an induction Household appliances 400 such as a heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and kitchen furniture 2 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the living space includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. The living space may have other rooms.

Electric power of, for example, 200 V is supplied to all living spaces from a commercial power supply EP of an electric power company outside the house. The power is drawn into the house HA via the electricity meter 414 .

415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. This power line 415 is connected to a television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and a home gateway. 411, a wireless router 419 and an environment detection unit 413 are connected respectively.

Home gateway 410, environment detector 413, TV receiver 402, air conditioner 403, heating cooker 1, refrigerator 401, and lighting equipment 409 are always connected to power line 415 via a predetermined power cord. Note that although there is more than one lighting fixture 409, the other lighting fixtures are omitted from the drawing.

Next, FIG. 1 will be explained.
416 is a wide area telecommunications network (sometimes referred to as a "communications network" or "Internet").
This wide area network 416 is connected to home gateway 411 via wireless router 419 .

417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and information communication terminal equipment 418 . For example, it may be a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider in a specific area or an electric power company, or a server prepared by the manufacturer that manufactured the heating cooker 1 . This external server may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" using cloud servers: "IaaS", "PaaS", and "SaaS".

Home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from external server 417 . This content also includes recipe information (characters and images) for various types of cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the environment detection unit 413 may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor for detecting the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Also, the external server 417 functions as information providing means for the home appliance 400 . In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer) of the home appliance 400, a dealer, a repairer, or an information service provider, or may be installed jointly by two or more organizations. , provides various services related to the home appliance 400 to the user via the wide area communication network 416 .

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "web server" (hereinafter referred to as "web server"). The web server follows HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between a web server and a web browser), and various information communication terminal devices 418, home gateways 410, etc. It refers to a service program that provides display information such as HTML and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of information processing equipment (client) side software on the "receiving side" and a server computer that operates the service.

The external server 417 stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or its remote location. From the information communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, for example, a device called a smart phone, the aforementioned remote control can be realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) control application software. can be done.

The information communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by the user to make calls and communicate data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site via the wide area communication network 416, send and receive e-mails, and send remote control signals. Communication devices are collectively called information communication terminal devices 418 . A small portable personal computer is also a kind of information communication terminal equipment 418 .

The information communication terminal device 418 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while being in proximity (or may be brought into contact) with the input/output unit of each home appliance 400 by several centimeters. I have. The short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data (also referred to as a “control command”) from the information communication terminal device 418 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400 and control the home appliance 400 according to the control command.

In this Embodiment 1, direct remote operation from the information communication terminal device 418 to the home appliance 400 side is prohibited. Some of the home appliances 400 generate high heat, such as the heating cooker 1, so remote control from outside the house 413 via the Internet used by many people is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411 .

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 and causes them to operate in cooperation. In addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a range hood 422 and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 404, which will be described later, are installed in the kitchen KT in the house HA.

413 A is the sensor unit of the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411 . Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sensor unit 413A includes an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a human sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (using infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). and have Note that the environment detection unit 413 will be described later in detail.

The "environmental information" refers to temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen KT) where the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The scattered dust amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

“Use of environmental information” includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retaining function of the electric rice cooker 406 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process is finished. Also, the refrigerating target temperature and freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode." Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) Operate the air purifier 404 when fine dust that floats in the air is scattered. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 405 is started.
(4) When the pollen scattering amount is large, the operation of the air purifier 404 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, turn on the lighting device 409 .

"Resident" means a person who lives in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include relatives such as parents and children, brothers and sisters. It should be noted that when using home appliance 400, the term "user" is used regardless of whether the person is a resident or not.

A "household" means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include a multi-family dwelling with multiple rooms. That is, even in such collective housing, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power interruption device (one breaker BK, or a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is regarded as a household here.

“Home appliance side power limit information” refers to information regarding any signal received by home appliance 400 from home gateway 411 regarding power consumption. The "power limit information on the home appliance side" includes information on transmission commands such as a power reduction request signal AS1, a power reduction command signal AS2, etc., which will be described later. The information includes information indicating when the signal was received (year, month and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information such as "receipt time: 17:00 on June 9, 2020, reduce the instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" for the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time to the heating cooker 1.

For example, in the heating cooker 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC, which will be described later. do not have. Turning on and off the main power switch 98 is regarded as one cooking, and at least several times are stored in memory. Any excess is automatically deleted.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of hardware to which the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment and the operation management system for home electrical appliances are applied. As one living space, the kitchen KT will be described below as an example.

The kitchen KT to which Embodiment 1 is applied includes an air purifier 404 installed on a ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezer compartments 401A having different freezing temperatures, and a refrigerator compartment 401B. A refrigerator 401, a microwave oven 408, a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 arranged in the kitchen furniture 2, a range hood (a kind of ventilation device 405) 422 arranged directly above the heating cooker 1, a home - Gateways 411 are installed respectively. The illustration of the electric rice cooker 406, the air conditioner 403, and the lighting equipment 409 described in FIG. 1 is omitted.

The plurality of freezer compartments 401A in the refrigerator 401 have freezing temperatures suitable for frozen foods (including processed foods) and perishable foods (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C ± 2°C, -10°C, and -2°C. (temperature zone) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range affect the ripening of perishable ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time. can be changed.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outdoors is connected to the exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 denotes a hood whose entire lower surface is open as a suction port 425A, and an electric fan 426 for exhaust is installed inside this hood. In addition, although this range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, the detailed configuration thereof will not be described.

The operation status of the range hood 422 is transmitted to the central control unit 447 (described later in detail) of the home gateway 411 as needed. Therefore, inside the range hood 422, a transmission unit ( (not shown) and a receiver (not shown). For example, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication section 427 . This communication unit 427 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is driven to rotate, air is sucked from the suction port 425A of the cooker hood 422, and the odor and smoke generated during cooking are also sucked in and exhausted through the duct 424 to the outside of the house HA. Note that the range hood 422 is of a type that receives an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the heating cooker 1 side and starts the exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, an arrow FF1 indicates an air current rising from the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from duct 424; FF3 shows the airflow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420 . FF4 indicates the airflow blown out from the air cleaner 404 .

A heat sensing sensor (thermoelectromotive force element) may be arranged on the range hood 422 toward the cooking device 1 . According to this configuration, the range hood 422 itself senses the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 and controls the operation of the electric fan 426 itself.

Ceiling-embedded air cleaner 404 is installed in a manner embedded in ceiling surface 420 . A blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided inside a box-shaped main body 428 of the air cleaner 404 .

431 is an air guide plate covering the entire lower portion of the air cleaner 404 . 432 is a suction port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side close to the cooker hood 422). A blowout port 433 is formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite to the suction port 432 .

The blower fan 429 sucks the dirty air in the kitchen from the suction port 432 and discharges the cleaned air through the filter 430 from the blowout port 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the indoor air is purified.

434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404 and is arranged so as to face the inlet of the suction port 432 . This detects odors from the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of contamination of the air. As long as the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the side of the suction port 432 and is in front of the filter 430, there is no significant difference in the effect regardless of the position.

Based on the detection result of the odor sensor 434, an odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404 determines the strength of the odor. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 413 as needed. For this reason, inside the air purifier 404, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity to the home gateway 411. , and a receiver (not shown). For example, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication section 435 . The communication unit 435 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 421 can detect the odor when the air purifier 404 is in operation and when the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen KT reaches the air purifier 404 from the place of origin. is.

This air purifier 404 generally has one or a plurality of (multiple layers) filters 430 having fine air passages for trapping dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking using edible oil (for example, “fried food” and “tempura”) is filtered by the heat cooker 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430, and the oil particles are removed. Combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtering performance of the filter 430 is lowered. That is, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 is reduced, leading to a situation in which the air purification capability of the air purifier 404 is reduced. Therefore, the idea of avoiding the operation of the air cleaner 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by heat cooking contains oily smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Patent Document JP-A-2016- 95126).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is depicted as being installed in the vicinity of the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in actual situations it may be installed at a different location from that shown in FIG. Moreover, not only one refrigerator 401 but also a plurality of refrigerators 401 may be used.

A reference numeral 412 denotes a main body case forming an outer shell of the home gateway 411 . The main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to confirm input operations and displays.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described later in detail. 2D is a water supply port 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2 .

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the heating cooker 1 and the range hood 422. As shown in FIG.
In FIG. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the heating cooker 1 . In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection section 441 and a communication section 442 . The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422 even though it is one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 constantly monitors the temperature even when the exhaust operation is not performed.

The temperature detection unit 441, for example, divides the entire region of the top plate 15, which will be described later, into at least 64 regions (8 vertical×8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as “detection regions”), and detects the temperature of each region. To detect.

The detection area includes an induction heating section 17H of the heating cooker 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area at predetermined time intervals not only during the operation of the range hood 421 but also while the operation is stopped.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits monitoring information on the measured temperature from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411 . In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration of directly transmitting to the heating cooker 1 may be employed. Also, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining temperature monitoring information is not fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving part 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmission part 48 of the heating cooker 1, the range hood 421 is started to operate. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the heating cooker 1 when the range hood 421 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating that the operation of the cooking device 1 is finished. Then, the acquisition of temperature information is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 15 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40° C.). It should be noted that the interval between the temperature measurement operations is delayed when the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the start of the operation of the heating cooker 1, the temperature monitoring operation is started again.

The heating cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the heating cooker 1, and 114 is a door that covers a front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 so as to be openable and closable.

The heating cooker 1 places an object N to be heated, such as a pot or frying pan made of magnetic metal, on a top plate 15 covering the upper surface thereof, and induction-heats the object N with an IH coil 17 . 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two upper and lower spaces.

CK is an installation space above the bottom wall surface 16S, in which the IH coil 17 is accommodated.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between home gateway 411, home appliance 400, and temperature monitoring device 440. As shown in FIG. Note that the heating cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408 among the home appliances 400 are subject to power consumption control from the home gateway 411 .
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408, but since this point has been explained before, it will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also the home appliance 400 subject to power consumption control.

The power amount control unit 448 constantly acquires information on the amount of power used from target home appliances (eg, the cooking device 1 and the microwave oven 408), and does not exceed the preset total power amount. , has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliance 400, and is already known by the name of HEMS (home power management system).

When the power amount control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, the target home appliances (for example, the heating cooker 1 and , microwave oven 408, and air conditioner 403).

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection section 413 that incorporates a human detection section 413H that receives the detection output of a human detection sensor 452 . The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown), a sensor for detecting temperature and humidity in the kitchen, etc., in the form of data in a predetermined format. 453 is an environmental sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

The human detection sensor 452 detects the presence of people in the kitchen KT, especially in the area in front of the heating cooker 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401 .
One or a plurality of the human detection sensors 452 are installed inside the kitchen KT.

For example, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is close, the human sensor is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT toward the space between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401. 452 is installed.

In addition, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is slightly away, one human detection sensor 452 points toward the space in the vicinity of the front of the heating cooker 1, toward the ceiling surface of the kitchen KT. 420 or the like. Another human detection sensor 453 is preferably installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like of the kitchen KT facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401 .

A human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect the presence of the user in front of the cooker 1 .
As described above, the locations where the human sensors 452 and 453 are installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 and the sensing capabilities of the human sensors.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 413. A home detection device (not shown) for detecting that a person is inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen KT or the like. You may make it function as one sensor of. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor or the like that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home detecting device. As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy in the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

An input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of the functions, it is possible to specify the electric home appliance 400 for which the upper limit value of power consumption is to be set, and then set the upper limit value of power consumption, the usable time period, and the like. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1, such as 4800W and 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function of inputting by operating the touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function of inputting by voice. You can input various functions you want by emitting toward the ).

445 is an alarm device that alerts the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440 and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445 . Since the alarm device 445 is not controlled by the power amount control unit 448, power is not limited or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 400. FIG.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further comprises a communication section (receiving section/transmitting section) 446 , a central control section 447 and a storage device 450 .
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit that can individually perform wireless communication or infrared communication with the electrical appliances 400 such as the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 stores operating history information of the home gateway 411, daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413, and the like. It is a device that records a large amount of information. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, an HDD, or the like.

The central control unit 447 incorporates a microcomputer serving as the core of information processing, a ROM and a RAM, and stores computer programs that define various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wide area communication network (Internet) for wireless communication via a wireless router 419 .

In FIG. 4, only one communication unit 446 is shown in the home gateway 411, but the communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) for the home appliance 400 and the communication unit for the wireless router 419 are separately provided. may be set to Also, an NFC communication unit may be provided separately so that information can be directly exchanged with NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the information communication terminal device 418 by wireless communication.

451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store schedule information of events for at least January (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the input unit 449 can register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

If the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451, the schedule management unit 451 issues a notification when the stored date and time come. The form of notification is display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449, or notification by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a method of issuing a notification to the information communication terminal device 418 possessed by the resident may be used.

When the electric home appliance 400 such as the heating cooker 1 is activated, the schedule management unit 451 may notify based on the registered event information.

(Overview of heating cooker)
Next, referring to FIGS. 5 to 115, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described.
In FIG. 5, the heating cooker 1 is a built-in type heating cooker incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. 2A is an installation opening formed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power supply 99 as described later.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, the heating cooker 1 has two induction heating units on the left and right.
In FIG. 19 , CL 1 indicates a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates a range where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100 .

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to a "first heating section") provided in a range on the right side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed just above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to a "second heating section") provided in a range on the left side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. As described above, the heating cooker 1 is a cooker provided with two “heating ports” (heating portions) on the upper surface of the top plate 15 .

Further, another induction heating unit may be provided between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL so as to straddle the left-right center line CL1, thereby forming a three-burner cooking device. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL may be replaced with a radiant heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference number when referring to an "induction heating section".

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate the desired positions for placing the object to be heated N (see FIG. 3) such as a metal pan or plate (grilled plate). , are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 . The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 by printing.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the heating cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating portions 17H on the left and right. It should be noted that the user can also recognize that there are two induction heating units on the left and right by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not have to be circular. For example, only the central point of the desired position where the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or letters. .

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating the approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a slightly larger diameter than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R .

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when the term "IH coil" 17 is used, it may be either the left IH coil 17L or the right IH coil 17R.

In this Embodiment 1, unless otherwise specified, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L, which will be described later.

(basics of heating source and control menu)
The heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 includes three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 is a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (second heating source). 3 heating source).

The three heating sources described above can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating source can be used for cooking. This form of operation pattern is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) By using the induction heating source 9 and at least one of the oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 together, one cooking can be performed using two or more different locations. . This form of operation pattern is the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together for one cooking. This operation pattern is the "compound cooking mode" KM2. The term "operation pattern" used herein refers to the case where the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, operated simultaneously, or operated with a time lag. including any of

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation section. Specifically, a right operating section (first individual operating section) 40R and a left operating section (second individual operating section) 40L. By operating the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have dedicated input controls. The central operation unit 40M is shared.

(6) There is no superiority relationship between the single cooking mode KM1 using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the combined cooking mode KM2. . The rule is that the cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is given priority. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select a cooperative cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating unit 17HR has already performed a single heating operation for another cooking, Since the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating source is partially restricted in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(7) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority relationship between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. no. Therefore, for example, if you attempt to set the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and leave the input halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, for 30 seconds without inputting anything), it automatically switches to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The input up to is canceled. In the middle of the standing state, for example, if an input for the single cooking mode KM1 is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9, the induction heating cooking can be started.

(8) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a "first cooperative cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking process (cooking process 1), and an oven heating mode in the first cooking process (cooking process 1). and a “second coordinated cooking mode” using at least one of the source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 .

(9) The linked cooking mode KM3 has a "linked preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating process. It should be noted that the use of the second heating means HM2 in the preheating process is also one form of the "coordinated preheating cooking mode", but this form will not be described in detail in the first embodiment.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the heating cooker 1 is placed and supported on the rim upper surface 2P of the installation opening 2A. As shown in FIG. 6, the kitchen furniture 2 in the first embodiment includes a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply port 2D. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2 . The front opening 2B is for exposing front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) forward when the heating cooker 1 is installed.

If the sizes of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 are standard, they are mostly formed in advance with standard dimensions because standardization is promoted by the industry. be. More on this later.

A typical method of incorporating the cooking device 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. This FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2 .
As shown in FIG. 7, while the front side (front side) of the heating cooker 1 is tilted downward, the heating cooker 1 is inserted into the installation opening 2A, and then the rear side of the heating cooker 1 is placed. is lowered as indicated by a solid-line arrow BD, the heating cooker 1 is placed on the periphery of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) a fixing metal fitting (not shown) installed on the rear periphery of the lower unit 100 to be described later, and the fixing metal fitting is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. to complete the installation. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, detailed description of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 is combined and integrated with the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 stacked vertically. shipped from the manufacturer. Therefore, in the assembling work of FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screws. The entire heating cooker 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2 by removing the fixing metal fittings (not shown). Thereby, after that, inspection and repair can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. - 特許庁In addition, when calling only the upper unit 100 as a "main body", the code|symbol 10 is attached and distinguished.

In this Embodiment 1, the “main body case” HC is a general term for the upper case 16 forming the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 forming the outer shell of the lower unit 200 . Note that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in FIG. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation opening 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, 3 and 4 are surface materials forming the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to the left and right sides when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2 .
The front surfaces of these surface members 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooking device 1 when the cooking device 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.例文帳に追加In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated, the surface members 3 to 6 and the heating cooker 1 can provide the user with a sense of design as if they are on a unified plane.

In FIG. 7, reference numeral 8 denotes a wall that vertically divides the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms, and the area below this wall is often used as a storehouse for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in FIG. Moreover, the form installed in the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 so that the wall 8 may become removable may be sufficient.

With the configuration described above, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents substantially one plane. When the user sees the kitchen furniture 2, it is designed so that the front (front) as a whole can be recognized as having a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the heat cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. They are often on sale.

5 and 6, reference numeral 7 denotes a frame line printed on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5. In addition, it is also possible to attach a thin glossy metal veneer, tape, or the like to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a sense of quality. Conversely, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Moreover, these surface members 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, it may always exist on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 in a fixed state and not move at all.

If the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified in front surface color and surface form (pattern, presence/absence of gloss, unevenness, etc.), the sense of uniform design of the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, if the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the heating cooker 1 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front portion of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2, etc., standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Materials Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagajukyo) in Japan.

According to the "Long-term Use Material Standards for IH Cooking Heaters (Built-in)" enacted by the "Choujukyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is installed are as follows. stipulated.
(1) The installation opening 2A has a width dimension W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F should be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-rear direction) dimension D3 of the front descending portion 2F should be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling portion depth (front-rear direction) dimension D2 of the front descending portion 2F should be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned "Long-term use parts standards", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom edge of the top plate to the bottom edge of the front panel must be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is designed so as to satisfy various constraints as described above.
In FIG. 8, A1 is the longitudinal dimension of the top plate 15, which will be described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum longitudinal dimension from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rear end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is the longitudinal dimension from the inclined portion 111 formed in the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the rear side to which it is attached (see FIG. 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertical fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slid downward a little to engage the mounting legs 112P with the fitting holes. I am trying to In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by fasteners (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upward, so that the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101 .

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber formed in a box shape as a whole from a thin metal plate, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200 . A front surface of the heating chamber 113 is formed with a large opening 113A (see FIG. 15) through which a cooking utensil (object to be heated N) such as a frying pan or an object to be cooked can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so that it can be opened and closed.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two left and right arms 116 (see FIG. 12) so that the front surface of the door 114 is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. (not shown) are rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110 . Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as a fulcrum (rotating center).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooker 1 by an expert such as a store or an installer after the cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The door 114 is installed at the stage of shipping the cooking device 1 from the factory, so that it cannot be removed later by a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household. This is to prevent microwaves from leaking from the inside of the heating chamber 113 due to poor sealing of the door 114 after installation.

In FIG. 8 , H1 is the maximum height dimension of the heating cooker 1 . That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is the height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top end to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15 and is 11 mm. With such a dimensional relationship, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is secured below the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112, respectively. It is designed to be

Next, FIG. 10 will be described. 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2; FIG. In FIG. 10, 2G denotes stepped portions formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, approaches and faces. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 to 24. FIG.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ in FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ in FIG. 11 and showing the flow of the cooling air. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line WW in FIG. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line YY in FIG. FIG. 16 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line VV in FIG. FIG. 17 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line XX of FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation section 40 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 20 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device 1 for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section 40 and various display sections. FIG. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation portion 40R and the right display portion 31R of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation section 40L and the left display section 31L of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.

(Upper unit 100)
In this Embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the heating cooker 1 . Therefore, commercial (AC) power 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100 . However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for direct connection to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out of the heating cooker 1 from the lower unit 200 .

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper case) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 12), and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass superimposed on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 except for the rear portion. . In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 that serve as outer shells.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate.
Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is formed by vertically bending the peripheral portion of a sheet of metal sheet, as will be described later, to form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, (right and left ), the side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B and a front vertical wall 16F. On the other hand, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are separately formed separately. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the ends of the above-mentioned "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a substantially uniform overall thickness, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface that does not transmit visible light. Therefore, from above the top plate 15, the functional parts below it, such as the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized.

The right IH coil 17R has a doughnut-like planar shape. And the maximum heating power of this IH coil 17R is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

Similarly, the left IH coil 17L also has a donut shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. In addition, the diameter may be increased to about 180 mm so as to be able to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. FIG. 11 shows a case where the diameter of the left IH coil 17L is made larger than the diameter of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a laterally elongated opening formed in the rear part of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has a shutter or a number of through holes for ventilation. is formed. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18 .

12 and 14, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end of the upper case 16 as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the lateral width of the rear edge of the upper case 16 .

21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 . The decorative frame protrudes rearward from the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16.例文帳に追加In other words, when viewed from above, it seems that the rear and left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 are surrounded in series (see FIG. 11).

11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. The decorative frame 25 is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external shocks (see FIG. 11).

Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushioning member made of a highly elastic material such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25 . Thereby, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26 . The top plate 15 may be designed so that one decorative frame 25 surrounds three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face or four parts (four sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L and 30R)
11 and 19, 30 is an integrated display unit. The integrated display portion 30 is installed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion in the left and right direction.
31L is a left display portion and 31R is a right display portion. These left and right display portions 31L and 31R are also installed one each on the front left side and right side lower side of the top plate 15, respectively.

The integrated display section 30 is display means used in a linked cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later. That is, it is used during microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking.

The integrated display unit 30 has a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 54) used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 51) used in the combined cooking mode KM2. They are displayed alternatively.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown). It is installed on a long horizontal operation board 41 .

The lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible rays as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15 .

The integrated display section 30 displays common information and alarms of the heating cooker 1 . For example, the selection results of the three types of heating sources of the heating cooker 1, caution information and warning information indicating the operating states of these heating sources are displayed. That is, the integrated display section 30 may display information related to the induction heating source 17 , the oven heating source 188 , and the microwave heating source 189 , so it is called the integrated display section 30 .

The integrated display section 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various types of cooking corresponding to the linked cooking mode KM3, which will be described later, and their control conditions.
The integrated display section 30 may be called a "central display section 30" from its installation position. In particular, when indicating the difference between the right side display section 31R and the left side display section 31L, it may be referred to as the "central display section 30".

Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying "inventory information" of the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display portion 31R/Left side display portion 31L)
The left display section 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in units of one minute, and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time expires. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature) and the current temperature are displayed. Note that the "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes and 59 seconds from the stage of less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in units of 1 second.

Similarly, the right display section 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right IH coil 17R. The right display section 31R basically displays information about various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left display section 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 19, 40 is an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged along the front edge of the top plate 15 so as to extend horizontally.
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of an operation board 41 which is horizontally elongated and arranged in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41 . The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating. A central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50 is provided on the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 . An integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32 .

Below the operation board 41, a flat auxiliary support plate (not shown) is installed so as to overlap vertically so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap therebetween. In other words, it has a two-layer (two-layer) structure facing each other with a space between them, so that as many electric parts and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from a second cooling fan 61, which will be described later, and is formed by a space between a cover 70, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. A lower case 101 and an upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of locations.

As is clear from FIG. 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. is fixed. In addition to the screws 51, screws 51F (not shown) are also provided for fixing the facing portions of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are coupled at a plurality of points. It is

A horizontal bent portion 16BX is formed by bending the upper end portion of the rear vertical wall 16B further rearward BK. This horizontal bent portion 16BX and the position of a flange 16A (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, are on the same horizontal line.

Due to the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports heavy objects of both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontally bent portion 16BX cooperate to firmly support such a load. It may function as a part. In other words, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A and the horizontal bent portion 16BX, which are made by bending a metal plate in series to increase the mechanical strength, support the upper case 16 itself and, as a result, also reliably support the lower case 101. It is In addition, in this first embodiment, the horizontally bent portion 16BX does not directly contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity with a large depth and large planar area. This cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104 .

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, the first embodiment has a flat upper case 16 (constituting the outer shell of the main body 10) whose top opening is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on a lower case 101 to be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101 .

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 forming part of a microwave heating device 120 to be described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Furthermore, behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 for the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted, is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted. The control board and the power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, but in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 . The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a connecting support fitting made of a metal plate, and has a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped formed of thin metal plates, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected by fastening the screws 51 and 51F (not shown). It is a solid box-shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted together as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are the maximum front-rear width dimension D5 (not shown) of the upper case 16, the maximum left-right width dimension W4 (not shown), They are the same size in terms of design. Alternatively, it is only 0.2 mm larger (at most) than the maximum longitudinal dimension D5 and the maximum lateral dimension W4 of the top opening of the lower case 101 .

Applying a slight outward force to the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the upper end of the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B widens the upper opening of the lower case 101 slightly, so that the upper case 16 can be tightly fitted inside. It can be fitted (snugly).

The term "fitting" as used in the first embodiment does not necessarily mean a state of close fitting as illustrated in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (in the front-rear and left-right directions) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and the whole is in close contact. It doesn't have to be in that state. Moreover, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it is possible to secure the main body case HC with screws 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a single rigid box-shaped structure, a support structure for the door 114, which will be described later, can also be firmly realized, and the door 114 and the peripheral portion of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 can be secured. It is useful for preventing microwave leakage in between.

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole should not be distorted or deformed. is important. Since the cushions 26 are attached to the entire lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the kitchen lower part 2. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 80 is an inverter circuit board, which is installed horizontally in the center of the upper case 16 .
The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape elongated in the horizontal direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31L, and is elongated in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the lower surface of the holder 50 so as to overlap with a small gap.

(Cooling structure of inverter circuit board)
Next, FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 26 is a longitudinal sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. FIG. 28 is a simplified perspective view for explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board.

In this type of inverter circuit board, when creating a circuit with various electronic parts, parts such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors are fixed on an insulating substrate, and these parts are wired with copper foil. to form. Since it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced by mounting with an automatic charging machine or the like. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the substrate, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the shape of the circuit substrate is basically square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference with surrounding components, overlap, and the like. Moreover, when the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of parts to be mounted is also increased, and the area of the inverter circuit board is inevitably increased.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. and a circuit 81R. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29, 30 and 33. FIG.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (radiation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 . The heat sink 82 is as shown in FIGS. That is, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows so that the two heat radiation fins 82FN face each other and are placed close to each other by several mm to 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed by radiating fins 82FN of two heat sinks 82 facing each other. The size of the gap GP2 (the width in the front-rear direction) is the same across the two front and rear heat sinks 82 in the left-right direction. For example, it is 8 mm. In order to distinguish from a (second) gap GP12, which will be described later, this gap GP2 may be referred to as a "first gap".

As can be seen from FIGS. 12 and 26, the heat sink (radiation sink) 82 has, on the slanted surface on the side opposite to the side facing each other, a power source which constitutes a part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. A control switching element 83 is attached to each. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1, RF2 passing around the radiation fins 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). One of the power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side is attached to the rear side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in front and rear two rows.
The power control switching element 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side is attached to the front side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. In addition, you may make it attach to this opposite side.

12 and 26, 70 is a cover integrally formed of a thin metal plate or plastic material that covers the entire upper portion of the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. Both left and right ends of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 serves as an inlet FI for cooling airflows RF1 and RF2, which will be described later, and the right end surface of the cover 70 serves as an inlet for cooling airflows RF1 and RF2. constitute the outlet FO of

The cover 70 is positioned to secure a constant gap GP11 with the lower surface of the coil base 17C supporting the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). It should be noted that the gap GP11 is approximately 1 mm to several mm at the maximum in linear distance.

In this Embodiment 1, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. Thereby, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. FIG. This space has the effect of reducing the magnetic influence of the IH coils 17L and 17R on the cover 70 and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The cover 70 is sized to secure a constant gap GP12 from the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80 as well. In this first embodiment, GP12 is 20 mm.
In order to distinguish from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap".

26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. In FIG. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 based on the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, which is 28 mm. H7 is also the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S and is 31 mm. 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or magnetic shield sheet (a thin aluminum plate or the like) may be placed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80 .

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the linear distance from the bottom surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16 . In this Embodiment 1, this height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 is 40 mm. The height dimension H10 does not match the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A and the like.

Since the cover 70 is directly below and close to the IH coil 17L, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover 70 should be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. . If the cover 70 is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, there is a concern that the cover 70 will be heated by the leaked magnetic flux and the temperature will rise. For example, it is advisable to use a means of stacking aluminum sheets or attaching aluminum tape.

Incidentally, when the cover 70 is made of metal, it is more preferable to electrically connect it to the upper case 16 . For example, a metal screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 directly reaches the screw hole of the cover 70 .

Since the upper case 16 is connected to a lower case 101, which will be described later, with metal screws or the like, it is also electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. By doing so, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 .

Also, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be relatively freely determined. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82 .

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 of about 21 mm is secured between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70, and the height of this gap GP12 is also the height of the first air passage F1.

A distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed downward from both the front and rear edges of the cover 70 .

The space between the pair of hanging walls 70B in the front-rear direction, that is, the dimension W9 of the space in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 26) is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a minute gap between the two, there is no problem in guiding the cooling air.

In FIG. 26, GP16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the heat radiation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. In FIG. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12 and GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the radiation fins 82FN.
In FIG. 26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm. W9 is the distance between the hanging walls 70B facing each other (the dimension of the space in the front-rear direction), which is 205 mm.

Next, returning to FIG. 25, description will be made.
W10 indicates the distance from the right side end face of the cover 70, ie, the outlet side end face, to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 25, 70A is a front notch formed at the left edge of the cover 70, that is, at the entrance side end. This front notch portion 70A is for guiding part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70. As shown in FIG.
A plurality of front notch portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP14 indicates the gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end face of the cover 70 . This gap GP14 is about 40 mm. A gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end face of the cover 70 . Since the gap GP15 is very small in FIG. 25, it is not shown.

In FIG. 25, XB denotes the intersection point between the partition wall 11 and the "blow-out line" FL1 passing through the center point of the blow-out port 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and perpendicular to the tip surface of the blow-out port 60A. showing.
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to a center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction. Note that the IH coils 17L and 17R may be inclined with respect to a straight line (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27) that simply crosses the partition wall 11 instead of the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction.

XF denotes a point (point of intersection) at which a "blow-out line" FL2 passing through the center point of the blow-out port 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and perpendicular to the tip surface of the blow-out port 61A intersects with the partition wall 11. ing. These intersection points XB and XF will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
Note that the blower lines FL1 and FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for convenience of explanation of the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blower lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
An installation interval W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 27, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2. This linear distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the blowout port 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is positioned between the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82F from behind with a straight line (reference line) BL passing through the center of the gap GP2. It is directed to heat sink 82B.
The outlet 60A is oblique (angle θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 interposes the straight line (reference line) BL and is oblique (at an angle of θ2) to the straight line (reference line) BL from the forward direction.
Although the magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is "θ1>θ2", they may be the same.

As can be seen from FIG. 27, in the first embodiment, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. The positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 and the directions of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 change.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sinks 82 include 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. As the heat sink 82B on the rear BK side, there are 82B1 and 82B2. In addition, when viewed from the front side of the heating cooker 1, the heat sink on the front left side of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear direction is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1, and the heat sink installed a little away on the front right side. may be referred to as the "front second heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink located on the rear left side is called a "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed a little apart on the rear right side is called a "rear second heat sink" 82B1. 82B2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 26 again.
A partition wall 11 is integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70 . If the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, it can be formed integrally as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it will be called a partition member 11 . Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, they are collectively referred to as “partition walls” 11 .

The partition wall 11 extends over the entire length from the right end to the left end, and the front surface and the rear surface (rear surface) are formed flat. This is for minimizing the air path resistance of the cooling airflows RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first air path F1. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-rear direction is about 2.0 mm.

The partition wall 11 is desirably made of a highly electrically insulating material (for example, a plastic material). 12, 13 and 15, illustration of the partition wall 11 is omitted.

Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, D6 is the longitudinal maximum width dimension that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52 and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction on the rear side of the partition plate 52 .

24 and 25, D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the later-described partition plate 52, which determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIGS. 13 and 24). is. W8 is the maximum left-right dimension (lateral width) that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16 .

The two IH coils 17L, 17 are supported from below by a part called a coil base 17C (see FIG. 12) made of heat-resistant plastic. Alternatively, one structure may be commonly used for the two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and is fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70 so that the cover 70 is always pushed up toward the top plate 15 and supported. A detailed description of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the IH coils 17L and 17R do not change their facing distance (distance) from the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 over a long period of time. A plurality of large communication holes (not shown) are formed in the coil base 17C so that air can easily pass through the entire coil base 17C in the vertical direction.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change during induction heating cooking. As a result, changes in the high frequency voltage and high frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply the high frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above the first horizontal plane HP1 that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. In other words, it exists above the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R and is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C and the heat sink 82. As shown in FIG.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 larger than the planar shape of the cover 70 . Between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a first air passage F1 that is long in the horizontal direction is defined. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material such as heat-resistant plastic.

12 and 15, 102 is a metal exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. An end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 extends through a gap GP1 formed between a later-described partition plate 52 and a rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 13). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates the gap GP1 like a chimney.

The TS 10 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and its surroundings.
As shown in FIG. 15, the temperature sensor TS10 is placed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat sensitive portion is exposed inside the exhaust duct 102. As shown in FIG.
Moreover, since the installation position of the temperature sensor TS10 is preferably close to the rear surface of the heating chamber 113, it is close to the communication port 174 formed in the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

The temperature sensor TS10 is detected not only during cooking by driving the oven heating source 188, but also during cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (for example, thawing frozen food) (cooking process of combined cooking mode KM2 described later). ) also constantly measures the temperature. The temperature detection data of this temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control section 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper end portions of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle.
A horizontal flange 101A is formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, to the outside at a right angle.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screws 51 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are made of a thin metal plate, they are still integrated. can be made into a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

Means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts, instead of the screws 51 described above. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. Since these flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed while being compressed. If the cushion material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing water or the like from entering may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the heating cooker 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, 311 denotes a lower space formed between the kitchen furniture 2 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the main body case HC, and has a size of about 10 mm. is.

301R is a right side gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
301L is a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

Reference numeral 302 denotes a front space of about 10 mm formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112 as well. configuration.

The size of the front space 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed, but as shown in FIG. It should be secured. In the description of the heating cooker 1, "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the heating cooker 1, and does not refer to the air outside the house HA shown in FIG.

The lower space 311, the right space 301R, the left space 301L and the front space 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by starting the operation of the heating cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right gap 301R, and the left gap 301L. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302. As shown in FIG.

Next, returning to FIG. 18, description will be made.
W3 is the maximum width dimension of the front portion of the heating cooker 1 . This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm.

A gap 303 is formed between the inner surface (right side) of the right side wall member present on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112 . This gap is ensured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the left front cover 112 , a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the inner surface (left side) of the left wall surface material present on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 . Note that the sizes of the left and right gaps 303 may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking device 1 . Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, there may be cases where elastic sealing material (cushion material) is arranged on the stepped portion 2G (see FIG. 10) and the gap 303 is almost closed. However, even in such a state, the internal cooling function of the heating cooker 1 does not suffer at all.

As shown in FIG. 18, the front cover 112 extends outward beyond the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L. Therefore, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, the front sides of the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are covered by the two left and right front covers 112 .

Since the front sides of the right space 301R and the left space 301L are covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user feels as if there is a large gap between the heating cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. never give.

Since the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are secured in the installed state of the heating cooker 1, the outside air is reliably introduced for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. can be done

18, WS is the width of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. In FIG. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be brought into close contact with each other to prevent leakage of microwaves, and also for forming choke chambers 194 (to be described later) at the front, rear, left, and right positions of the opening 113A ( See Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left side vertical wall 16L of the upper case 16, respectively. A rotating shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical direction, and the rotor blades are Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is employed for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 . This is because static pressure is high and air resistance is high in a space with high mounting density. In general, there is a type of centrifugal fan that has a single suction port and blows out (discharges) in all radial directions. However, Embodiment 1 is of a type having only one blowing direction.

24, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61. FIG.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool an IH coil installation space CK inside an upper space 300A, which will be described later. Therefore, these two cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as "upper cooling fans".

The outlets 60A and 61A are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. That is, the two outlets 60A and 61A are both located above the common first horizontal plane (HP1) and directed rightward. The “first horizontal plane” HP1 referred to in the first embodiment refers to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotational speed during normal induction heating operation. . However, in the first embodiment, the IH control unit 90 varies the number of rotations to change the amount of air blown. For example, when increasing the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, In some cases, the number of revolutions is increased to increase the air flow rate in order to increase the cooling effect. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated with different rotational speeds in order to deal with "beat noise", which will be described later.

Rated specifications include, for example, rated voltage, working voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, and the like. By changing the applied voltage or voltage application time (on-duty time) within the working voltage range, the number of revolutions can be changed.
In contrast, in Embodiment 1, a PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the pulse width duty cycle (pulse width The ratio of H and L) is changed to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60 . This PWM control is also employed in the second cooling fan 61 .

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding rotating blades (not shown). not shown).

Directly below the suction ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are ventilation holes 64 (Fig. 14 and FIG. 16). This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16 . This vent hole 64 communicates with a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164 thereof.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (air intake duct), which is provided to directly communicate the vent hole 64 with the vent hole 164 of the lower case 101 . This recess 165 is formed by recessing from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. Note that this dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, the vertical center point of the blowout port 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the electrical components mounted on the upper surface of the power circuit board 55 to be described later. The vertical center point of 85 is located on one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the positional relationship is such that the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when traveling straight to the right. The horizontal plane defined by this horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from a commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55 through a filter circuit board 54 which will be described later. Then, the power circuit board 55 converts alternating current into direct current. Therefore, electric parts 85 such as a diode and a transformer 57 (not shown) for converting AC to DC are mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control section 90 that controls induction cooking reduces the amount of heating of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown by the first cooling fan 60 per unit time may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 24), such as thermistors, which are fixed on the surface of the heat sink 82 in close contact.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a roar will occur.
For this reason, in the first embodiment, as a countermeasure against the beat noise, control is performed so that the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are set to different values within the range where the beat noise is likely to occur. there is That is, it is not always operating at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed in the rear part of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16 . The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 into the front and rear. It should be noted that the term "dividing" as used herein does not mean strict shielding such as complete blocking of air circulation. It is sufficient that the rearward flow of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 over the upper end surface of the partition plate 52 can be suppressed to some extent.

An upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage extending from the ventilation hole 64 to the front surface of the partition plate 52 inside the upper unit 100 . The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 described above exists in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 . For this reason, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, and is substantially connected to the outside of the heating cooker 1 .

In FIG. 24, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, 53 is an exhaust port plate installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and has a large number of through holes 53A. , the cooling air directed to the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52A is discharged to the external space of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust cover 19. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 24, LF is the exhaust port size indicating the range (width dimension) to the left of the later-described partition plate 12 for the exhaust air exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size of the exhaust port is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53A and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53A (the configuration shown in FIG. 24), the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A determines the exhaust range LF.
The width dimension of the right exhaust window 52B and the formation range of the through hole 53B are equivalent.

In FIG. 24, 54 is a filter circuit board arranged at the rear right corner of the upper case 16 . This filter circuit board removes the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents the noise from flowing out (reverse) to the commercial (AC) power supply side on the input terminal side. It is mounted with electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of a power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is located on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after exiting the first air passage F1 Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the longitudinal direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the longitudinal direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction. CL2 is a center line passing through the rotation center of each rotor blade (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged on a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. In FIG. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61 .

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. Part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. In other words, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 join before reaching the through hole 53A of the exhaust port plate 53 .

24, GP1 is the gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. In FIG. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

24 and 25, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. As shown in FIG. A partition plate 13 is also installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 .

The space GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 is partitioned into two spaces on the left and right sides by the partition plate 12 . An exhaust duct 102 vertically extends from below on the left side of the partition plate 12 . Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, the terminal end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) for discharging the air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be arranged. However, in this Embodiment 1, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not arranged.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, 14 is a plate-like or rib-like (uplift-like) partition wall installed vertically. The partition wall 14 is formed integrally with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) placed over the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG.

The support plate 29 (not shown), like the support plate 71, is made of an electrically insulating plastic material.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front of the partition plate 52 . However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15 . In other words, the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, but the space behind the cover 70 is not completely partitioned into left and right sides by the partition wall 14. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly through the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling airs RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. They are separated and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly through the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling airs RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling airflows RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
24 and 25, the cooling air discharged from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air discharged from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When collectively referring to these two cooling winds, reference numeral RF4 is used in the following description.

(Detailed Configuration of Input Operation Unit 40)
Next, referring back to FIGS. 19 and 20, the main part of the input operation section 40 will be described.
19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation portion formed on the upper surface of the front side of the top plate 15. As described below, the input operation portion utilizes changes in capacitance when the user touches it lightly with a finger or the like. Various input keys (touch keys) that can be input by pressing are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section (first individual operation section) 40R, a central operation section 40M, and a left operation section (second individual operation section) 40L. Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off a commercial power supply 99, which will be described later. This operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end of the right operation section 40R. The following description is based on the premise that the operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation section 40 (see FIG. 19).

The right operation unit 40R is for inputting only the induction heating source 9, so it may be called an "individual operation unit". Similarly, the left operation section 40L may also be called an "individual operation section".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "common operation unit" because it is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. This "common operating section" also includes a "cooperative operating section" 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter substrate 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. The commercial power source 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power circuit portion (not shown in FIG. 25) of the lower unit 200. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a total of five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operating section 40R. These input keys 43R1-43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Also, the operation of the right IH coil 17R, which has started the heating operation, can be stopped. Therefore, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the selection function of the right heating unit 17HR is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after that, there is a function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, every time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be called third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 and the input key 43R1 are used to start the heating operation in the "single (heating) cooking" mode using either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9. It is a means of commanding.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating.
When the left input key 43R2 of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is lowered by one step each time the input key 43R2 is touched. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), when this input key 43R2 is touched once, it is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the heating power is increased by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, if the thermal power is 2500 W (thermal power level 8), touching the input key 42R3 once allows selection of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting a timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which a user can set a cooking time, and the induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a predetermined display is performed on the right display section 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the completion of cooking by voice. is performed on When the set time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, the induction heating is automatically stopped, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the elapse of the set time.

In the first embodiment, both the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the speech synthesizer 95 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit" AN.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one of a plurality of control menus can be selected each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the selection of the induction heating source 9, such as "boiling", "boiling", "deep-frying (automatic cooking)", etc., as shown in FIG. Control mode, in other words, type of control. That is, "boiling water", "simmering", "deep-frying" and the like differ in the drive time of the IH coil 17R, the heat power, the drive pattern for changing the heat power, and the like.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the final name of the food to be cooked or the name of the ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of food items to be cooked, not the "control menu" referred to here. In other words, it can be said that the "control menu" comprehensively expresses the types of heating, cooking methods, conditions, etc. until cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 is sometimes called an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from the control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 23. FIG. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time.
That is, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating portion 17HL is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after induction heating is started, the heating operation can be instantaneously stopped.
The input key 43L1 may be called third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL, like the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operating section 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are touched, a thermal power level raised by one level is selected from the specified thermal power value data table, or specified by a thermal power level lowered by one level. You can choose the firepower of

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time similarly to the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R.
When the timer cooking is finished, the left display section 31L displays the end of the timer cooking in the same manner as the input key 43R4, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the end of the timer cooking.

44L is a touch input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation section 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu selectable with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu selectable with the right input key 44R.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operating section 40L are arranged on a straight line in the left-right direction, as is clear from FIGS.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
The ten touch input keys are described below.

The leftmost input key 43KP is used to set various operations and displays of the heating cooker 1 as a user desires.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the later-described integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30. FIG.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning timing of heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four levels of maximum power consumption: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Audio guide audio setting (6) Audio guide volume setting (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from heating chamber 113 (speech synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30 Necessity of warning)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limit function of a home power control device)
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (1-minute unit setting changed to 5-minute or 30-minute unit) (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (professional) mode (11) Inventory information acquired from refrigerator 401 Setting of type (range) (12) Setting of display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of cooperative cooking mode KM3 (13) Complex Setting of display priority (specific control menu to be displayed by default) of each control menu (for example, "microwave grill", "boiled under leafy vegetables") of cooking mode KM2 (14) Turning on main power switch 97 After that, when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened, the setting of the cooking mode is automatically (preferentially) displayed on the integrated display section 30 .

The beginner mode is an optional function for people (users) who are unfamiliar with the use of the heating cooker 1, and when this beginner mode is set, the content of the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 is more detailed and polite. become. Further, regarding the input operation on the input operation unit 40, voice guidance is increased, and display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is increased.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, reference information (described later) displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 (including the additional information 331 to be used) is increased, or the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesizer 95 is increased. Therefore, the function that can support the user's input operation is strengthened.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the setting of the cooking mode automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is either the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2. It sets one.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the opening of the door 114 is detected by the integrated controller MC.
It is presumed that the user will cook using the heating chamber 113, and first either the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This is a function of automatically displaying on the integrated display unit 30 .
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, and 2B: FIG. 46), which will be described later, is displayed. to be displayed.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, a specific input key other than the input key 43KP is "long pressed" (hereinafter referred to as "long pressed") on the central operation unit 40M. ) to select one setting menu from the above-mentioned "function setting menu", and subsequently change the desired setting contents.

Alternatively, when two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are "long-pressed" at the same time, one of the above-described "function setting menus" can be called up and the desired settings can be changed. can.

The "long press" means, for example, a state of being continuously pressed for 5 seconds or more.
Whether or not it is in the "long press" state is determined by comparing the timing of touch input on the input operation unit 40 with a reference value by the integrated control device MC. That is, the timing at which the input keys (for example, 43M1 and 43M2) are pressed simultaneously in the central operation unit 40M is the ON (when touched) - OFF (when not touched) transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC. ) signal, the integrated controller MC measures the time from the ON signal to the OFF signal to determine whether it is a "long press".

The type (range) of inventory information to be acquired from the refrigerator 401 is, for example, limited to only frozen foods or foods that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189 .

After pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode", by operating touch type input keys 43M1 to 43M3, which will be described later, arranged on the central operation unit 40M, the heating cooker The above 11 types of individual functions defined in 1 "function setting menu" can be individually changed.

In the integrated display unit 30, when the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are being selected, the input key 43KP is pressed so as not to switch the function mode. input function is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting portion 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting operation of the control mode and control conditions (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the heating cooker 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, usage environment (electric power situation of the home where the appliance is installed), and the like. Note that when such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, so when the user selects the linked cooking mode KM3 as described later, It is used to determine whether or not to permit use of the linked cooking mode KM3.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, there is a common operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 which is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG.
On the other hand, within the range of the central operation unit 40M, the area excluding the input key 43KP is a cooperative operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later.

In the following description, the "individual operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), so it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. .

43MC is an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation section 40MC. Consists of touch keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily confirm the characters "cooking" and the figure indicating it. However, the relevant input key 43MC appears to shine only during the period of the cooperative cooking mode.
In other words, after all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops emitting light to indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not valid.
The input key 43MC may be called a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in heating chamber 113 by oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189; A combined cooking mode KM2 using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "compound cooking mode". When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing the "compound cooking mode", either microwave heating or oven heating alone can be performed.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display section 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This point will be explained later with reference to FIGS.

Further, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display section 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 75-102.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. It is divided into 30R and displayed.

Of the three display areas, the left display area 30L is hereinafter referred to as the "first area". Further, the display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as "third area". It should be noted that a method of dividing and displaying one display screen into a plurality of sections in this manner is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940. omitted.

43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information to be displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display section driving circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which the input key 43M1 is operated to display individual names indicating the "compound cooking mode" KM2 or the "single cooking mode" KM1 on the integrated display section 30 will be described.

When the left input key 43M1 of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the front-rear center. The display screen switches with the image displayed. That is, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, the "control menu" stored in the integrated control device MC (in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2), the identification information of the food to be cooked (in the case of the linked cooking mode KM3) ), etc., one of the desired display information (for example, a name specifying "microwave grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, different information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. to switch the display screen. That is, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information ) is reversed.

Thus, by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1, the user can display the desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L. .

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching screens displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the information displayed in the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for assisting user's input for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input key 43M3 is touch-operated in a specific scene, such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when guidance information 30P, which will be described later, is displayed, the third "Guidance information" 30P that serves as a reference for user operations is displayed in area R (see FIG. 49).

The display of the guidance information 30P automatically disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and the state of the previous display screen is restored. Details of such operation will be described later with reference to FIGS.

43MS is a start unit that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is composed of touch input keys. It also serves as an input key for instructing transition to the linked cooking mode KM3.

Conversely, 43MT is an end unit that can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations, and is composed of touch input keys. It also serves as an input key for issuing a command to cancel the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need input functions.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always need input functions. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches without recognition, the integrated control device MC immediately after starting the heating cooker 1, according to the cooking condition input process, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled so as not to accept input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. , 27M.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, in the right operating section 40R, individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27R2 shares one.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R. is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind and adjacent to the input key 43R1 is activated. emits blue light. As a result, it can be understood that it is in a state in which it is possible to receive an operation input.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting units 27R1 emit light in a unified color (red) to notify the user that the operation is accepted. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display section driving circuit 63 based on the command from the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light in one color, the light emission color may be changed from blue to red, for example, to indicate to the user that an operation is being accepted. This also applies to individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

In addition, before the input key 43R1 is operated, the individual light emitting section 27R1 adjacent to the input key 43R1 immediately behind is not illuminated, and when the operation is accepted, the light emission is started and continues to be emitted. good. In addition, a method may be adopted in which only light is emitted to indicate that an operation input is possible in advance (at the stage before the operation), and that the operation input is received is not indicated by light. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is received.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23, also in the left operation unit 40L, individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27L4 shares one.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the central operation unit 40M as well, individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS and 43MT. are doing.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating starts, the input keys (43M1, 43M2, etc.) on the central operation unit 40M cannot be input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT is maintained valid. Therefore, the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode can be stopped at any time to cancel the cooperative cooking mode.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started, pressing the input key 43MT cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the middle. The dedicated state of the left heating unit 17HL is immediately released.
Therefore, after this cancellation, it is possible to start inputting the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking.

When the input key 43M1 or the input key 43MC is operated to display the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, the previous input settings are changed. are all cancelled. Therefore, if the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is to be displayed, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M. Light emission and extinguishing with a unified emission color are controlled. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, a pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting section 27M3. Since each of the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also has a pair, each of the individual light emitting portions 27M4 and 27M5 is shared. In the following description, the reference numeral 27M is used when collectively referring to the individual light emitting units in the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 22, an individual light emitting section 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end of the right operating section 40R.

In order to avoid user's unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding, it is desirable to unify the lighting modes (continuous lighting, blinking, lighting colors, etc.) of the lighting display sections 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above for the three operating sections. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting display portions 27R, 27L, and 27M of the right operating portion 40R, left operating portion 40L, and central operating portion 40M have the same light emitting form.

In order to indicate that the input function of each input key is valid, there is also a method of lighting the operation part of the input key itself. must be manufactured from a light-transmissive material, and there is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the input key operating portion, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions avoiding the operation unit of the input keys as described above. Here, "adjacent" means a positional relationship in which the two are close to each other from the user's point of view, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R, and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood. . Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a structure is adopted in which it is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 20, heating power display sections 67L and 67R are provided behind the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L so as to indicate the heating power level during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display portions 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power levels in the right heating portion 17HR and the left heating portion 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine stages are indicated by light, from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W).

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the spaces below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The luminescent color may be changed according to the magnitude of the heating power. In this Embodiment 1, for example, thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red light, the remaining 8 blue lights (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lights, the remaining 7 blue lights The left end of the thermal power display sections 67L and 67R , when the object is heated with a thermal power lower than the minimum thermal power level 1 in the "thermal insulation mode" (see "display screen 3A" in FIG. 47), the LED is illuminated to display the thermal insulation display. 67H is provided.

The left display section 31L displays the thermal power level value of the left heating section 17HL with numerals 1-9. When the minimum firepower level is 1, "1" is displayed, and when the maximum firepower level is 9, "9" is displayed. The thermal power display on the left display section 31L matches the thermal power level displayed by the thermal power display section 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Also, the heating power level value of the right heating section 17HR is displayed with numerals 1 to 9 on the right display section 31R. The display conditions are exactly the same as for the left display section 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light-emitting display portions 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display portions 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display portions 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display portions 67L, 67R are arranged in the horizontal direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are located behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R on a straight line in the horizontal direction. Because it is lined up, operability and visibility are good. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIG. 20, 68 is a heat source display section arranged behind the integrated display section 30 .
Since the heat source display section 68 uses a plurality of heat sources using the central operation section 40M, the heat sources that are actually in operation are displayed with LED light.

The heat source display section 68 is composed of three display sections as shown in FIG.
The leftmost display section 68L is a display section that indicates that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and near the front side, the character "range" is displayed to easily indicate that it is microwave heating. It's made for you to understand.

The display portion 68M in the center is a display portion that indicates that "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.
"Grill" is written on the front side so that it is easy to understand that it is grill cooking.

The rightmost display portion 68R is a display portion that indicates a case where “oven cooking” is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

In "oven cooking", unlike grill cooking, the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is grasped and reflected (feedbacked) in the power control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in detail later.

20 and 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display section provided immediately behind the heat source display section 68. As shown in FIG. The high temperature display section 69 causes the LED light emitting section to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC to display that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
The integrated controller MC issues a high temperature display command based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control section 159, as will be described later.

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display section 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, namely, the left heating portion 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating portion 17HR, and individually displays the conditions of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction cooking is performed in the left heating part 17HL, the user can be alerted by notifying that the left side range from the center of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating part 17HL is high temperature.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display section 69 displays the high temperature, for example, when the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking is finished, the IH control section 90 continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A, with outside air.

Returning to FIG. 19, description will be made.
47 is a touch type input key for Internet connection command requesting wireless communication to the integrated control device MC. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, the home gateway 411 is wirelessly connected and external information can be acquired via the home gateway 411 .

46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to the ventilator 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. An infrared transmission unit 48 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) is installed below this window. In practice, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. FIG. The sheet is of course made of a material that is transparent to infrared signals.

The input key 47 may be pressed to temporarily display the details of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 manually on the integrated display unit 30 during execution of the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. It should be noted that the stock information in this case may display, for example, the name of the frozen food (for example, "rice" or "dumpling") and its amount (one portion, weight 200 g, etc.).

During execution of the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heat cooker 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the input key 47 described above. This will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG.

In FIG. 19, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) for receiving radio waves from the outside and transmitting radio waves or infrared signals to the outside, and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown). I have. The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display substrate 41 with a small gap from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. The purpose of maintaining such a distance is that there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves may be lowered if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close.

When installed on the kitchen furniture 2 , the upper surface of the heating cooker 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2 . Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust air from the exhaust port side terminal part 102E (see FIG. 15) of the exhaust duct 102 can be similarly discharged above the kitchen furniture 2. FIG.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG.
In FIGS. 29 to 31, part of the configuration is omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown.

29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 31, only the main control means in FIG. 29 are extracted, and arrows indicate transmission/reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, and the like.

In FIG. 30, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power supply 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 denotes a power supply circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 denotes a DC power conversion section for converting AC power from a commercial power supply into DC. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant-voltage current is supplied from the power supply circuit 91 to the integrated control device MC.

The integrated controller MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 as described above (indicated by the dashed frame in FIGS. 24 and 25). However, it may be arranged on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41 . In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200 .

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input part, an output part, a storage part, and a CPU (arithmetic control part). (stored). In addition to the storage unit (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is incorporated. The storage device MM may store an energization control program for the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control section that controls induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores in advance an energization control program corresponding to various control menus for induction heating. It also incorporates a storage device (not shown) for recording abnormality monitoring information.

Part of the functions of the IH control section 90 may be performed by a second IH control section 90A (not shown). For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 to control the inputs and outputs of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all heat cooking operations such as induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking, the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality is centrally monitored by the integrated controller MC.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 96 denotes a clock circuit, also called a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is used for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven across. For example, this may be a radio-controlled clock, and if requested by the integrated control device MC, it always informs the current date and exact time in seconds. there is

Even if the main power source of the heating cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and the latest correct time is always transmitted to the integrated control device MC. For this reason, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and saved at the correct time. Note that the clock circuit 96 may be omitted and the integrated control device MC may have the clock function.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds the specified value or the upper limit set individually by the user. It also has a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value. There is

In general, a "demand control device" or "demand control device" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (power demand). Automatically check the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, notify with an alarm, etc. If you set the automatic stop of the equipment that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shuts down electrical equipment when possible. After that, it is known that the electrical equipment is automatically reset after a certain period of time has passed, and it is said that it will be very effective in managing the contracted power with the electric power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 of Embodiment 1 is provided to allow the heating cooker 1 itself to have the function of suppressing power consumption as described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware. Anything added later can be implemented.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as a whole by operating the function setting input key 43KP to set only one of the four levels as described above. Note that this setting can be made in the input operation unit 40 while viewing the above-mentioned four-level numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. . Such a simple setting method is introduced in Japanese Patent No. 6012780, for example.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays "Peak cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting" are displayed, so that the function of suppressing the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as described above can be easily added or set to change or cancel the function. can be The upper limit value data for the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used in the determination of the “permission condition”, which will be described later.

A signal transmission unit 73 is provided to transmit various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 . For example, it corresponds to a signal line and a connector that can transmit a signal by wire. Also, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly.
The signal transmission section 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control section 90 .

The IH control section 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are at an abnormally high temperature. For example, in the central operation unit 40M, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc. are arranged. (For example, 60° C.) is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed the temperature.

When the measured temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the "abnormal preliminary state" has occurred. The abnormal preliminary state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60.degree. C. to 65.degree. If the temperature exceeds 65° C., the danger increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes that it is a true abnormal condition.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and control is performed to lower the heating power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65° C., the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormal, and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, when the IH coil being driven is the right IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R supplying high-frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R, resonance capacitor, etc. is stopped. 94L is an induction heating circuit for the left IH coil 17L.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, the problem may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 cooling the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Furthermore, it may be used together with measures to lower the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least during the period from such an abnormal preliminary state to an emergency stop, the electrical and physical changes in the main parts during induction heating (for example, the temperature of the integrated display section 30 described above) are indicated (abnormality monitoring). Information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. FIG.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not stopped immediately, the air blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotational speed of the rotor blades is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the activation command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" in the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "boiling", "simmering", "deep-frying", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the thermal power of induction heating are also displayed in chronological order. Recorded. If an emergency stop occurs due to an abnormal condition on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the heating cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, all heating on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides is performed. The integrated controller MC acquires monitoring information about the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73 .

In the inverter circuit board 80, one inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right IH coil 17R and one inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left IH coil 17L are mounted.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven by the IH control section 90 independently of each other. In addition, when these inverter circuits are named generically, the code|symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 95 is a speech synthesizer for synthesizing electronically produced speech. The voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the user of the input operation guidance and the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality by voice from the speaker 95S each time. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part of the notification unit AN (see FIG. 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display section 30, and the like. . The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control section 90 .

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be of a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3-TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in the central gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, as shown in FIG. 19, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. In other words, the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, can be measured in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use thermistors as contact sensors. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15 via thermally conductive interpositions. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 can be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 19) uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. As shown in FIG. Then, the ambient temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 is detected. The two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use thermistors and are mounted on the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above. As described above, a thermistor type temperature sensor TS10 for detecting the internal atmosphere temperature of the heating chamber 113 is also installed.

At least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 are also provided on the lower unit 200 side to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, the details of which will be described later.

29 and 30, reference numeral 62 denotes a cooling fan driving circuit, which controls driving power of motors 60M and 61M for driving the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. FIG. That is, under the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62, the blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are changed in multiple steps independently of each other.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display drive circuit 63 may be composed of a dedicated microcomputer. Also, the control program (software) that exhibits the functions of the display section drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensing device that detects shaking at the time of an earthquake, and when it senses a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or more, it sends a vibration sensing signal to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC Upon receiving the signal, it judges that an earthquake has occurred, and immediately cuts off the power supply of all the heating means in use.

29 and 30, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit shown in FIG. 19, which receives commands from the integrated control unit MC and transmits information. Also, it receives a command from the integrated control device MC and acquires information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

29 and 30, EM is an anomaly detector. This abnormality detection unit monitors a detection electrode (not shown) arranged on the back surface of the top plate 15 and a change in the current flowing through the detection electrode. A judgment circuit (not shown) for judging boiling and overflow is provided.

When detecting an abnormality, the abnormality detection unit EM transmits an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated control device MC outputs an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to emergency stop the heating units 17HL and 17HR which are in the heating operation. Even in this case, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate.

Further, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, if microwave heating or oven heating cooking (including the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode) is being performed in the heating chamber 113, these heating Operation continues unaffected. Therefore, if the two cooling fans 128, 129 were in operation, they continue to operate.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be explained.
12 to 17, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. As shown in FIG. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates by spot welding or screws. In Embodiment 1, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

Reference numeral 101H denotes a body portion that constitutes three planes (vertical planes) of the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that is inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2 .

A front plate 101F constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101 and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is brought into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F to prevent microwaves from leaking through the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114.例文帳に追加101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically continuously from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101 .

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120 . The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140 .

The oven heat source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven chamber) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 to directly heat the food to be cooked. It should be noted that the following description is based on the premise that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121", which will be described later, unless there is a particular contradiction.

12, 13 and 15 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120. FIG.
From the front side, the main parts are installed in the following order.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is arranged on the frontmost side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 serving as a microwave generation source and a waveguide 123 surrounding an oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are arranged.
A motor 126 for rotating or rotating the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 127 denotes a power circuit board for supplying the output of microwave heating and power to the magnetron 122. A power circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54 and a A microwave heating controller 130 is mounted.

12 and 13, reference numeral 128 denotes a third cooling fan, which is arranged directly below a box-shaped case A150 that accommodates the inverter circuit board 121. As shown in FIG. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box-like shape with no bottom surface.

A fourth cooling fan 129 is arranged just below a box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. Several heat radiation fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiation part 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with an open bottom and no bottom.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may be collectively called "lower cooling fan". This is because these two cooling fans 128 and 199 have the function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
An inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is vertically housed within the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans.
It is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotating shaft at the center of the rotating blade is in the vertical (perpendicular) direction.

The case A 150 and the case B 151 have an opening on the entire bottom surface as described above, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged to lie inside the opening, respectively.

In FIG. 12, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are formed integrally or separately inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B which will be described later.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152F is a front intake port, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128. As shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, a ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the interior of the upper unit 100 and outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 are provided. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the heat into the interior of the lower unit 200 are arranged opposite to each other with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween.

In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween, there are the second intake ports 152B and 152F on the right side, and a vent (first intake port) on the left side. 164 and a vent 64 .

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 153 denotes a duct installed above the heat radiating section 122H, which guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating section 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. It is.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 154 is a case C, which accommodates the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating controller 130 in a sealed state. This case C154 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating.

The case C154 is configured by stacking two parts, a lid 154A on the rear side and a container-like or box-like main body 154B on the front side. A large opening formed in the front side of the main body 154B is closed from the rear by the lid 154A.

The case C154 has a main body 154B on the front side and a substrate (not shown) on which the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control section 130 can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far away from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 as possible so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113 . It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation will not be impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, the case C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16 .

12 and 13, reference numeral 131 denotes a door open/close detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to secure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 . A representative door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 of this type is known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the patent document, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch. is proposed.

Further, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-214147, a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch are used to open and close the power supply of an inverter circuit, and when the first interlock switch is short-circuited, the switch is inserted into the power supply circuit. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch in order to turn off the fuse that is in the circuit.

12 and 13 show the main parts of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 employed in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. If either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality, a monitor switch 133 (Fig. not shown) are also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact.

In FIG. 12, 136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, 137 is a support plate on which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A and 136B, etc. are collectively attached. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is mainly composed of various switches mounted on the support plate 137 as described above.

If the mounting positions of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B vary during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing for operating each switch will deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, a closing detector 139 (see FIG. 30) of the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137 so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. Operation check, adjustment, replacement, etc. of the closing detector 139 can be performed during manufacturing and after-sales service.

12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper portion of the case A150 housing the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

The communication port 138A guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 as shown in FIG. 14 to a space 141 which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 142, which will be described later, and is used for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160, which will be described later. there is

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor substrate (not shown) housed inside the sensor case, and one or more infrared rays mounted on the surface of this sensor substrate. Main components are a detection element (not shown) and a lens (not shown) attached and fixed to the sensor case facing the infrared detection element.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected over a wide range. A form in which the temperature at a wide angle is detected may be used.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 161 denotes a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that the cooling air can pass therethrough. In Embodiment 1, a gap of about several millimeters is formed.

14 and 15, 162 is a cooking plate made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. The cooking plate 162 is formed to have external dimensions such that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 14, HV is the effective height dimension from the top surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 . In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the concave portion 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113. In FIG.

In this Embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example and the disclosure is not limited to this dimensional configuration.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A with this inner width dimension, it can be said that it is the frontage dimension that determines whether or not the food to be cooked and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), it can be said that it is a dimension that determines whether or not cooking utensils such as the food to be cooked, the cooking plate 162, and the frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 has a heater 163 .
The heater 163 is an electric radiation heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
163A is an upper heater fixed on the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity, and 163B is a lower heater fixed under the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity. .

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W. Also, the lower heater can be selected from multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W.

In FIG. 14, 166R is a right partition plate which is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R with the right wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A left partition plate 166L is vertically installed to form a gap GP5L with the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (radiation) from the heating chamber 113 .

Reference numeral 167 denotes an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper portion of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and its size is several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air with the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 168 denotes a lower heat shield plate having a longitudinal cross-sectional shape vertically symmetrical to that of the upper heat shield plate 167 . The lower heat shield plate covers the entire area below the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap is a closed space so that air does not flow with the outside. The periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 is fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 169 denotes an upper case superimposed on the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 . A lower case 170 overlaps the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 .

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shapes, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP8 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in the GP9. If each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a structure in which multiple layers are stacked instead of a single layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical and horizontal dimensions) of each heat insulating material 175A to 17D is at least larger than the installation range of each of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 171 denotes a partition plate that defines a passage 172 above the upper case 169 through which the cooling air RF5 flows. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper portion of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171 , and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173 .

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 174 denotes a communication port formed in the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the communication port 174 is connected to the inlet portion of the exhaust duct 102. As shown in FIG. 102E is the terminal end which is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent upper and lower internal passages 102A and 102B. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
In addition, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and having a raised temperature flows through the other internal passage 102B.

32, the exhaust duct 102 has an internal passage (internal route) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal route) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the merging part.

The air velocity of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the outlet of the cooling air RF5 with the opening area of the air passage narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the outlet. Due to such action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, the two cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 are both efficiently discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that a method of merging at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted without adopting such an induction structure.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large feeding port formed in the rear wall (rear wall) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the feeding port 180 from the outside. It is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181 . The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181 . The motor 126 for driving the antenna is thus fixed to the back side of the waveguide 123 via the heat-resistant sealing material 184 .

Reference numeral 126A denotes a rotating shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, which is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end) of the rotary shaft 126A. Although the rotary shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 is made of plastic, ceramic, or the like that is heat-resistant and insulated. It may also be formed of a material having excellent properties.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 185 denotes a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotating shaft 126A with a predetermined size. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to effectively prevent microwave leakage, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is placed on the side closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure, so that microwaves from around the rotation shaft 126A are absorbed. You may try to prevent leakage. In addition, the choke structure in the microwave heating device is disclosed in Japanese patent documents, for example, JP-A-2011-174669, JP-A-2010-255978, JP-A-63-172828 (a quarter-wave choke combined use of the room and the radio wave absorber), etc., so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In FIG. 15, LA indicates the dimension from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the rear end of the antenna driving motor 126. In FIG. Henceforth, this dimension is called a "projection dimension." It is desirable to reduce this projecting dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is This projection dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 15, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101. The upper end of the motor 126 is 69 mm, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. degree. It is dimensionally impossible to dispose the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is shifted rightward from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126. As shown in FIG.
This made it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame that constitutes the outer shell of the door 114 and is shaped like a picture frame when viewed from the front. 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192. As shown in FIG.

Reference numeral 191 denotes a cover whose outer peripheral edge is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat-resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic, glass, or the like.

Reference numeral 193 denotes an inner seal frame formed with a large number of small holes having dimensions that do not transmit microwaves in a portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed entirely by press-molding a thin metal plate, and has a choke chamber 194 formed with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side at the outer peripheral edge.

195 is a seal plate made of a metal thin plate. The outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 is continuously curved toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 .

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

A transparent seal plate 196 is provided inside a portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate along the upper surface of the door 114 and having a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114 . The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in the shape of an eave close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101. FIG.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by the lower case 101 by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13), the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by holding the handle portion 115 and pulling it forward.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a portion of microwaves may leak due to a momentary gap in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unwanted microwave leakage above the door 114 .

5, it is recommended that the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is 40 mm or less. to the lower surface of the flange 16A. In this Embodiment 1, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, since the height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, The upper case 16 does not protrude downward beyond the front descending portion 2F. Therefore, the lower space of the upper case 16 becomes larger than the conventional one, which is advantageous when installing the lower case 101 as described below.

In FIG. 17, reference numeral 201 denotes an introduction port formed in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter that prevents leakage of microwaves. The reason why the inlet 201 is provided at the front portion of the right wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inner side of the door 114 to suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
Cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from the introduction port 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small amount of air. It should be noted that the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160 may not be adopted.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, details of various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30 again.
In FIG. 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129. It controls the start and stop of the operation, operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120 . Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91 .

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) for converting AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127 and housed in a case C154 in a sealed state.

When receiving the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 according to the command signal, and the output of the magnetron 122 has a function of transmitting a command signal to lower the voltage to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control section 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 for detecting the temperature of the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122. As shown in FIG. If the temperature of the heat radiating part 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after the microwave cooking is finished, a command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Send to fan 129 . In FIG. 30, illustration of cooling fan driving circuits for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is omitted.

139 is a closing detector for the door 114 . The closing detection unit 139 electrically detects the open/close state of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 by current flowing through each circuit or an open/close signal. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board that constitutes the closing detector 139 is attached to the support plate 137, the support plate 137 may be removed for inspection, or the circuit board may be measured with the support plate 137 installed to check whether the circuit board operates normally. can be inspected (see FIG. 12).

Reference numeral 158 denotes a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113. The temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from this temperature sensor are and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts to temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start/stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, ie, heat generation amount), and the like. A control circuit of the heating chamber control section 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 13).

When receiving a command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates according to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. and a command signal to lower the output of the lower heater 163 . In order to lower the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is also changed to change the substantial heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, the configuration of the drive circuit for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the heating cooker 1 will be described. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 33 will be described with an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the heating cooker 1, induction heating is performed by supplying high-frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R from the drive circuit 74. As shown in FIG.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or may be different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detector 77a and an output current detector 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection section 77 a and the output current detection section 77 b are sent to the IH control section 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the DC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. FIG. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the high-frequency power to the resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

A resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the heated object N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be composed of a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described in FIG. 12 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce conduction loss as a switching element. Also, even if the switching frequency, that is, the driving frequency, is set to a high frequency, that is, even if the switching is performed at a high speed, heat dissipation is improved. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the heat radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached, and to reduce the size and cost of the drive unit.

The output current detector 77b is connected to a resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor . The output current detector 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH controller 90. In this configuration, a half-bridge inverter has been described, but the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge inverter. Also, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 33 is of the current resonance type, it may be of the voltage resonance type.

As described in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for performing wireless communication with the home gateway 411 that comprehensively manages the power consumption, operation information, and the like of the household electrical appliances 400. Yes, it can send and receive radio signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control unit MC by communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. It is desirable to shorten the wiring that connects the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the noise mentioned above, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation section 40 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41 . Also, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left-right central portion of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In FIG. 12, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 has the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 separated by the upper space 300A and the partition wall by the bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16 made of metal. It is partitioned into two spaces, ie, a lower space 300B formed below.
That is, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" to divide the inside of the main body case HC into two upper and lower spaces (an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B).

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH that guides cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils pass through the ventilation hole 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. Outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101 through the lower case 101 .

On the other hand, a lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. A heat radiation part 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Also, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101 .

The cooling air that has flowed through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that has flowed through the lower air passage UH do not join in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52 and discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust port 20 .

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending vertically in the same gap GP1, and is finally discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire cooling air path will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, the air (outside air) outside the cooker 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooker 1 through two routes.

A first route: from the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, from the first cooling fan 60 to the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R. A path for cooling and leading to the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 32, this is described as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: outside air is sucked through two air intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101; One of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128 . The other outside air passes through the fourth cooling fan 129 and cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 . Thus, although there are two secondary routes, they eventually enter a common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 32, this is described as "lower air passage" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space formed below the partition wall 16S. 300B and 300B are divided into two spaces, each of which is provided with mutually independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and dedicated cooling fans 60, 128, 129 are provided for each of these air passages. It is a configuration with
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61 that cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inside of the upper unit 100 .

(Control menu and cooking menu in the central control panel)
Next, a control menu that can be displayed and selected on the integrated display section 30 by the central operation section 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the "control menu" of the "single cooking mode" that can be selected with the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R that use the induction heating source 9 includes, for example, boiling water and boiling water, as shown in FIG. , deep-fried food (automatic cooking), etc.
However, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M as shown in FIG. 34 (except for the linked cooking mode, which will be described later). These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. A "control menu program" is a command for executing these control menu groups, and is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final cooking obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the name of the ingredients, and the like. In other words, in the "control menu" here, the food to be cooked cannot be directly selected.

The "control menu" in the "single cooking mode" and the "compound cooking mode" selected by the central operation unit 40M can be said to be broadly classified in consideration of the type, method, conditions, etc. of heating until cooking is completed. Therefore, the names of the control menus are conceptual and generic, such as "heating" and "oven (cooking)".

The control menu for the "compound cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu called "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. There is The control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M include control menus prepared for each food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger steak") targeted by the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

The RG control menu is fundamentally different from the later-described "cooperation cooking mode" KM3. Also, the RG control menu and the compound cooking mode KM2, which will be described later, are different. These will be explained in detail later.

Various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 34 includes the control menu for the "single cooking mode" using the microwave heating source 189, but does not include the control menu for the "cooperation control mode" KM3.

The “left display area” in FIG. 34 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30 .
The "central display area" is also the second area 30M.
The "right display area" also means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is operated, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 always displays the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. This is because the RG control menu "warm up" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 34, in addition to "heating", there are a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave manual", "boil under leafy vegetables", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven". There is a control menu. However, the "central heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 34 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100 described above.

The “RG control menu” is either a control pattern (combined cooking mode KM2) that uses both microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating, or microwave heating (range) and oven heating. It is a general term for control patterns of one (single cooking mode KM1). In other words, the control pattern of the “single cooking mode KM1” in which either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is used alone is also exceptionally included.

The "central heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (central induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100. , strictly speaking, neither a "range" nor a "grill".

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, “microwave” refers to cooking using the microwave heating source 189 . “Grilling” refers to cooking using the oven heating source 188 . In other words, the range grill refers to a (heating) control pattern that uses the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

In the first area of FIG. 34, a total of 10 types such as "heating" and "grilling" are displayed. ” etc.
Also, "warm" uses only the microwave heating source 9, so strictly speaking, it is the single cooking mode KM1, not the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. Also, "heat up" does not correspond to the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The contents described in the "central display area" of FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of "Central Display Area".

The contents described in the "right display area" in FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank portion means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menus is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later, and serves as a guide for switching to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Information 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the composite cooking mode (RG control menu group) is selected, and in the first area 30L, one of the control menus "warm" and the first are displayed as default displays. The second area 30M displays "80° C." indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R displays no control condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the guidance information 30P that serves as a reference for heat cooking is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 and the like.

As for the RG control menu, when the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, one RG control menu is selected from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. Corresponding "control conditions" (temperature, heating power, time, etc.) are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "compound cooking mode KM2" such as "RG cooking", then the user operates the input key 43MS for commanding the start of the heating operation. Then, the mode shifts to the "combined cooking mode KM2" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be explained later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, control conditions, detailed data such as additional information, display programs, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
An outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Reheating: This is one of the “control menus for the single cooking mode KM1” in which the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat the food. This "warming up" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80°C", the microwave irradiation stops automatically when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before starting heating.
As shown in FIG. 34, the temperature can be set in increments of 5°C within the range of 0°C to 90°C. When heating frozen food, the temperature can be set in increments of 2°C within the range of -10°C to 0°C. The microwave heating power is fixed at 500W.

(2) Microwave manual operation: Refers to heating the food using the microwave heating source 189, but this is done by setting the heating time. Also, the microwave heating output can be selected from three levels of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The heating time also has a default value of 1 minute, but can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes at 500 W output.
This "range manual" is also one type of the "control menu for the single cooking mode KM1". That is, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 also includes the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boil under leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. A non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "boiled under leafy vegetables" is also one of the "single (heating) control menus".

(4) Boil under root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes whose roots and rhizomes are eaten, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. In addition, since the heating power value is determined in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, the default display "standard" in the second area is changed to "weak", "strong", etc. ( select).
This "boiled under leafy vegetables" is also one type of the "single (heating) control menu".

(5) Defrosting Meat: This control menu is suitable for thawing various types of frozen meat.
Since the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat the food, it is one of the “control menus for the single cooking mode KM1”.
(6) RG cooking: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2".
A control pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a control pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. There are three types of control patterns. It is a control pattern belonging to the composite cooking mode KM2.
The heating power value (watt) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display in the second area 30M. .

(7) RG recooking: suitable for reheating food that has already been cooked using the heating chamber 113; This is also one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2".
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used together.
(8) RG manual operation: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In addition, a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2".

(9) Grill: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature control of the heating chamber 113 is not performed, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control section 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. Grilled fish is a typical applicable cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is one type of control menu for the "single cooking mode KM1".

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the heating chamber control unit 159 controls power supply so as to reach a set target temperature.
As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. Incidentally, as explained in the "grill" section, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization rate of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the amount of heat generated by the two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one type of control menu for the "single cooking mode KM1".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 similarly showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating individual control menu names (for example, "warm", "manual range", etc.) among a total of ten RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the storage device. It is stored in the first layer of MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and reference information 30P and 30P1 are stored in the third layer of the storage device MM. is stored in

(coordinated cooking mode)
Next, the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, inside the storage device MM, data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and "linkage data" read out when the input key 43M1 is operated after this are stored. The control data and operation program for the "cooking mode KM3" (these may be collectively referred to as the "link operation program" hereinafter) are stored in a storage area separate from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "linkage cooking mode KM3" and the "linkage operation program" are information specifying a plurality of heat sources used for executing individual cooking items (eg, hamburgers), various control conditions, It contains information on the cooking process (heat power, standard heating temperature, etc.), information on control parameters, and the order (sequence) of the heating sources to be operated. In other words, it is necessary to cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

Specifying one cooking menu for cooperative cooking mode KM3 automatically determines the available heat source(s) and the order in which they operate. For example, for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative control mode KM3, it is not necessary to first select either one of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and when the user sees the display and selects the right heating section 17HR, for example, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be entered.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with the content of using the left heating unit 17HL in advance. The user can set in advance not to use the left heating section 17HL but to use the right heating section 17HR. However, such a setting may not be possible in some cases.
Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking process 1, and in the next cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is heated by the oven heat source 188, the information of the series of cooking processes is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

In addition, as additional information 331 that serves as a reference for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heat source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), Guidance information, instruction information, etc., which prompts the user to perform an input operation in order to proceed, are stored in association with each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak" and "fried chicken") of each linked cooking mode.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process until the set (target) temperature is reached is called the "preheating process". The steps are called "cooking step 1" or "cooking step 2".
For example, in induction heating, the "cooking process" starts when the user places the object to be cooked on the object N already heated to the desired temperature after the preheating process and actually starts heating. become.

(Information on proper use of RG control menu, etc.)
Next, the proper use of the RG (range grill) control menu described with reference to FIG. 34 and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9 will be described.

37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9. FIG.
The names of the control menus shown in Category 3 in FIG. 37 are partially displayed in the first area 30L as shown in FIG. 34, and are used by the user to select the control menu.

Further, as shown in classification 2 of FIG. 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data in the first layer or second layer of the storage device MM as described with reference to FIGS. There is.

Accordingly, at the stage of operating the input key 43M1, the user can arbitrarily display information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in Category 2 of FIG.

The integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in this category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 at the stage when the user selects the RG control menu, thereby assisting the user's input operation. For example, when the user presses the input key 43M1 once and a predetermined reference time (eg, 10 seconds) elapses, in any of the above-described first area 30L to third area 30R, Information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in Category 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed. Alternatively, the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to provide voice notification. For example, "Warm up" is guided by saying, "This is the best way to heat rice or boxed lunches to your preferred temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 in FIG. 37, the memory device MM stores information that can be used to guide the selection of the induction heating source 9 . Therefore, at the stage of step ST4 shown in FIG. 38, the information of classification 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display section 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the selection operation of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. It is configured.

(Operation of heating cooker)
Next, the outline of the operation of the heating cooker 1 configured as described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. FIG.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation of the heating cooker 1 before starting cooking. FIG. 39 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation in the case where the heating cooker 1 performs microwave heating during induction heating cooking. FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heat cooker 1 and the type of heat cooking.

FIG. 38 will be described.
A basic operation program from power-on to start of preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power supply 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed. (See FIGS. 20 and 30) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 38).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether or not there is an abnormality in itself.

Then, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130, which centrally control the induction heating source 9, are checked for abnormality.

The temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 has a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display section 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93 . Thereby, the IH control section 90 can determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

Also, in the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130, it is possible to acquire the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 and determine whether there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, "transmit start information to the outside" means that the wireless communication section 49 notifies the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. This will be explained later.

Since the IH control unit 90 collects temperature information of the main components built in the upper unit 100, the IH control unit 90 performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before starting cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (for example, 70° C.) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display section 30, the IH control section 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, it notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality, and executes processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started. Note that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays a message that "there is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial time will be described later with reference to FIG.
At the same time, the voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the same content as the content displayed on the integrated display section 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information such as control menus and recipe information useful for health management within the range previously set by the user. For example, the information that the user of this heating cooker 1 has sent in advance to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using the information communication terminal device 418 or the like can be obtained when the integrated display unit 30 is activated.

When the cooker 1 acquires some information, it is preferable to notify the user by lighting a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation section 40 of the upper unit 100 .

The inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent to the home gateway 411 at this time.

Next, after completion of the abnormality determination as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display section 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting the user to select the heating means (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not individual heating cooking is selected by the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R, which are the individual operating sections, without the input key 43M1 being operated (STC).

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that neither the cooperative cooking mode nor the complex cooking has been selected. Immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, when the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L and 17R is selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is operated in the step STC, the process proceeds to the processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode. Processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

When step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. FIG. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

At step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are sequentially displayed on the integrated display section 30 in a predetermined order. These three types of control menus are a total of ten control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L.

Assuming that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used, the control menu displayed at step ST8 in FIG. 38 includes the following three types of control menus.
(1) Cooking menu using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). "Grill" and "Oven" in the control menu shown in FIG. 34 correspond.
(2) A control menu (ST9B) that uses the microwave heating device 120 in addition to the above (1). This corresponds to the "microwave grill" heating (cooking) of the control menu shown in FIGS.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) using only the microwave heating device 120; This corresponds to "microwave manual", "boil under leafy vegetables", "heat up", etc. in the control menu shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" is not displayed here.

It should be noted that if it is found that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is better halfway through, the operation can proceed to step STR1 of FIG. 67 by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. That is, it is possible to proceed to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 39 shows the operation steps of the integrated controller MC after the step (ST11) of selecting the induction heating control menu.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
An example using the right heating unit 17HR will be described below.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control section 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not an object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether or not the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value, and the estimation result is is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment should be suitable for a standard-diameter pan or a large-diameter pan (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if the pot is unsuitable for heating, it will be processed differently from the standard pot.

Upon receiving the command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the desired cooking "IH control menu" (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the cooking "IH control menu", heating power, cooking time, etc. using the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in earnest in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven items: "rapid heating", "fried food", "boiling", "preheating", "rice cooking", "boiling", and "boiling + keeping warm". be.
However, in order to simplify the operability, the aforementioned "function setting" may be set so that selection of some or all of the seven IH control menus is disabled.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to these IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of energization of the IH coil 17R is (thermal power), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set arbitrary heating power, power supply time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). Note that the operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control section 90 .

Unless the user stops using the input key 43R1 again by touching the input key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the display as described above is performed, the IH control unit 90 drives the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R to start induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start and stop of the heating operation.

In the case of the "large-diameter pan", steps MS1 to MS7 are basically the same, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of FIG. 39 cannot be selected as the IH control menu. The "high-speed heating menu" can only be heated using the IH coil 17L on the left side only for the "normal pan" or "large-diameter pan". In the first embodiment, a small pan means a pan with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources such as induction heating and microwave heating are used at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. Note that the examples described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41 are not the case of the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" described above.

The example shown in FIG. 40 is a case where the user attempts microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100 . Even when oven cooking or grill cooking is performed using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the induction heating cooking period, the heating process described with reference to FIG. Basic total power control (in the entire heating cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72. FIG.
Also, in this case, it is necessary to select the combined cooking mode KM2 with the central operation unit 40M.

When the user uses the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 to perform microwave heating, first the main power switch 97 is turned ON, and the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40 selects the heating source of the lower unit 200. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to simply open the door 114 . That is, in Embodiment 1, when the upper unit 100 is in operation (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), the lower unit 200 can start cooking. Therefore. The operation of turning on the main power switch 97 like the upper unit 100 is not required.

When the door 114 is opened, there are the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B which are opened and closed according to the opening and closing of the door 114 as described in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, so the main power switch 97 is turned on. Therefore, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 40, when receiving a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened as described above (step S1), the integrated controller MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance is, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

With the default setting of microwave heating, the target temperature is 80°C, so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started, it will automatically stop when the temperature of the food to be cooked reaches 80°C. To change 80° C. (for example, 75° C.), change the temperature condition and then press the input key 43MS (see FIG. 21).

When the user selects, for example, "range manual" from the compound cooking menu with the input key 43M1, and then instructs "heating start" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the magnetron 122 decides. In step S3, the integrated control device MC uses the power consumption value that is known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in the rated power consumption value Determine whether the value is exceeded.

For example, the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the power consumption of the second cooling fan 61 are stored as data in the integrated control device MC, so the power consumption of the upper unit 100 is and the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to lower either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In step S3, the current cooking priority for induction heating is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, when the upper unit 100 is cooking rice (in particular, the “boiling process”), the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when "frying" is performed in the upper unit 100, the frying is controlled so that the heating power is automatically increased so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the introduction of the ingredients. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In step S5, if it is determined that induction heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the microwave rated output is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced. and set the output to 300 W, for example. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction will be applied. The notification is made by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since the heating chamber 113 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to determine whether the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation is not completed, the steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating controller 130 outputs a signal to the integrated controller MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12 to inform that the microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heating power initially intended by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the food to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated controller MC receives a signal from the microwave heating controller 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking depends on the control menu (for example, "fried food") and the cooking process (for example, , "Boiling process" of rice cooking), it was premised that the priority of induction heating was determined at that time.

Therefore, when the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. For example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 before the operation of the 43MS. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 also issues a warning message. Further, even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the "function setting" described above. Once the power priority is set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the set conditions are stored in the integrated control unit MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the temperature of the object to be heated is monitored, and the microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method for measuring the irradiation time of microwaves and ending cooking when a set time elapses, so FIG. 41 will be described next.

FIG. 41 shows an example in which a control method is adopted in which the cooking is finished within the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, description thereof will be omitted.

When starting microwave heating in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has passed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is reported (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may be used together until the set time 2 elapses.

(Integrated control device and total power consumption control)
Next, FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described.
42 and 43 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
The examples shown in these two figures are when the user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100. . Even in this case, the basic total power amount control (for the entire heating cooker 1) as described with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, unlike FIGS. 40 and 41, the induction heating device consisting of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating device 120, the IH coils 17L and 17R, the inverter circuit 81, etc. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, and the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, etc. (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39) are determined in the input operation unit 40, information indicating the content is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). . That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operation time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. When there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 causes the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R to start heating operations.

A case in which induction heating cooking is started in this manner and microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are opened as described with reference to FIG. , a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is sent to the integrated controller MC (L3).

When the user inputs thermal power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to “start heating” from the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130 .

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 transmits a "notice signal" to start cooking to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, if the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating apparatus is 1000 W, the "notice signal" including the information that 1000 W is to be used, as shown in FIG.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, and Using the known power consumption value, determine the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power consumption regulation value. (same as step S3 in FIGS. 40 and 41). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total power amount of the lower unit 200 (the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (the induction heating source 9 ) are used at the same time, it may be determined whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to lower either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated controller MC determines the priority of induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and the heating process.

In the example of FIG. 42, the heating power of microwave heating is not reduced because it is set to give priority to microwave heating.

In step S5, if it is determined that the microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of the induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is commanded to lower the target heating power of the IH coil 17R, temporarily reducing the power consumption. lower it. Notify users of any such restrictions. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 .

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heating power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side ends, the IH control section 90 determines that the power has been reduced from the current values of the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b. Then, a message to the effect that the power reduction has been completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). Upon receiving this transmission, the integrated controller MC transmits a permitting signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A includes a current detection section (not shown) such as the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100. FIG.

Therefore, when microwave heating ends, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has ended, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Also, microwave heating may be performed for a certain period of time depending on the timer setting. In this case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the elapsed time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After completion of microwave heating, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to the IH controller 90 so as to restore the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, increase the heating power to the initial target level and continue the induction heating (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time and target temperature are reached, the IH control unit 90 terminates the induction heating. Then, the integrated control unit MC is notified that the operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction heating cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When a command to start induction heating cooking is given in the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. drive the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

An operation command signal is issued from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R or at a slightly delayed timing, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are started to operate.

The blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may not be fixed.
For example, depending on the temperatures of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display section 30, the blowing capacity may be automatically changed between weak operation and strong operation.

In general, when the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, there is a concern that the wind noise of the fan will become louder, resulting in noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined in advance as a correspondence table (data table) from data such as a previous ventilation test. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG. The IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

Note that the correspondence table (data table) for determining the operating intensity of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 positioned directly below the first cooling fan 60 . Cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the air outlet 60A as indicated by a thick arrow in FIG.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61 . Cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the outlet 61A as indicated by a thick arrow in FIG.

Here, one of the characteristics of this Embodiment 1 is demonstrated. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 27 and 28. FIG.

The first cooling fan 60 has a flat rotor blade 60T that rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 60C advances to the outlet 60A while turning as shown in FIG.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the blower outlet 60A is not uniform in the entire front-rear direction of the blower outlet 60A. The speed of the cooling air that has swirled at the outermost side inside the fan case 60C is the highest, and the speed decreases toward the inner side. This state is schematically shown by three solid-line arrows in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A advances in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but the rotation direction RD1 of the rotor blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself 27, the direction of the cooling air is gradually changed rearward toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after blowing out from the blow-out port 60A concentrates on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 positioned at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. Then, it moves rightward while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11 . In FIG. 27, the flow of the cooling air RF1 that flows around the radiation fins 82FN is indicated by the dashed arrow.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, the main components of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A do not diffuse around, but rather reach the partition walls. 11 are pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiating fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the rear side.

Since the first air passage F1 starts after passing through the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A enters the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1. is introduced and carried straight as it is to the outlet FO on the right side as the cooling air RF1.

However, there is no direct connection between the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70, and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A. It turns backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. Then it flows to a relatively low pressure part. Therefore, cooling air is also generated that flows in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25, 27 and 28. FIG.

A flat rotor blade 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 61C advances toward the outlet 61A while swirling as shown in FIG. Then, the air is blown toward the inverter board 80 from the outlet 61A.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the blower outlet 61A is not uniform in the entire front-rear direction of the blower outlet 61A. The cooling air that has swirled at the outermost side inside the fan case 61C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inner side. This state is indicated by three solid line arrows in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A advances in the direction of the air outlet line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotor blades 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself 27, the direction of the cooling air is gradually changed rearward toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after blowing out from the blower outlet 61A concentrates on the front (front) side of the partition wall 11 positioned at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. Then, it moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the front surface of the partition wall 11 . The flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the radiation fins 82FN is indicated by dashed arrows in FIG.

A cover 70 is installed so as to enclose the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a small gap therebetween.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after blowing out from the air outlet 61A does not diffuse to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiating fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the front side of the partition wall 11. .

Since the first air passage F1 starts after passing through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is at the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. is introduced and carried straight as it is to the outlet FO on the right side as the cooling air RF2.

However, since the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A also leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. Then it flows to a relatively low pressure part. Therefore, it flows as a cooling air branched in the spatial direction directly below the front input operation unit 40 and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The ventilation holes 64 directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacently on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but there are many of them. may be provided and the group of small holes may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 33) and other electric parts are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and these are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, the power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A travels rightward while cooling parts such as various switches arranged in the input operation unit 40 that receive input operations, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and the like.

As indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 24, some of the cooling airflow RF1 changes its direction upward when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70. There are two main types of air flow: cooling air RF3, which travels over the cover 70 while reversing to the left, and cooling air RF4, which travels toward the filter circuit board 54. FIG.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the right IH coil 17R and then directly below the left IH coil 17L. In this process, the two IH coils 17R, 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250° C. to 300° C. during induction heating. Therefore, as described above, cooling is performed with cooling airflows RF3 and RF4, which are a combination of the two cooling airflows RF1 and RF2.

As described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R traveling to the right side of the partition plate 14 travels backward while cooling the filter circuit board 54 and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B. 53R is an exhaust plate and has a large number of through holes 53R1.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also changes its direction and advances in the direction of the exhaust window 52A, which is the final exhaust port, passes through the through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and exits the exhaust window 52A. Ejected.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. As shown in FIG. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the group of parts such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 is a group of parts to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (the IH coil installation space CK). A space for cooling these component groups is positioned in front of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but there is no component group to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1. It is not 100 cooling spaces.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started without actually performing induction heating cooking in the upper unit 100 . However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset after a certain period of time (eg, 30 minutes) from the last time any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. is released. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, the heating chamber 113, and the like all fall below a specified value. We have adopted these safety measures.

Next, after opening the door 114 and putting the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) is operated on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 to When the start of microwave cooking is instructed, the integrated control device MC issues a drive instruction to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. Note that the microwave here means a radio wave of 2450 MHz±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided into the antenna case 124 from the waveguide 123 . Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operating at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced into the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 . The operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is described in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121 and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through the communication openings B138B and A138A provided at two upper and lower portions of the case A150.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. A minute gap of several millimeters or less exists between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole.
The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided to the passage 172 from the communication port A138A. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171 . This passage has the effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 reaches a high temperature exceeding 300.degree.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A138A in plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally across the passage 172 rearward. That is, the communication port 173 is located at the furthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward through the communication port 173 (see FIG. 15).

After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF5 merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is discharged from the air outlet 20 into the room.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, air is sucked into the case A 151 from the air intake B 152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF6. . The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the duct 153 through the heat radiating portion 122H.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and advances forward. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 through the introduction port 201 .

Since the inlet 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging of the sealing plate 196 on the heating chamber 113 side. .

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, etc. generated from objects to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113 . Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the rear ceiling portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. At the stage of exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 joins so as to be attracted by the ascending current of the cooling air RF5 and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 into the room.

Even if the cooling airflow RF5 and the cooling airflow RF6 have the same initial airflow volume, the cooling airflow RF5 has a faster air velocity when it is discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in paths as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it has the effect of inducing the cooling air RF6 emitted from below.

An exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102 in order to forcibly discharge the cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102 . In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at a low cost and is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100. FIG.

Next, FIG. 44 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the heat cooker 1 and the types of heat cooking.
As is clear from FIG. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated during induction cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated for microwave cooking and oven cooking, respectively.

(Basic operation during oven cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some cooking will start and preliminarily starts. Therefore, even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually performed in the upper unit 100, oven heating cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on to start oven cooking.

Next, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked such as food is put into the heating chamber 113, and then the control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, in the case of grilling fish or meat, the heating time and heat power are set. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control section 159 . Selection of this control menu will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. FIG.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated controller MC, and controls the presence or absence of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the energization time period, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature in the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measuring unit 158. FIG. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature, and controls the energization of both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B so as to reduce the difference (feedback control). control). Temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

Also, when the control method for timer cooking is input from the central operation unit 40M, both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is energized for the set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the temperature data detected by the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking by heating in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated controller MC performs microwave heating control. A drive command is issued to the unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 . Alternatively, the heating chamber controller 159 may directly output a drive command signal to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. However, unlike microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole through the detection window 161 .

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. As shown in FIG. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, it reaches the communication port 173 and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153 . However, since magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no temperature rise (see FIGS. 16 and 17).

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114 .

Cooking objects such as food placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, etc. due to radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such water vapor, soot, and the like are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 passes through the air outlet 20 and is discharged into the room while being attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward (see FIG. 15).

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the heating cooker 1 up to a certain stage. When the section 40R is operated, the subsequent induction heating control is entrusted to the IH control section 90. FIG. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed with the IH control unit 90 .

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated controller MC may be changed between the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130 .

For example, after any control menu of induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, any one of the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 Fundamentally, a control operation related to heating may be performed.

In that case, when a new input is performed by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), control is performed by the integrated control device MC once, but when the input is not performed, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be performed by any one of the unit 90 , the heating chamber control unit 159 , or the microwave heating control unit 130 .

(Control during fried food cooking by IH control unit 90)
A specific control operation example of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the IH control unit 90 when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one of the single cooking modes using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When "fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the control menu for induction heating cooking by operating the left operating part 40L or the right operating part 40R, the edible food placed in the object to be heated (metal pot) N is selected. The oil temperature is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the heating power of the IH coils 17L, 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a fried food cooking process, and a heating power increasing process, as shown in FIG.
Further, on the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display section 30, information showing necessary information and reference information (for example, estimated time required for preheating, etc.) appears in the form of characters, graphics, or the like. Also displayed is the fact that the priority cooking is for which the power is not restricted (suppressed) by the power control unit 72 .

Therefore, the user can recognize that electric power is preferentially secured during the cooking of the fried food even if microwave heating or oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts driving at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly. The temperature rises from the room temperature (for example, 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180° C., the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, that is, the inverter output, and tries to maintain the target temperature as it is (based on such temperature detection information, the control operation that automatically adjusts the high-frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display command is issued to the integrated control unit MC, and a voice guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The temperature of the oil has reached a suitable temperature. Please add ingredients."

When the user puts ingredients such as frozen croquettes into the cooking oil, the cooking process 1 starts from this point.
Since the edible oil is rapidly cooled by the cold ingredient (croquette) from the time of its introduction, the temperature drops sharply as shown in FIG. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) is immediately raised to the predetermined heating power of 1500 W or 1800 W, and the oil temperature rises again. (temperature feedback control). In this way, when the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the frying process is immediately shifted to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power-up process, control is performed so that the oil temperature is maintained between a second temperature T2 higher than the target temperature T1, which is 225°C, and an even higher upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3, which is 230°C. Device 90 controls inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 45, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900W.
The process after reaching the first temperature T1 is called a "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crispy. If a sufficient amount of heat is not applied in the heat-increasing process, the fried food cannot be fried well. Note that the frying process is not limited to a predetermined time, so if the user presses the input key 44R (or the input key 45L), the frying process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the period from the fried food cooking process to the heating power up process is defined as the "execution time period of the priority control menu". Power reduction is prevented by starting the heating source or changing operating conditions. That is, the induction heating IH control unit 90 always grasps whether or not the control menu being executed is in the "execution time period of the priority control menu", and if it is in the execution time period, It has a function to notify the effect to the outside.

As is clear from the above description, when a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is completely monitored by that IH control unit. It is entrusted to the control of the control section 90 .

In the "linked cooking mode KM3", which will be described in detail later, when control operations including such a "preheating process" are performed, the "cooking process" after the "fried food cooking process" for actually heating the food to be cooked becomes the "cooking process". The preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display of Integrated Display Unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display section 30 and various input keys of the central operating section 40M, right operating section 40R and left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52. FIG.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30. FIG. 47A and 47B are plan views of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L before and after induction cooking is started. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left display section 31L in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode.

FIG. 46 will be described. When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display section 30 is not activated, so no information is displayed.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 46, 30A is a display text notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.
When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 having information on various cooking recipes. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. In the display screen 2A, the character display "caution for bumping" is one of the caution displays 30E. This "bumping" is, for example, when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, the inside of the food is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly A phenomenon that causes violent boiling. Hot liquid droplets can be hazardous as they erupt from the hot liquid. It is said that the timing and cause of the occurrence of bumping are contamination or impact from outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 and induction-heated, attention is drawn to stirring the food to be cooked. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of display screen 1, display screen 2A, and display screen 2B shown in FIG. 46 may be called a common screen 30Z. Forms other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

In the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and that the inside of the heating chamber 113 should not be touched carelessly. When the integrated controller MC detects that the heating chamber 113 is not sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state is automatically switched to the display screen 2.例文帳に追加Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Also, the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to concurrently provide the contents of the alerts on the display screens 2A and 2B by voice.

As is clear from display screens 1 to 2A and 2B in FIG. 46, these displays are performed using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, instead of partially displaying in any one of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, the three areas 30L to 30R cannot be identified in order to secure as wide a display area as possible. , so that it appears to the user that the entirety of the integrated display section 30 is being displayed.

The display screen 1 to the display screens 2A and 2B correspond to ST3 in the operation steps of FIG.
After a certain period of time, for example 10 seconds, has passed since the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B were displayed, the display content changes to prompt the user to select a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 38). .

Therefore, next, the case of induction heating cooking will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 47 describes the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the combined cooking mode KM2 or cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 47 is a plan view of the left display section 31L and the left operation section 40L for the left heating source 17HL. The state shown in FIG. 47(A) is before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is pressed.

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated controller MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light emitting section 27L3 to emit light to indicate that the operation input has been received.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for an input, the individual light emitting section 27L1 is flashed. In addition, since the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting section 27L2 immediately behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 47B, the asterisk figure indicates that the light-emitting display section 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heating power of the heating power display section 67L, which indicates the heating power stage during induction heating cooking, is set to "3", the light emitting section of the heating power display section 67L is continuously illuminated from the left side until the heating power of 3 is displayed (or change blue to red) and show the user the magnitude of the firepower.

When the user wants to change to a thermal power that is not the default setting thermal power, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the thermal power decreases or increases by one step each time the key is pressed. or red light emitting part) expands from the left to the right or shrinks from the left to display the thermal power adjustment status to the user.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
48A and 48B are diagrams for explaining the operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
In FIG. 48, the diagrams of states A to C drawn on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L. The state before the operation is started is state A in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 47, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in state B of FIG.
In state B, the light-emitting display section 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, if the left input key 43L2 is pressed twice, the heating power is lowered. It should be noted that the increase or decrease in thermal power can be seen from the luminous state of the thermal power display section 67L immediately behind.

Next, the case where the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
In order to simplify the explanation, the case where the left heating unit 17HL is used will be explained.

When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, the heating power level below 1 is specified. A "third specific screen" 30ST for keeping warm is displayed on the display screen 30D.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" corresponding to fried food is selected. screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature is set to 180° C. in the “third specific screen 30ST” for fried food, the characters “fried food 180° C.” may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once again, the "third specific screen 30ST" for preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for fried eggs may be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 48, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays a "container schematic diagram" 280 such as a pot, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. , has a wide horizontal display area.

In the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the characters "Heat retention (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the temperature of the heat retention is approximately 80°C. An explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soup or the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display portion 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 48, the heat retention temperature may be displayed as "80° C.".

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state B of FIG. 48, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time the input key 44L is pressed, and is displayed as in the display screen 3B. .
The example of the display screen 3B indicates that "fried food" has been selected. After a certain period of time has passed in the state B of FIG. 48, the control menu for the left heating unit 17HL is determined as "fried food", and the IH coil 17L is started to be driven. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiling" and "boiling" in addition to "fried food".

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180° C., the characters “fried food 180° C.” are displayed on the left side display portion 31L as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. In addition to this, the integrated display unit 30 displays "that the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of prompting the user to insert ingredients.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature in this fried food (automatic) control menu, the input key 43L2 can be used to lower the temperature, and the input key 43L3 can be used to raise the temperature.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the display screen 30D are combined to form a horizontally long wide display area. A warning 30G indicating the start of preheating and not leaving the cooker 1 during the preheating operation is displayed in the space provided.

Next, in the state B of FIG. 48, when the input key 44L is pressed to select "appropriate temperature" as another control menu, a display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in this display screen 3C, the control menu "appropriate temperature" is a control mode recommended for warming the pan or the like to the set temperature (default temperature is 180° C.) and for cooking eggs. The recommendation sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of this display screen 3C, text information "preheating 180° C." is displayed on the left side display portion 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed in the individual display sections (left display section 31L, right display section 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation sections (right operation section 40R, left operation section 40L). Also good.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when the central operation section 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated. The scene where said "compound cooking mode" is performed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "warm up" is displayed in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menu), "warm", is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 49, the position where the specific sentence 30J is displayed may be referred to as "display position A" in the following description.
Further, the position (second area 30M) where the control conditions (target temperature information 30T, heating time information 30S, etc.) are displayed may be referred to as "display position C" in the following description (see FIGS. 49 and 52). ). These control conditions may be referred to as "control conditions A" in the following description.

In the rear BK of the specific sentence 30J of "heat up" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the characters "oven" are displayed in a slightly smaller size, and on the front FR side, the characters "manual range" are displayed in slightly smaller sizes. be.

Then, when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are found to be "Oven" and "Manual Range". If, at this stage, the (left) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "manual range".
Further, when the (right) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the characters "warm" are changed to "oven".

In FIG. 49, the target temperature information 30T of "80° C." is displayed in the second area 30M on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80°C, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

In order to increase the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M to 85° C., the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to lower the temperature to 75° C., the left input key 43M2 should be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 80° C., a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since the shape of the symbol 30UP and the (right) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user is instructed to operate the right input key 43M2 in order to increase the temperature, heating power, etc. is easy to understand.

Conversely, since the shape of the (left) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M is similar to that of the 30DN, the user is told that the left input key 43M2 should be operated to lower the temperature, heating power, etc. is easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, a device is employed to avoid operation errors (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 49, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in characters that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189 . As described above, 30P is reference information automatically displaying that the control menu is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this reference information may be separate additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 37, information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time according to the operation of the input key 43M3.
That is, in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned reference menu corresponding to each control menu (for example, "warm up") is one-to-one so that the user does not hesitate whether to select each control menu (for example, "warm up"). Information 30P is displayed.
Further, when the reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 49, when the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touch-operated, the reference information 30P1 is changed to the reference information 30P. can be displayed in the third area 30R instead.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described.
FIG. 50 is another schematic diagram explaining the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated to implement the combined cooking mode.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 50 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC of the linked cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control conditions (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 49, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 49 is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as one type of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual" and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 50 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. .

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, a control menu specific sentence 30J of "manual range" is displayed in a large size in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Also, in the adjacent third area 30R, microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the composite cooking mode, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. Such a heating source display section 30K (indicating that it is the microwave heating source 189 by characters) may not be displayed.

If the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST is to be lowered by one step to 200 W, the left input key 43M2 is operated once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the right input key 43M3 located just before the third area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the left input key 43M3 is operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 50, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 500W, a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 50 indicates the minimum thermal power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum firepower (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only firepower greater than this firepower can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. That is, here again, the symbol 30UP indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode is performed. In other words, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.

In the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 50, when the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once, as shown in FIG. can.

A display screen 6ST in FIG. 51 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, the specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "boiled under leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
Information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard" in the second area 30M, and if the cooking is started as it is, the food will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. That is, when using the microwave heating source 9, the "standard" heat level is different for each combined cooking mode and not always the same output (eg, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 51, as described with reference to FIG. 49, a heating source display section 30K is displayed in which characters indicate that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189. FIG. As described above, 30P is a recommendation (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this recommendation sentence may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Instead of the recommendation sentence 30P in FIG. 51, reference information 30P1 indicating the main point of each control menu is provided on a case-by-case basis according to the user's request, as described in FIG. You can display it.

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 52 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.
FIG. 52 shows a scene in which a range grill (RG) control menu called "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the “RG cooking” is a control menu that allows cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 .
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to a certain extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are 3 types. The term "simultaneously" as used herein does not mean that the timings for both the start and end of heating are exactly the same, and it is sufficient that the time zones of the heating operations overlap even partially.

On the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 52, first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, then the microwave heating is stopped and only the oven heating source 188 is used for 5 minutes. It turns out that it is a heating control (time control) pattern of heating.

The use of the abbreviation "RG" rather than the term "range grill" is intended to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if more characters are to be displayed, the exclusive area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 52, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, it is shorter). When the time is up, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 52, the display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which first the microwave heating source 189 alone heats for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then the oven heating source 188 alone heats for 5 minutes. is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen. It should be noted that display screen 7ST1, in which both microwave heating source 189 and oven heating edge 188 are driven for the first minute, is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance ("function setting" by the input key 43KP described above).

Next, FIG. 53 will be described.
FIG. 53 shows the state of the display screen 6ST displaying the control menu "boil under leafy vegetables" shown in FIG. It is a schematic plan view for explaining the operation of.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display section drive circuit 63 causes the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a uniform color.

After that, when the input key 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 51 is displayed in the first area 30L by default.
At this display stage, all four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can accept input. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to those four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS for start starts emitting light continuously, and is indicated by the dotted line circle in FIG. , it changes to flashing. Then, the presence of the input key 43MS is emphasized with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 53, the mode shifts to the composite cooking mode KM2. In the case of heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43R1 or 43L1 once after shifting to the composite cooking mode KM2. In the linked cooking mode KM3 as well, after giving a command to shift to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 (input key 43MS), the same is true.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the respective input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are valid, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are caused to emit light in the first light emission form (continuous light emission). A light-emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided.
When the reference information 30P and 30P1 are displayed, the integrated control device MC causes only the light-emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the start selection section (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light-emitting mode (flashing). Configuration.

With the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in the combined cooking mode KM2) by blinking the light emitting part 27M6. In addition, since the light emitting part 27M6 is also compatible with the touch input key 43MT capable of stopping the microwave heating and oven heating operations, the light emitting part 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation has started. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is valid, and a command to stop heating can be issued by touch operation.

At the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display section driving circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS serving as the start selection section to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may continuously emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during heat cooking in linked cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. FIG.
FIG. 54 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section and the central operation section during cooperative cooking. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing respective input operations and processes when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is implemented and when the independent cooking mode KM1 is implemented. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent cooking mode. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input operation and the display until transition to the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 has been pressed first and the operation for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in FIGS. When the key 43MC is pressed, the process changes to the input process for the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43M1 is touched after the input key 43MC, a plurality of targets of the linked cooking mode KM3 are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) (linked cooking mode KM3). Further identification information (including graphic marks, name of the cooking item) 330 is displayed to identify the cooking item (which is the menu).

In FIG. 54, the number of “cooking items” that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the integrated display section 30 is three. That is, there are hamburger, gratin, and roast beef, and the number of items to be cooked in this way is called the "number of cooperative cooking menus."

In this Embodiment 1, there are eight cooperative cooking menus in total. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG.

In FIG. 54, 330 is identification information, which in the first embodiment is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger).
There are eight pieces of identification information 330 . In other words, there are also eight linked cooking menus. 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking the food (for example, hamburger).

The position where the identification information 330 is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B". In the first embodiment, the "display position B" and the "display position A" (see FIG. 49) are the same position, but they may be set to different positions. However, in order not to confuse the user, it is always kept in the same position in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Also in the combined cooking mode KM2, the "predetermined specific position A" should always be the same position.

In FIG. 54, the additional information 331 is displayed as "when the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH starts". This means that the induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation section 40M. However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L after pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 54, identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
Under the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, reference numeral 330 is used when identification information is collectively referred to.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "compound cooking mode KM2" described in FIGS. 49 to 53, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the food that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode KM3 can be selected.

That is, every time the input key 43M1 is operated once, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger) is changed by moving one step upward or downward. That is, the identification information 330 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front-rear central position) of the first area 30L by forward feeding and reverse feeding.

In this Embodiment 1, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described above. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the cooking items is cycled. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the cooking items is cycled. This will be described in detail in FIGS. 76-78.

The default display for the linked cooking menu is "hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (hamburger) is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another cooking object can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 68).

The "first specific screen" 30SP referred to in Embodiment 1 refers to the display screen of the integrated display section 30 shown in FIG. The display contents of the first specific screen SP are not always the same because they change from time to time depending on the user's input to the central operation unit 40M and the operating state of the heating cooker 1 .

Main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) Identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. In principle, this identification information 330 is always displayed even if the heating process in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 87, there are some exceptions.
(2) A pair of heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating sections of the induction heating source 9 used are displayed in the first half of the oblong area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R. be. Either one of the heating portion specifying portions 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating portion identifying portions 333R and 333L change in color and brightness, for example, as shown in FIG. or one).
(3) In the rear half of the horizontally long area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long strip-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed during a period from before transition to the cooperative cooking mode until all cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed. In addition, according to the progress of the cooking process, the contents are updated as needed by a method such as reversing black and white or changing the color so that the current cooking process can be understood. More on this later.
(4) Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L, but is exceptionally displayed in a wide range covering the entire integrated display section 30. (see display screen 10C in FIG. 87).

When the input key 43MS is pressed with the identification information 330 of the target food (for example, a hamburger) displayed in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction, An instruction to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 67).

The position where the identification information 330 is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B". In other words, the “display position B” is the front-rear central portion of the first area 30L.
Further, the position just beside this display position B is the "display position D", which will be described later. This will be explained later.

In cooking (for example, hamburger) using the induction heating source 9 in the cooking process 1, either one of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking mode. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger is as shown in FIG. 54, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process and also changes depending on the food to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 54 explains that it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS in order to start induction heating cooking.

When the input key 43MS is pressed in the state of FIG. 54, the food to be cooked is "hamburger" and the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

When the input key 43MS is pressed, the preheating operation by the induction heating source 9 is started.
Then, the induction heating source 9 starts preheating the object to be heated N such as a frying pan or a pot. When the object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger" dough) is placed on the object to be heated N which has reached a high temperature, the preheating process is started.

If the control program indicates that the next cooking process 1 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL, pressing the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operating unit 40L starts the cooking process 1 by the induction heating source 9 ( 54).

After the cooking process 1 is started, the input key 43L1 is pressed once again to end the cooking process 1. FIG.
At this point, the input key 43MT can be pressed to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 itself and return to the standby initial screen 30Z (see FIG. 46).

After finishing the cooking process 1 , the object to be cooked (eg, “hamburger”) is moved from the object to be heated N (eg, frying pan) on the top plate 15 into the heating chamber 113 .
Then, the cooking process 2 can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

Thereafter, to end the cooking process 2, the input key 43MT should be pressed once.
As shown in FIG. 54, two input keys 43MS and 43MT are input means for starting and canceling (ending) the linked cooking mode KM3.
At the same time, it also serves as input means for starting and stopping the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

Due to the above circumstances, the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is terminated, the object to be cooked is moved from the object to be heated N (for example, a frying pan) on the top plate 15 into the heating chamber 113, and the input key 43MT is pressed. When pressed once, the cooking process 2 is terminated.
Furthermore, by pressing the same input key 43MT, the linked cooking mode KM3 can be canceled at this stage.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the plane area of the input operation unit 40, particularly the central operation unit 40M is restricted, and it is difficult to arrange a large number of input keys in a plane. 54, two input keys 43MS, 43MS are shared by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and other cooking modes, respectively. Therefore, even in a small installation area, the user can operate it reliably.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55 shows the operation after step ST4 in the flowchart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG.

After the step (ST4) of displaying/informing to prompt the selection of the heating means, the right heating unit 17HR can be used to select cooking by heating with the right operation unit 40R (SP1). Also, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to select cooking by heating with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can select cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). In addition, the central operation unit 40M allows selection of heat cooking using the heating chamber 113 with the oven heating source 188 (SS2).

Furthermore, the combined cooking mode KM2 can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). The single cooking mode KM1 can also be selected (SS3B).

From step (ST4) onwards, cooperative cooking can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In FIG. 55, CH1 is the first layer selection means for selecting three types of heat sources.
That is, as the selection means of the first layer, the input key 43MC and the input key 43M1 of the central operation section 40M, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L as an individual operation section, and the input key of the right operation section 40R There are a total of four of 43R1.

As described above, "coordinated cooking" means that a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; hereinafter the same) is heated in different places and independently under heating operation conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). ) refers to cooking using two or more heat sources that can be set.

More specifically, in the “coordinated cooking” in Embodiment 1, the heating locations for one food to be cooked are above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113 .
The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 . Note that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations in the same time zone or with a time difference.

"Cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of "first cooperative cooking" and "second cooperative cooking".
The “first cooperative cooking” means first cooking in the left heating section 17HL by the induction heating source 9 and then cooking in the heating chamber 113 using microwaves. The "first cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A) defines the cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.

On the other hand, the “second cooperative cooking” means first (collaborative) cooking by microwave heating or the oven heating source 188 inside the heating chamber 113, or by these two heating sources, and then induction cooking. Heat cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL by the heating source 9. FIG.

The "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2B) defines the cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.
In the case of the second coordinated cooking mode, normally (default setting conditions), for either or both of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first, the coordinated The integrated control unit MC performs processing for restricting operations corresponding to menus other than the cooking mode KM3.

The selection of "first cooperative cooking mode" and "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A, SR2B) is not something that the user judges each time and performs selection operation, but the cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode. When the corresponding identification information 330 (for example, the name of cooking "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines).

In this Embodiment 1, the heating units of the induction heating source 9 that are used when executing the "cooking" menu are both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the course of implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, when only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used irrespective of the cooperative cooking during execution of the cooperative cooking mode. can. However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. or forcibly lowering the thermal power is issued by the integrated controller MC.

In FIG. 55, CH2 is the second layer selection means for selecting the control menu. That is, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the selection means of the second layer is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.

On the other hand, in the composite cooking mode KM2, the selection means of the second layer is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.
Further, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, the selection means of the second layer are the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L and the input key 43R1 of the right operating section 40R.

That is, in the first embodiment, the input key for forwardly and reversely feeding the compound cooking menu and the cooperative cooking menu and displaying them at predetermined display positions on the integrated display section 30 is the input key 43M1. be. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu, the same input key can be used to display the desired cooking menu, resulting in good operability.

As shown in FIG. 55, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L to specify the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. (SR6). Also, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

Note that, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is basically not set in advance, so the user can cook for any desired time.

In addition, at the stage (SR5) when induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to increase the thermal power (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. can be specified (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating section 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the input key 43L1 is used to terminate the heat cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL, the cooking process in the linked cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next process (described in detail in FIG. 56).

When the induction heating process is finished in the cooking process of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there is also a control menu in which the cooking process proceeds while the microwave output is fixed at, for example, 500W.

When the microwave heating cooking is ended by the input key 43MT, all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are ended (SR11). Although it is not the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, after this, the user operates the central operation unit 40M to further perform microwave heating cooking (using the control menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the independent cooking mode KM1). can be

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 55 show operation steps when microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the single control mode KM1 for microwave heating and oven heating and the combined cooking mode KM2 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34). . Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, one combined cooking mode KM2 or single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3).

Next, by pressing the input key 43MS, execution of one combined cooking mode KM2 or single control mode KM1 is commanded (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). In addition, in the description of FIG. 34, the entire cooking mode is described as a combined cooking mode, but menus such as "microwave manual" are only for microwave heating. That is, in reality, the control menu for the single heating mode KM1 is exceptionally included. This was explained in FIG.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the control menu of "range grill (RG) cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit. "RG cooking" is a combination of microwave heating cooking and grill cooking. is.
On the other hand, if the same input key 43M1 is operated, "warm" can be selected.

After starting microwave heating or oven heating, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is commanded to stop (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 55 show operation steps when performing induction heating cooking with the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to select cooking by the right heating unit 17HL (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically determined after a certain period of time (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is the IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the linked cooking menu of the "linked cooking mode" KM3 displayed on the integrated display section 30 by the first specific screen 30SP.

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
"Single cooking" in step SP5 means that the induction heating source 9 alone is used as the heating source.
If the user operates the input key 43R2 or 43R3 to issue a command to change the thermal power of the induction heating after induction heating has started, the integrated controller MC changes the thermal power, which is one of the control conditions. (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start command for the cooking process in which microwave heating is performed is the input key 43MS. The input key 43MS is also used to start the cooking process of the single cooking mode KM1 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are independently driven.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the induction heating source 9 does not have a dedicated switch (button or input key) for instructing the start of cooking, but a dedicated switch or input key (input (In addition to the key 43MS) may be provided.

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, a command to stop the right heating unit 17HR is issued (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43L1 should be pressed. In this way, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both for selecting a heating unit to start operation and for ending cooking.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9. As shown in FIG. Moreover, it is a schematic diagram which shows that the heat source used receives the restriction|limiting of operation|movement in the case of cooperative cooking.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 56 is the "first cooperative cooking mode" described in FIG.

In the "first cooperative cooking mode" of this example, the induction heating source 9 is operated in the cooking step 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated as the heating source in the cooking step 2. Also, in the cooking step 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 55, one cooperative cooking mode KM3 consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking mode to when the input key 43MS is pressed.

P2 is the heat cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking process 1 does not include a "preheating process" (see FIGS. 59, 60, and 64) in which the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
In P3, since the cooking by the heating means used in the cooking process 1 is switched to the cooking in the cooking process 2 in which another heating means is used, the operation of the heating means used in the cooking process 1 is temporarily stopped and another This is a rest period (also referred to as “transition period TR”) until heating by the heating means is started. The length of this pause period depends on the user's operation timing. In other words, if the user issues an instruction to start the cooking process 2 earlier, this pause time will be shorter.
P4 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 2) by the heating means used in the cooking step 2 (a single heating source or a plurality of heating sources may be used).

In this Embodiment 1, as one of the linked cooking modes KM3, a "linked preheating cooking mode KM4" is provided.
The associated preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. An example of a cooking menu using the associated preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger". In the case of this "hamburger", the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the heating operation of the preheating process is not stopped when the cooking process 1 starts. Therefore, from an electrical point of view, the oven heating source 189 and the microwave heating source 189 in charge of the cooking process 1 and the induction heating source 9 are energized in parallel in the same time zone.

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (the induction heating source 9 in the above description) that has started operating before the cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking process 1, and the cooking process During period 1, both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or microwave heating source 189 may be energized.

Unless otherwise contradicted, the following description is based on the premise that the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is included in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

As is clear from FIG. 56, at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (on the displayed first specific screen 30SP). At this point, the left operating section 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable.

Specifically, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "invalidation" means that the input key 43L1 does not transmit a valid command signal to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC does not accept the command signal. It has both the meaning of not treating it as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation section 40R of the right heating section 17HR can be used. If the right heating section 17HR has already been used for another control menu (heating operation is being continued), the right heating section 17HR can be used as it is. On the other hand, since it is determined (by the integrated control unit MC) that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be used, the above-mentioned "usage prohibition" processing is not performed.

Therefore, only the left heating unit 17HL is "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". When the right heating unit 17HL is not being used for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR may be similarly occupied or not occupied. The control program may be changed so that the "dedicated" state is set when the input key 43MS is pressed after finishing the selection of the cooperative cooking mode.

Here, the exclusive use of the induction heating source 9 will be described with a focus on the function of the input operation unit 40 .
As described above, the input operation section has an input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating section 17HL.
This input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started. That is, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating portion 17HL is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after induction heating is started, the heating operation can be instantaneously stopped.

On the other hand, the input operation section has an input key 44L. This input key 44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
The "control menu" in this case includes "boiling", "boiling", "cooking", "frying (automatic)", etc., and only one of them can be selected.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. When this input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed if the above-described "permission conditions" are satisfied.
At the stage when this first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 56), or when the "input command for start" for shifting to the linked cooking mode is performed by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 57), the linked The cooking mode KM3 is entered and, at the same time, the heat source to be used is "occupied".

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the "occupied state" will be described.
There are two methods by which the integrated control device MC makes the left heating unit 17HL in an exclusive state.
(1) First method:
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled. Other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, 44L all disable input functions.
In this case, high-frequency power starts to be supplied to the left IH coil 17L after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the input key 43MS is pressed.
Therefore, in order to stop the induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) that has been started, the input key 43L1 should be pressed once.
To start heating again in this state for additional heating, the input key 43L1 is similarly pressed once (the linked cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).
(2) Second method:
The input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 and 43L4 in the left heating section 17HL are disabled. However, only the input key 44L remains valid even after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is determined for the first time only when the input key 44L is pressed once after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
After that, when high-frequency power is supplied to the left IH coil 17L and induction heating is started, the input function of the input key 43L1 is immediately restored. Therefore, the induction heating operation can be immediately stopped by pressing the input key 43L1 once. Further, by pressing the input key 43L1 again, the induction heating operation can be restarted (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled even at this stage).

In the following description, the first method will be selected, but the adoption of the second method does not affect the basic effects obtained by the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the cooking process 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do.

In the cooking process 1, it is first necessary to press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L only once, and at this time, the left operation unit 40L sends an induction heating start command to the integrated controller MC. .

The operation of the heating start command by the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking is performed at a certain thermal power (weak or standard thermal power) after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time of input by the input key 43MS. A method of starting with .

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation for stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking process 1 ends immediately. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation for resuming the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode KM1 as described with reference to FIGS. 47A and 47B. You only have to press it once again. Furthermore, when the user designates the heating power, pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3 will decrease or increase the heating power by one step each time the key is pressed, and the desired heating power can be set.

As shown in FIG. 56, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the metal dish used for induction heating can be housed in the heating chamber 113 as it is and subjected to microwave heating. Since the food inside cannot be heated by microwaves, it is necessary to transfer it to a lidless metal container, heat-resistant glass, or porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (P3) begins. Cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After starting with the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual cooking items targeted by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the change of the control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is designed so that it cannot be increased or decreased during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 56, after the cooking step 2 (P4), even if the microwave heating control conditions (for example, heating time) are not set, a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program is set. There are two types: one is to automatically end the cooking process when the process has passed, and the other is to end the cooking process at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Also, once the cooking process 2 is stopped, it is treated as having finished all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set the control menu such as "manual range", and additional heat cooking is performed, as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2. You can also If the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 prescribes that the cooking process 3 is followed by the cooking process 2, the cooking process 3 is started after the cooking process 2 through the transition period TR.

As shown in FIG. 56, in this cooperative cooking mode KM3, only the left heating section 17HL of the first heat source 9 is used, so during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking process 2 (P4), the right heating section The use of 17HR is not subject to any restrictions. Therefore, during the period of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, another heat cooking can be performed simultaneously in the right heating section 17HR. For example, the right heating unit 17HR may be used to select, for example, "water boiling" in the IH control menu using the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right) 40R.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, and is an example of slightly changing the configuration of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start timing at which the operation of the heating source used (the induction heating source 9 in this case) is restricted may be changed.

The example shown in FIG. 57 is at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the cooking name of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP). In this case, the left heating source 17HL is not yet fully occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be operated for input, and can select cooking from the IH control menu (for example, "water boiler") in the single cooking mode KM1.

That is, during this preparation period P1, a new input operation (single cooking mode KM1) can be performed by the left operation unit 40L.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated controller MC. This point is different from that of FIG. All the input keys of the left operation unit 40L may be invalidated. The meaning of "invalidate" in FIG. 57 is the same as that explained in FIG.

Next, basic operations of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in Embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. FIG.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between input operations and displays in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in chronological order. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 63 is a flow chart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 64 is a flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL and the cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113. FIG.
In FIG. 58, when the input function of the main input key is active and related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is indicated by a hollow rectangular frame. Note that not all input keys are drawn.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the heat cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating section 17HL, the cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L. In addition, since control conditions such as heating power and heating time are automatically displayed by default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when entering the cooking period P2, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (actually, even if the input operation signal reaches the integrated controller MC, the integrated control ignored by the device MC).

In FIG. 58, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled.

When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so the induction heating operation is stopped at this stage, and the heat cooking period is resumed. P2 ends.

Next, the heating pause period P3 is entered. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation section 40L are all maintained valid, so that the left heating section 17HL is separated during the transition period TR or the cooking period P4. (In this case, the control menu is selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches the input keys 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. Then, by pressing the input key 43MT, the cooking process 2 can be terminated at an arbitrary timing.

Note that the cooking process 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has passed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 ends, regardless of whether the user terminates it arbitrarily or automatically.

Therefore, immediately after the end of the cooking process 2, when additional heating is desired in the heating chamber 113 again with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. of the central operation unit 40M are pressed. By operating the key 43MS, cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 can be performed.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. Immediately after finishing the cooking process 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooperative cooking mode is entered. It is also possible to perform a process of waiting for a user's input (operation of the input key 43MS) by providing guidance to be handled as a part of KM3.
In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user takes out the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 and checks the doneness of the food. A method of touching an input key MS waiting for an additional operation can be adopted. This method can also improve usability for the user.

FIG. 59 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59, four inputs are basically required for the operation procedure until the transition to the composite cooking mode KM2. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. Then, when the mode is shifted to the composite cooking mode KM2, the operation of the input key 43R1 or 43L1 is required to actually operate the induction heating source 9 for heating.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59, four times of input are required for the operation procedure until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered as described above, after operating the input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M, the user must first operate the right heating unit 17HR by operating the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R. do.

When the user selects to use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operating unit 40L.

In this way, after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation unit corresponding to the heat source can issue a command to start the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the positions of the operation unit and input keys when starting and ending heating.

Next, FIG. 60 will be described.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis shows various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis shows the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

FIG. 60 shows the process until the cooking operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started.
In item A on the left side of FIG. 60, "user operation" indicates various input operations in the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" step, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

A1 "pressing the relay button" means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
A2 "menu selection" is to select one desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

A3 "Heat source selection" is an operation to select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed with the input key 43M2. This example shows a case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
A5 "pressing the right IH input button" is to operate the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

In item B on the left side of FIG. 60, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 described above.
B1 "selecting cooperative cooking mode" indicates a step of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the object to be cooked.
"Grill heat source standby" in B2 indicates the period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "During heating" in B3 indicates the induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 60, "left IH display section" refers to the left display section 31L.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. As described above, the user performs input operations while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the input (operation A4 in FIG. 60) for commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not activated as part of setting the left heating unit 17HL to the "dedicated state". At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

C2 "turn off (accept normal operation)" means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. However, at the stage where the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it has been decided that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the left heating unit 17HL to the "dedicated state". For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L can be accepted. By actually pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operating unit 40L, it becomes possible to select a control menu (for example, "water boiler") of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 60, "right IH display section" refers to the display content of the right display section 31R.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" of D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display section 31R.
As described above, the user performs input operations while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the input (operation A4 in FIG. 60) for commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It is a stage. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the "dedicated state". At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, at the stage where the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been completed.
The "heating standby state)" of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after the user has decided to use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, it is at the stage of waiting for a command to start the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheat (target) temperature (e.g. 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 88).
"Menu change" in E2 means operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from among the cooperative cooking modes and selecting the corresponding cooperative cooking mode (Fig. 89). reference).

E3 "Change selected heating source (select right IH)" refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is performed with the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 89). ).

E4 "Right IH input button pressing guidance display" means that in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation section 40R is operated in order to start cooperative cooking. It is meant to indicate that it is necessary. That is, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking process 1 of cooperative cooking (see FIG. 90(A)).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the integrated display section (central display section) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP ( See FIG. 90(B)).

In item F on the left side of FIG.
As indicated by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are made.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the IH and then finished on the range grill." In other words, although the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, the user is notified of the same information by voice.

The notification content of F2 is, for example, "This is deep-fried chicken. Cook it on the range grill and then finish it on the IH." That is, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the cooperative cooking mode selection and the explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The notification content of F3 is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user has performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR in operation A3, the result of the selection of the heating source is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "heating will start when the right IH input button is pressed". In other words, the user is requested to perform an operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS) following the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, an operation of the "input key" on the right operation section 40L is requested. The input key here is the input key 43R1.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180°C".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started, and the temperature of the object to be heated N such as a pan placed on the top plate 15 reaches the target temperature of 180°C. Preheating operation is started and this fact is reported.

In item G on the left side of FIG. 60, "left IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of FIG. 60, "right IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and the preheating process is being performed.

In item J on the left side of FIG. 60, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B that constitute the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating source. 189 refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 . In other words, it generally shows the operation of the driving unit for carrying out the above-described "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61 shows a case of cooking "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Similar to FIG. 60, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 61 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In FIG. 61, the content of operation A11 is to cook a hamburger by first selecting the right heating unit 17HR as the cooking process 1 (corresponding to the cooking process B11 in FIG. 61) and pressing the input key 43R1. be.

A12 "IH off/on button depression" means that the user first selects the right heating unit 17HR as an input switch and presses the input key 43R1 in order to end the hamburger cooking step 1.

A13 “open the grill door” is an operation for the user to open the door 114 .
A14 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A15 "pressing the time button" means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

A16 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A17 “pressing the cancel button (cancelling during grill heating)” means pressing the oven heating source 188 .
A18 "pressing the cancel button" means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the cooperative cooking mode).

In item B (cooking process) in FIG. 61, B11 "IH heating process" indicates an induction heating process in the right heating unit 17HR selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 waits until the user's operation A14 is performed.
B13 “grill heating step” indicates a heating step using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 .

B14 "grill heating extension waiting step" indicates a waiting period during which the user waits for a judgment as to whether or not to issue an extension step after the grill heating step of B13 is temporarily completed.
The "extended heating step" in B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven (energized) again because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extension waiting step in B14. start). The extended heating process is started by pressing the enter key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 61, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, if A18 "Press cancel button" is performed once, the linked cooking mode will be canceled at the time the input key 43MT is operated. and microwave heating source 189 must be operated in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display section) in FIG. 61, C11 "preheating display" is to display the target preheating temperature in the preheating process in the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (FIG. 80, FIG. 83). For example, the target preheating temperature (for example, 180°C) is displayed.

C11a-C11d indicate progress displays 1-4. For example, progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". This "appropriate temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the target preheating temperature (for example, 180°C). During the period of the preheating display (C11), progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In FIG. 61, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating section 17HL is performed on the left display section 31L.

The “cooking step” of C12 indicates that the object to be heated N is being cooked after the left heating unit 17HR reaches the target preheating temperature (for example, 180° C.). That is, it is displayed that the cooking process 1 has started.

Item E (central display section) in FIG. 61 indicates the display contents of the integrated display section 30 .
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating section 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 90).

In FIG. 61, "IH heating display" of E12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is ready for heating because the preheating is completed (see FIG. 91). That is, it indicates that it is the stage of proceeding to the cooking process 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

E13 "grill door open/close operation guidance display" is to prompt the user to move the food to be cooked (to perform the cooking process 2) to the heating chamber (heating chamber) 113, since the induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed. There is (see Figure 93). One example of the additional information 331 in this scene is the indication "please put the food in the heating chamber".

As shown in FIG. 92, during the induction heating cooking by the left IH coil 17HL, if the user wishes to stop the heating operation at an arbitrary timing, the additional information "press the left IH turn-on button". 331 may be displayed.

In FIG. 61, E14 "Alternate display of heating power change display and start guidance display" indicates that the heating power in range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, in such a heating chamber It is displayed that grill heating cooking can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 94).

In FIG. 61, the "grill heating display" at E15 means that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2) (see FIG. 95). In the first embodiment, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to simultaneously heat the food from the inside and outside by the synergistic effect of microwaves and radiant heat.

In FIG. 61, E16 "Alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" means that the grill heating step B13 is completed, so that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again. It is for display (see FIG. 96).

Also, if the user does not desire extended heating, pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT) displays that the linked cooking mode can be ended without extended heating (see FIG. 96). These two types of information are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds in the first specific screen 30SP.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the heating cooking time is extended by the input key 43M2 and the grill is heated again (see FIG. 97). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) in FIG. 61, the content of notification of F11 is "start preheating the pot at 180°C". This is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating process B11.

In FIG. 61, the notification content of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature, please start cooking". It notifies that the preheating by the right heating section 17HR has reached a target temperature (for example, 180° C.), and prompts the right operation section 40R to perform a heating start operation.

FA1 in FIG. 61 is notification of the first reference information. This "first reference information" FA1 is referred to as "reference information 1" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 31L and 31R using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 1".

The notification of reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has passed since the cooking process 1 (G12 in FIG. 61) by the left IH coil 17L was started.
This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 61, the notification content of F13 is "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself and put the food in the refrigerator". This is because the cooking process 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR is over, so the food should be moved to the heating chamber 113 for the cooking process 2, and because the top plate 15 and the like are hot, it calls attention. be.

The notification content of F14 is "Press the start button to start heating the range grill".
This notifies that the input key 43MS can be operated to start range grill cooking.
The notification content of F15 is "Begin standardizing finish of range grill". This notifies that cooking process 2 of the range grill is started and cooking (for example, hamburger) is completed. It should be noted that "start standard" means that the heating power for microwave grill cooking is "standard".

FA2 in FIG. 61 is notification of the second reference information. This "second reference information" FA2 is called "reference information 2" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 31L and 31R using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 2".

The reference information 2 (FA2) is notified after a predetermined elapsed time (second elapsed time TN2) from the start of the cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 61) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113. It is done when the time has passed. Alternatively, it is performed when the predetermined temperature (second elevated temperature TN2) is exceeded from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 61) is started. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The notification content of F16 is to notify that cooking on the range grill is finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). In addition, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, it is also notified that the series of linked cooking modes KM3 is terminated without extended heating. Furthermore, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, the user is reminded to clean the inside of the refrigerator after it cools down.

The notification content of F17 is that after the cooking step (B13) of the range grill is completed, the user will operate extended heating to start further heating for 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further instructs extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) in FIG. 61, G11 indicates the induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 that follows the preheating step.

In item J (microwave grill driving unit) in FIG. 61, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking process 2 is executed during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "fried chicken", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
As in FIGS. 60 and 61, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

In FIG. 62, the operation content of A21 of item A (user's operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL as a preheating step and press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 62) in order to cook fried chicken. G21).

The operation of A22 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 . At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "depressing the start button" and is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By this operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. In addition, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 .

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating portion 17HL ends, the grill heating step B23 of the “range grill driving portion” in the heating chamber 113 is started.
Since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately by energizing the oven heating source 188 in this manner, the time required to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is have decided.

The operation of A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the "microwave grill driving unit" is completed. Thereby, the object to be cooked (food) can be taken out from the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, before the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for fried chicken (the object to be heated N such as a special pot) is heated in the left heating unit 17HL (cooking step G22). and the cooking oil is being heated (the preheating process has started).

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M2 called a time button in order to repeat the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill drive unit".
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to end the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. This cancels the cooperative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 62, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is a preheating step by the induction heating source 9, which is a step of preheating by the left heating portion 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is an IH heating step, which is a cooking step 2 in which the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user heats.

Next, in FIG. 62, item C (left IH display section) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of display C21. C21a is progress display 1, C21b is progress display 2, C21c is progress display 3, and C21d is progress display 4.
The display of C22 is the completion (cooking process) display of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 62, item E (central display portion) will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheat display, and it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating (see FIG. 98(A)).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which prompts the door 114 to be opened and the object to be cooked (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 98 (B). )reference).

E23 is an alternate display of heating power change display and start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", it is possible to adjust the heating power and to start cooking by pressing the input key 43MS. It displays what can be done (see FIG. 99(A)).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and displays the remaining time until the end of cooking once it has started (Fig. 100). reference).
E25, as shown in FIGS. 101A and 101B, alternately displays the extension operation guidance display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking step B24, which is performed by driving the "microwave grill driving section", is completed, the time is extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to display that the heat cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it displays that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed. That is, these two types of information are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds in the first specific screen 30SP.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking process B24, which is being performed by driving the "range grill drive unit", is to be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 102).
.

In FIG. 62, item F (informing means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is a voice notification that the preheating process has started with the target preheating temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, such as "Preheating of the pot will start at 180°C."
The notification of F22 is "Soon the left IH will reach the set temperature. Please put the food in the refrigerator". It informs that the preheating by the left heating part 17HL has reached the target preheating temperature (for example, 180° C.), and on the other hand, prompts to put food etc. in the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. is.

The notification of F23 has the content of "The heating of the range is started with the start button."
In other words, it is notified that the input key 43MS is pressed to start range grill cooking.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "range, start finish standard". In this case, "finishing standard" means that the thermal power is at a standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 62 is notification of the third reference information. This "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 3".

The reference information 3 is notified after a predetermined time (third It is performed when the elapsed time TN3) has passed. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

The notification of F25 relates to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, "The range grill has finished cooking. You can extend the cooking time with the time button.
Please take the food out of the refrigerator and start cooking with IH."

The notification of F26 is for notifying that the cooking on the range grill is to be performed again after the cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, a notification saying "Microwave grill, starting 2 minutes" is made. This means that since the extension time is set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for 2 minutes.

FA5 in FIG. 62 is notification of the fifth reference information. This "fifth reference information" FA5 is called "reference information 5" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 5".

The reference information 5 is notified after a predetermined time (fifth It is performed when time TN5) has passed. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 62, in item G (left IH driving section), the preheating process of G21 is the preheating process by the left heating section 17HL and indicates the driving period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 62, G22 similarly indicates the heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) period for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (microwave grill drive unit), the heating step J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heat source 188 and the microwave heat source 189 . In addition, since the linked cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 61 is for cooking "fried chicken", it is sufficient to drive only the microwave heating source 189 in practice.

Next, FIGS. 63-65 will be described.
FIGS. 63 to 65 show the process of notifying the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 63 shows the case of cooking a hamburger as the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 63 is a flow chart corresponding to various steps of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG.
In this Embodiment 1, the hamburger is prepared in the cooking step 1, for example, by the left heating unit 17HL, and in the cooking step 2 by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, the cooking process 2 uses both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking step 1) is started on the object to be heated N already heated to the preheating temperature (for example, 180° C.) in the left heating unit 17HL, and as described in FIG. The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking." The "set temperature" is the preheating temperature set by the user. The default value is 180°C. Also, this cooking process 1 is not started from the time point when the IH coil 17L starts induction heating. The start time is when the object to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger) is placed on the object to be heated N that has reached the preheating temperature and heating is started.

In the next step SA2, the elapsed time measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
A clock circuit 96 measures the elapsed time TN1.

At step SA3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded.
When grilling a hamburger, the amount (weight) of the hamburger, the time to bake, and the degree of heat to bake are important. , if the standard time is "7 minutes", the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

If the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know the approximate timing of turning the hamburger upside down (turning it over) halfway through, in the above example, the user can indicate the timing of turning upside down by the notification FA1 after 5 minutes have passed. can know. The actual content of the notification is, for example, "Five minutes have passed since the start of heating. Heating will be completed in two minutes."

In addition, in the case of other cooperative cooking modes, for example, the notification is such that the timing of adding water, seasoning, or cooking liquid can be known on the way.

If the elapsed time TN1 has passed, step SA3 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step SA4, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1.
Further, in synchronization with this, reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed by the left display section 31L.

After step SA4, it is determined whether or not the user wants to stop the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if there is a stop command, the process proceeds to step SA6.

At step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As described with reference to FIG. 61, a voice notification F13 to the effect that "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself and put the food into the chamber."

A user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger) into the heating chamber 113 . In this case, do not use the metal pot used for induction heating. Instead, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like, or a dedicated saucer 145 (not shown) is used. A hamburger is put in such tableware or saucer and placed in the heating chamber 113 .

When the integrated controller MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is in a closed state, in the next step SA7, as described with reference to FIG. ” is performed.

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes "Yes", and as the cooking step 2, range grill cooking is started.
As described with reference to FIG. 61, a voice notification F15 is made with the content of "The range grill finishing standard will be started" (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189, which serves as a heating source for the range grill, is driven with standard heating power. For example, operation is started with an output of 500 W as described above.
Also, the upper heater 163A of the oven heating source 188, which serves as the heating source for the range grill, starts to be energized at 1000W.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time of step SA10 is started (SA11). When it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has passed (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies the second reference information (reference information 2). In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 2 (FA2).

The notification content of the reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the cooking process 2 was started. If the standard time of the cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, and the elapsed time TN2 is set to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the cooking process 2 can be finished 30 seconds before the end of the cooking process 2. can know.

In general, it is said that when a food material is heated to some extent, the degree of heating of the food material progresses rapidly. In particular, if the food is not used to cooking with heat, there is a concern that the food will be overheated. Therefore, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified before the end of the cooking step.

Similarly, in the cooking step 2, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified before the end of the cooking step. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to finish the cooking and pay attention to and prepare for the next step.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After that, the notification of F16 shown in FIG. 61 is performed. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). Further, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, all the "hamburger" cooking processes in the linked cooking mode are terminated.

Next, FIG. 64 will be described.
In this FIG. 64, "fried chicken" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the cooking process 1 is performed with the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). The cooking process 2 is, for example, the case of using the left heating unit 17HL.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 64, there is also a cooking process 3, and this process is performed by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).
FIG. 64 is a flow chart corresponding to various steps of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 62, when the cooking process 1 is started (A23), for example, a voice notification F24 saying, "Microwave, finish standardization is started" is performed. In this case, "finishing standard" means that the thermal power is at a standard level. For example, a heating operation is started with a microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

At next step SB2, measurement of the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the cooking object is started. In other words, the measurement of the elevated temperature TN3 of the chicken, which is the basis of the fried chicken, is started.
The temperature detection circuit 93 measures the temperature TN3.

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When chicken, which is a food material for fried chicken, is heated by microwaves, the temperature rises. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the measured result of this temperature reaches a predetermined temperature rise TN3.

The rate of increase of the temperature TN3 varies depending on three factors: the amount (weight) of the fried chicken, the baking time, and the degree of heat. The temperature rise pattern when cooking a predetermined amount (e.g., 300 g) of "fried chicken" material with standard heating power (e.g., microwave with an output of 500 W) is determined by the integrated control device MC as control data from the results of prior experiments. I have.

In other words, the integrated controller MC has data indicating that when finishing with a standard microwave output (500 W), it is better to raise the temperature to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the user is notified when the temperature reaches the elevated temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can know in advance that the time to end the (microwave) heating of fried chicken is approaching by the voice notification of reference information 3 (FA3). In addition, in synchronism with this, it is also possible to know from the reference display 3 of the integrated display section 30 .

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to excess cooking time). It should be noted that the user may stop in the middle. For example, if the control program is to stop the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130 one minute after the temperature rises to TN3, the temperature rise The heating operation may be arbitrarily stopped before one minute elapses after receiving the notification of the reference information 3 that the temperature has risen to TN3.

After that, the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 using the induction heating unit 17H. For this purpose, the user needs to move the food in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15 . This point will be explained with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 64, step SB7 is notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in the cooking process 2. FIG. This is determined by the elapsed time TN4 or the temperature rise TN4 from the time when the user puts the food to be cooked on the food N heated to a high temperature by preheating after preheating is completed in the induction heating unit 17H.

At this step SB8, the user does not operate the input operation section 40 at all. Simply move the food to be cooked. Therefore, as the starting point of the elapsed time TN4, information obtained by detecting the timing when the temperature of the object to be heated N is lowered is adopted. Since the temperature of the object to be heated N suddenly drops when the object to be cooked is placed or thrown in, the temperature detecting circuit 93 detects the point of time and counts the elapsed time from this detection time.

Step SB8 after this is a scene for judging an instruction for carrying out the cooking process 3 in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking process 2 is finished. The user performs the operation of A26 shown in FIG.
For that purpose, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before this step SB7, it is necessary for the user to return the food that has been induction-heated (cooking step 2) on the top plate 15 to the heating chamber 113 again. This point will be explained with reference to FIG.

At the next step SB9, the cooking process 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification of F26 notifies that the range grill is to be used for cooking again after the cooking of the range grill is finished. For example, a notification saying "Microwave grill, starting 2 minutes" is made.

At the next step SB10, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start of the cooking process 3 is started.
A clock circuit 96 measures the elapsed time TN5.

At the next step SB11, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN5 has passed.
In the stage before starting the cooking process 3 (the stage before step SB8), for example, when the cooking of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to be performed for 2 minutes, the elapsed time is , for example, 1 minute and 30 seconds. In other words, it is set 30 seconds before the cooking process 3 ends.

If the elapsed time TN5 is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
At step SB12, reference information 5 (FA5) is announced by voice. The reference information 5 is, for example, guidance such as "heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend the heating time further, please set the time." In addition, since it is known that the final cooking process will be completed, the user can start preparations for taking out the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 113 from the point of time when this reference information 5 is notified. In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 5 (FA5).

At the next step SB13, the cooking process 3 is automatically stopped.
In addition, the notification of F25 shown in FIG. 62 is also performed. This notification relates to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, the content is "The cooking of the range grill is finished. You can extend the cooking time by pressing the time button. Please take out the food from the oven." Note that the cooking process 3 can be stopped by opening the door 114 without the user operating the input operation unit 40 .

Next, FIG. 65 will be described.
This FIG. 65 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. 65 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 62 and 64. FIG.
In FIG. 65, #1 to #9 indicate user's operations and state changes of the heating cooker 1. In FIG. Other symbols correspond to FIGS. 62 and 64. FIG.

In FIG. 65, the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1 before starting the cooking process 1 in order to cook "fried chicken" (operation A21 in FIG. 62).
Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is started. The object to be heated N in this case is a metal frying pan for tempura, and a certain amount or more of edible oil is put therein.

On the other hand, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and puts the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 114, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this time, the microwave heating source 189 operates to start the cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking. Then, reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64 (SB4 in FIG. 64).

During the cooking process 1, preheating of the left induction heating portion 17HL is completed (for example, the heated portion N is heated to 180° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of preheating is notified to the user by voice, text, etc. (#2).

The user can stop the microwave cooking at any timing during the cooking process 1. To stop, open door 114 . If the input key 40MT of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the selection of "fried chicken" in the cooperative cooking mode is cancelled.

The opening of the door 114 immediately stops the microwave heating operation, and the cooking process 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N preheated on the top plate 15 (#4).

Then, the cooking process 2 is started in the left heating section 17HL (#5).
In the cooking process 2, since the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting preheating, an induction heating start command is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated controller MC at that time. Sent.

The user does not need to operate the input operation unit 40 to start the cooking process 2 (#5).
The cooking process 2 starts when the food to be cooked is placed on the food N that has been actually preheated to be heated.
The end of the cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user operating the left operation unit 40L.

The user then moves the food item again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start the cooking process 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
When a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has passed since the cooking process 3 by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 61), reference information 5 ( Notification of FA5) is performed.

The reference information 5 (FA5) is information including guidance such as, for example, "Heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend the heating time further, please set the time." In addition, since it is known that the final cooking process will be completed, the user can start preparations for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the time when this reference information 5 is notified. In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 5 (FA5).

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking process 3 ends (#7). Note that this cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately when the user opens the door 114 .
After that, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N preheated on the top plate 15 (#8). In this case, since the object to be heated N is maintained in a heated state by induction heating, induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (#9). In this case, if the object to be heated N is already preheated, the object to be cooked is simply moved to the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 as it is.

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 40L. That is, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L corresponding to the left heating section 17HL.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 65 can shorten the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 .
That is, the food (to-be-cooked food) is put into the heating chamber 113 and the cooking process 1 is started before the completion of preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of preheating.

Since preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred to the food N to be heated on the top plate 15 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and the cooking process is completed. 2 can be started.

Note that the cooking process 3 and the cooking process 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the user's wishes, the cooking process may be completed as required.

Also, in FIG. 65, the "left IH coil driving period" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished. , the driving of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 40L after the cooking process 2 is finished. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 65, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
Similar to FIG. 65, FIG. 66 shows operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. 66 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 62 and 64. FIG.
In FIG. 66, #1 to #9 indicate user's operations and state changes of the heating cooker 1, as explained in FIG. Other symbols correspond to FIGS. 62 and 64. FIG.

A difference between FIG. 66 and FIG. 65 will be described.
FIG. 66 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after waiting for the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N by the induction heating source 9 and its notification (#2).

When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N by the induction heating source 9 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L and 31R, and when the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N, the user is notified by the voice of the heating chamber. A door 114 of 113 is opened, and ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) are put into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this time, the microwave heating source 189 operates to start the cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking. Then, reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64 (SB4 in FIG. 64). After this, the steps are the same as those shown in FIG.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 66, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 is longer than in FIG.
However, after waiting for the completion of preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of preheating, the food (the food to be cooked) is started to be heated in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, at the end of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113, There is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately by moving the food to be cooked. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

In FIG. 66, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished. , the driving of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 40L after the cooking process 2 is finished. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 66, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

66 and 67, the induction heating source 9 is first energized to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113. In FIG.
The "associated preheating cooking mode" of Embodiment 1 is not limited to the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber.

In another cooperative preheating cooking mode, the induction heating source 9 is first energized, the object to be heated N such as a frying pan is heated to a preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), and when the target temperature is reached, In this method, the object to be cooked is placed on the object N to be heated, and the cooking step 1 is started.
After this preheating step, the object to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 113 while being placed on the object N to be heated. The cooking step 2 may be performed by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 .

Next, FIGS. 67 to 69 will be described.
FIG. 67 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 68 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until it shifts to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results.

FIG. 67 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have already been described with reference to FIG. 38, they will be briefly described.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The presence or absence of an abnormality in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 is also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display a message that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting selection of the heating means.
In this step ST4, the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, and 2B) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 46).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key (for example, 43M1) other than the input key 43MC has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. At step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage status of the heating sources used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
This permission condition and determination result will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

At step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, it is determined whether or not the individual heating cooking is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are the individual operation units, and the combined cooking mode KM2 is set by the central operation unit 40M. Determine if selected.

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" is started as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC has not been operated and the input key 43M1 has been touch-operated, the determination in step STC is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 67, steps STR1 and STR2 are "operation step A" of the "permission condition" for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Step STR1 is a step of judging "permission condition 1".
Here, "permission condition 1" is
(1) the peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) If there is a power reduction command signal received from the external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command must be 5000 W or more. If these two conditions are satisfied, step STR1 is executed. The determination is "Yes".

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) If the induction heating source 9 is provided with a central heating section, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) one or both of the oven heating means 188 or the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation;
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 will result in a "Yes" determination. Then, it proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 68).
If the determination is "No" in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of "5000 W or more" in the "permission condition 1" will be explained. To simplify the explanation, the following explanation does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (preliminary securing of power demand) when implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power during operation of each heating source when executing the cooperative cooking mode is as follows. Because it is a street.
(1) Range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) During oven operation: 2000 W (upper heater: 1000 W, lower heater: 10
00 W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (microwave heating source 189: 500 W, upper heater: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate simultaneously.
That is, the total power of the microwave heating source 189 "1000 W", the oven heating source 188 "1000 W (2000 W is alternately energized at 1000 W)", and the induction heating source 9 "1500 W" is the maximum power. is 3500W.

When the demand (prior security of power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed from this state, since the remaining demand is insufficient for the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, the thermal power of the right heating unit 17HR is lowered to 1500 W (from 3000 W) to start cooperative cooking. can do.

If the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 4000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is frying food (maximum 1500W required), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is to be performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR must be reduced.
However, if the heating power is lowered while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be lowered.
Ultimately, 4000 W cannot ensure the required thermal power for the automatic control menu (fried food and two types of appropriate temperature).

As is clear from the above description, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) necessary for cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) necessary for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand of 5000 W, which is the total value (prior security of power demand).

Next, FIG. 68 will be described.
In the cooperative cooking mode of Embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (first cooperative cooking mode) (see FIG. 55). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in reverse order.

The steps in FIG. 68 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 to display information on the cooperative cooking mode (this step may be hereinafter referred to as "operation step B"). As shown in FIG. 54, in order to select a cooking menu for each linked cooking mode, a "name of food to be cooked" (for example, "hamburger") 330 is displayed as one type of identification information.

At the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 54, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode is displayed sequentially upward or downward. The display changes as you move. In this first embodiment, there are eight types of food to be cooked in total. Therefore, if the left input key 43M1 is operated once in the state of FIG. switch to

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), it is determined as "Yes" in step STR5, and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. By operating a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select either one of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L.

It should be noted that the right heating section 17HR may be set as a default, the heating section specifying section 333R may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 30SP, and the process may proceed to step STR7. In the example described with reference to FIG. 54, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default when performing hamburger steak by cooperative cooking. was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 70).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation program proceeds to step STR8.
In step STR8 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation step C"), the finally selected heating unit (for example, the right heating unit 17HR) and the output during microwave heating are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP. A control condition such as a value of 500 W is displayed, the process proceeds to the next step STR9, and the cooperative cooking mode is entered from this stage. That is, after this, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the cooking in the linked cooking mode is automatically started.

As the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in step STR8 (operation step C), the first cooking process 1 uses the right heating unit 17HR, and the next cooking process 2 uses the microwave heating source 189. The process information such as the process is displayed on the process display section 332 . The contents and changes of these display screens will be described later in detail.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking is started at the time when the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the induction heating is not started immediately. Note that step MS4 shown in FIG. 39 follows from step STR9.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed since the operation of the input key 43MC and the state is still circulating between steps STR3 to STR7, the main power is automatically turned off, or the step You may make it return to ST4 (refer FIG. 67).

Next, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIG. 69 shows the judgment processing of steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG.
Step STX1 is the step of operating the input key 43MC.
The next step STX2 is a step in which the integrated control unit MC investigates the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above.

Next, step STX3 in FIG. 69 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. In this step STX3, the integrated control unit MC compares with the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2, and determines whether or not the permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied. .

In step STX3 of FIG. 69, notification 1 to notification 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the speech synthesizer 95. FIG.
In addition, display 1 to display 4 indicate the contents displayed in the integrated display section 30. FIG. Note that these displays 1 to 4 are not displayed in the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 (operation step B) in FIG. 68, but integrated displays in which the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is displayed in the section 30 . That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the premises (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode are satisfied.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
The control mode in FIG. 70 is for a (second) linked cooking mode different from the (first) linked cooking mode in FIG. 68 . There are two heating sources used in this cooperative cooking mode of FIG. It is part 17HL. 70 differs greatly from that of FIG. 68 in step STR11.

In the above-described "heat up" (automatic range) of the range grill cooking (compound cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. to automatically stop microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" here is 80° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70° C.), the temperature measuring unit 158 detects the high temperature early, and microwave heating is performed while the cooking is incomplete. There is a concern that the heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 70, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display section 31R and the left display section 31L indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time. display (STR12). Furthermore, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as well. Further, it is more certain if the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice. The left and right display portions 31L and 31R are displayed because the user has not selected any of the left and right heating portions 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, it is displayed on the right side display portion 31R and the left side display portion 31L. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 67 and 69, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not to shift to the cooperative cooking mode, but step STR11 in FIG. corresponds to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, it is possible to inform the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode.

At the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that cooking cannot be started because the temperature of heating chamber 113 is too high, the temperature of heating chamber 113 can be quickly lowered by opening door 114, which is beneficial to the user. Information may be transmitted together.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used during execution of the cooperative cooking mode regardless of cooperative cooking.
In Embodiment 1 of FIG. 71, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode is, as described with reference to FIG. The heating sources are microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 .

When the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode has already progressed to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating section 17HL to perform another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, it is determined that the usage does not exceed the total power regulation value of 5000 W, for example, in the same manner as the "permission condition 1" described above.

If the judgment of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and the maximum power amount when using the left heating unit 17HL and the heat sources (microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188) during cooperative cooking For example, the maximum thermal power value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the total value with the amount of power does not exceed the regulation value of the power control unit 72, and the limit value is notified to the user by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, even if the electric power used by the left heating unit 17HL (heat power for induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heat source in which the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed, the allowable total amount of electric power is exceeded. , disabling processing of the left heating unit 17HL is performed in step SH8. Specifically, the fact that the device cannot be used is displayed on the left display section 31L, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies it by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .

In the next step SH3, the user's input operation result is analyzed and it is determined whether or not it is a "permitted control menu" that does not correspond to a prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as a "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of power to be used (required for cooking). one is specified.
Both (automatic) frying and rice cooking adopt a control method that is assumed to use a large amount of power in the cooking process. There is concern that power supply to (the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) may be disrupted.

For the above reasons, it is determined in step SH3 whether or not the item corresponds to the "permission control menu". For example, a check is made to see if it is one of the allowed control menus, "Boil water".

In step SH3, if it is determined that the item does not correspond to the "permission control menu", the above-described non-permission processing is performed, and the inability to use is notified.

If the judgment of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the driving mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 values are determined. After that, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and induction heating cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is stopped immediately. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left display portion 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of cooking by voice (SH7).

At step SH8, if a change to a permitted condition (for example, lowering the thermal power) can be made, the change is made and notified.
Further, if there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL to be used cannot be permitted to be used, the non-permission is notified. Then, if the change processing is successful, the process returns to step SH2.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when additional heating is performed after finishing the heating of the first used heat source in the cooking process of one cooperative cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 72 is a case of cooking in which the microwave heating source 189, which is used second, is driven for a period of time set by the user (for example, 5 minutes) in the cooperative cooking mode.
For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 is omitted.

In Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 72, the heat source used in the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is the default right heating section 17HR as described with reference to FIG. The heating sources used in the subsequent cooking step 2 are microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 .

In FIG. 72, the user uses the microwave heating source 189 in order to perform the cooking process 2 in one cooperative cooking mode KM3 described in FIG.
After finishing the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next, the integrated controller MC receives the operation signal (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, driving of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating is the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heating power by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, which constitute the oven heating source 188, are started to be energized by the heating chamber controller 159. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is started at the same time as the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is started.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is simultaneously heated by microwaves and electric radiation heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has passed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is made for the user to decide whether or not the once-stopped microwave cooking is to be continued for a predetermined period of time or a period of time specified by the user. Specifically, on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Would you like to extend the heating time? If you want to extend the heating time, please press the time key."

The reason why such an extension is allowed is that if the user judges that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the food to be cooked, it can be quickly heated (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation heating) is resumed, and the food to be cooked is finished in a better state.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal has been received, and if the operation signal has been received, "Yes" is determined.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is set to be extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended by 3 minutes. You may set the program, such as 5 minutes for 2 consecutive presses. Also, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be immediately stopped by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within "retention time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 to terminate the operation of the final cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. do. Then, the fact is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the voice synthesizing device 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC stores the control conditions for operating the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 in chronological order in the storage device MM. Automatically memorize (at the time of this memorization, the end date and time of the cooking process are recorded at the same time).

After that, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the previously stored cooperative cooking mode and control conditions are called from the storage device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the next cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed. It has a reproduction function that is used to implement the It should be noted that all cooking histories (including information on the date and time of cooking execution) are called up not only for the previous linked cooking mode but also for several times in the past or for a certain period of time (for example, one month). A configuration in which the user selects the item may be used. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can make various settings regarding the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the oven heating source 189 also starts to be energized at the start of the RG cooking process, the integrated display section 30 displays whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. do not display information about However, if the sequence is to first operate the microwave heating source 189 and then operate the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in reverse order, the time extension of the microwave heating and the oven heating source The 188 time extensions may be separately configurable.

Next, FIGS. 73 and 74 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.

FIG. 73 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and particularly shows the steps of the support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or hesitates about the operation.

The steps in FIG. 73 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 (step SL1).

Identification information 330, 330A, and 330B for selecting a cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP as information of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 54) (step SL2).

At the next step SL3, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 68, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is sequentially moved upward or downward. The display changes in shape, and identification information 330 corresponding to another cooking object is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In FIG. 73, the step of selecting one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described in FIG. 54 is omitted.

At the next step SL4, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. That is, it returns to the state of the initial screen during standby.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SL5.
Next, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is operated among the input keys on the central operation unit 40M, step SL5 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, the "input key not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3" is, for example, the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Also, they are the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As explained in FIG. 56, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 43MC, the right heating section 17HR is occupied, so the input itself with the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation section 40R is invalid. . However, it is assumed that the user may not notice it.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is not correct. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is reported immediately. If the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and controlled by the integrated control unit MC so as not to detect whether or not the input keys of the right operation unit 40R are touched, erroneous operations of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, if the input itself from the input key 43R1 or the like is validated and the integrated control device MC does not regard it as a valid signal, an erroneous operation can be detected.

At step SL11, after notifying that the operation is incorrect, the process proceeds to step SL12.
At step 12, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation and the content of the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, the process returns to step SL3, and it is recommended to redo the operation.

At step SL5, if there is no erroneous input key operation, the determination at step SL5 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL6.

At step SL6, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If the operation is performed, the process proceeds to step SL13, and detailed information such as correct operation contents is displayed. In addition, at this stage, an overview of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

In the next step SL7, when it is determined that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8 for starting the cooking process 1 according to the cooperative operation program. In addition, before the cooking process 1, a preheating process for starting the preheating operation may be started. If the input key 43MS is not operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 74 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and particularly shows the steps of the support operation when the user makes a mistake in input operation or hesitates about the operation.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30. FIG.
Further, the second specific screen 30SP displays a control menu for cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 (see FIG. 49) (step SL21).

At the next step SL22, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been further operated.
As explained in FIGS. 49 to 53, by operating the pair of left and right input keys 43M1, specific sentences 30J indicating names (including abbreviations) of control menus that can be employed in the combined cooking mode KM2 are sequentially displayed upward. Alternatively, the display changes as it moves downward, and a specific sentence 30J of another control menu is displayed in the center of the first area 30L.

At step SL22, if the input key 43M1 is not operated, the display of the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "warm" defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

If the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step SL28.
At step SL28, as described above, the specific text 30J indicating the name (including the abbreviation) of another control menu that can be employed in the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL23. move on.

At the next step SL23, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control conditions such as the heating time information 30S displayed in the second area 30M can be changed to other control conditions (see FIG. 52).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 becomes "No" determination, and the process proceeds to step SL29. At step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

At the next step SL25, if an input key not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 is operated among the input keys on the central operation unit 40M, it is determined "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, the "input keys not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2" are, for example, the input keys 43KP and 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. Also, they are the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

At step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is reported immediately. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

At step SL31, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation and the content of the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, the process returns to step SL22, and it is recommended to redo the operation.

At step SL24, if there is no erroneous input key operation, the determination at step SL24 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL25.

At step SL25, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it is operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, and detailed information such as correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27 for starting the cooking process 1 according to the operation program of the composite cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation part in linked cooking mode)
Next, FIGS. 75 to 102 will be described.
These figures show the control operation of the input operation section 40 and the display section (the integrated display section 30 and the left side display section 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 75 is a plan view showing the control operation of the input operation section 40 and the display section (integrated display section 30/left display section 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the reference FG is the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 330B corresponds to the three cooking items "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef", respectively. These identification information 330, 330A, 330B are displayed simultaneously.

In FIG. 75 and the following FIG. 76, illustration of the process display section 332 is omitted in the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330 . In the examples of FIGS. 75 and 76, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

The individual light-emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS blinks as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG. 75, guiding the user to operate this input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source used first in the linked cooking mode is the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light emitting display portions 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG.

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered. At this time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is valid, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the left heating section 17HL performs cooking.

At the same time, the heating power display section 67L indicating the heating power level during induction cooking in the left heating section 17HL lights up (the number of lighting heating power display sections is determined by the default value).
Even if an operation to use the left heating unit 17HL individually (regardless of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is performed while the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, the left heating unit 17HL is controlled by the integrated controller MC as described above. When the operation is prohibited (occupied state), the light emitting display section 27L3 does not emit light as shown in FIG. Also, the heating power display section 67L is not lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if there is an operation to temporarily use the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the left heating unit 17HL can not be used is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 . For example, a display such as "The left IH cannot be used because cooperative cooking is in progress" or "The left IH and heating chamber cannot be used at present because cooperative cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above description, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is present in the left and right central portions on the top surface of the top plate 15, so the user's line of sight naturally goes to the center. get together. Selection of the cooperative cooking mode and guidance display until the start of cooking are also centrally performed on the integrated display section 30 in the central portion.

Furthermore, at the stage where the cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, is finished, an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source is also provided on the central operation unit 40M.
In other words, the main input operations such as selection of the cooperative cooking mode, start of the first cooking process 1, and start of the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the front left and right central portions (central operation portion 40M) of the heating cooker 1. can be done.

Next, FIG. 76 will be described.
FIG. 76 is a plan view showing the operations of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the three pieces of identification information 330, 330A and 330B included in the linked cooking menu are simultaneously displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 76(B). (Display screen 8A).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 76, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once more, the identification information 330 (named "hamburger") displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves backward, and instead The identification information 330B of "roast beef" displayed in front is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is displayed one by one in a certain order. is updated with

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 76B is switched to the display screen 8C every time the input key 43M1 is pressed.
Although only four cooperative cooking menus are shown in FIG. 76, there are a total of eight cooperative cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, FIG. 77 will be described.
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooperative cooking menus when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 77, the eight linked cooking menus are displayed (forward or backward) in the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 78 will be described.
FIG. 78 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display section when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
As shown in FIG. 78, there are several types of process display portions 332 at the stage immediately before starting the cooking process according to the cooking menu (eight types from hamburger steak to gratin).

As for the additional information 331, as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B, it is unified over the entire cooperative cooking mode. Note that the additional information A and the additional information B are alternately displayed at regular intervals (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the reason why the heating part of the induction heating source 9 to be used is displayed as "changeable" is that there are two heating parts, the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR.

FIG. 79 is a plan view showing the control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIGS.
The identification information 330 of three cooperative cooking modes is displayed on this 1st specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, identification information 330 of "hamburger" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in list form on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating section selection mark 334R or the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed. Allows the user to select one of

The example of FIG. 79 is a case where the default setting is made to recommend the left heating unit 17HL. As shown in FIG. 79, the left heating section selection mark 334L displayed with "LEFT" in white characters is always displayed in the initial first specific screen 30SP.

Either one of the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. For example, if the left input key 43M2 is pressed, the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG. 79, the character changes to white to indicate that it has been selected.
Conversely, by pressing the right input key 43M2 in the state of FIG. 79, the right heating section selection mark 334L can be selected.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 54) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 59), the right heating section 17HR starts executing the linked cooking mode. Therefore, it will be occupied. Therefore, the right heating unit 17HR (the integrated control device MC) does not accept settings for other control menus.

Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then induction heating starts automatically. The operation of pressing the input key 44L is omitted, and induction heating is automatically started in the left heating unit 17HL after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed. You can
When the heating operation in the left heating section 17HL is started as described above, the dedicated state of the right heating section 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the single cooking mode with the right operation section 40R can be started immediately.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. Since it can be changed, at the time of selecting the left heating section selection mark 334L, as described above, the exclusive state of the right heating section 17HR is not released.

The above-mentioned ``appropriate temperature of 180°C'' means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N such as a metal pot or a frying pan, which is a container in which the object to be cooked, ie, hamburger steak, is placed is 180°C. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heating power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated N becomes 180° C. by the functions of the inverter circuit 81L, the temperature detection circuit 93, and the like.

As the preheating temperature rises, the heating power display section 67L for indicating the heating power level during induction heating cooking does not display the heating power level, but indicates the degree of increase of the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching (approaching) the target preheating temperature. degree).

In FIG. 79, the dashed circle in the thermal power display section 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. . That is, the state of temperature rise can be known from the light emission state of the thermal power display section 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG.

The additional information 331 displays, as shown in FIG. 79, "We will notify you when the set temperature is reached."
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in a belt-like character so as to cross the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30 horizontally.

As can be seen from the display section 332 of the cooking process in FIG. 79, when the hamburger is to be cooked together, the preheating process is first started by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking process 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG Cooking step 2 for heating) is started.

As shown in FIG. 79, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are placed in front of the right front of the integrated display section 30, in other words, the central operation section 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS until the moment the cooperative cooking mode is started. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight moves toward the left heating unit 17HL as indicated by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating unit 17HL, the user's line of sight moves leftward.

After starting the cooperative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body move from the center to the left, as indicated by the large horizontal arrow in FIG. However, this movement to the left is not large and does not impose a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the linked cooking mode is selected, and shows changes in preheating temperature in chronological order.

FIG. 80(A) shows the portion of the thermal power display section 67L on the left side. In FIG. 80(A), the dashed circle indicates the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180° C., from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process, as shown in FIG. The leftmost light emitter is blinking as indicated by the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-described "blinking portion" moves to the right in sequence. And when the preheat temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(B), at the beginning of the induction heating cooking process, operating either of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L sets the target value of the preheating temperature. can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed. Conversely, each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed, the preheating temperature can be increased by one step. In this way, the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left side display section 31L each time as shown in FIG. 75C, so that the user can easily confirm the contents of the display.

Next, FIG. 81 will be described.
FIG. 81 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.

When the object to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL reaches the set preheating temperature, the heating power display section 67L stops blinking as shown in FIG.
When heated to the preheating temperature in this manner, the integrated display unit 30 displays "preheating completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the display contents of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 change. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" of the next cooking process 1 is displayed in white letters.
From this information, users can easily understand that the stage has come to implement induction heating in earnest. In other words, it can be seen that the object to be heated, such as a frying pan placed on the left heating unit 17HL, has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

A pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L has a function of designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when the preheating process is shifted to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched, the heat power value data table is raised by one step. You can select a specific firepower that is one step down. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 82(A), when the preheating process is finished, the integrated display unit 30 displays to the user that the cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L.

The switching of the display between (A) and (B) in FIG. 82 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. After the full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 is started, only the display of FIG. 82(C) is displayed. Firepower at this point is shown to be "slightly weak". Furthermore, it is indicated that this heating power level can be adjusted by the user (30V information indicating microwave power level). The control condition (microwave output) indicated by this information 30V may be referred to as "control condition B".

In FIG. 82, the central portion of the second area 30M where the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard" may be referred to as "display position D" in the following description. This "display position D" is right beside the "display position B" described above. In other words, "display position B" and "display position D" have a corresponding positional relationship. In addition, the control condition (level of microwave thermal power) is displayed in the "display position D" as described above.

Next, FIG. 83 is a plan view showing display contents of the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. The content displayed in FIG. The display contents shown in FIG. 82(B) may be changed as shown in FIG.

FIG. 83 shows a stage in which induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting section 27M6 is in a blinking state as indicated by the dashed circle.

In the states of FIGS. 82 and 83, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display section 30 cannot display the control menu of the composite cooking mode including "manual range" and "automatic range". To cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, even if the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed, the cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL to be used first can only be finished, and the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3 is not completely canceled (cancelled). .

Next, FIG. 84 will be described.
FIG. 84 shows a scene in which the user terminates the induction heating cooking process 1 by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power indicator 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 indicates that the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking) has progressed. indicate. Specifically, from the white display of IH heating, white letters indicate that the stage of RG cooking, which is the final cooking process 2, has progressed.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined is now being performed.

A command to start the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS is in a blinking state, as indicated by the dashed circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. .

On the other hand, since the stage of FIG. 84 is after the user has finished the induction heating cooking process 1 by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L, the left heating section 17HL is no longer occupied. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be started for cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, another cooking menu can be started with the induction heating source 189 by inputting with the left operation section 17HL. However, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not been canceled yet, another cooking using the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2) cannot be performed. Only the exclusive use of the left heating unit 17HL is released.

Next, FIG. 85 will be described.
FIG. 85 shows that when the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking). Although "RG" is displayed, it does not mean that the combined cooking mode KM2 is implemented.

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display section 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating the microwave output level" described in FIG. Therefore, the user can select the output level of microwave heating by operating the pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, FIG. 86 will be described.
FIG. 86 shows that, similar to FIG. 85, when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the cooking process 2 stage.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 86, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 30M. Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity of the microwave according to the finished state of the food to be cooked.

In the final cooking process 2 described with reference to FIG. 86, the user's operations and line of sight concentrate on the range of the integrated display section 30 and the central operation section 40M. Therefore, the user can concentrate on completing the cooking process 2 while standing in the front center of the cooking device 1 .

In the middle of the cooking process 2, when the user wants to take out the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 from the heating chamber 113 and directly check it, the user can open the door 114 at an arbitrary timing.
When the door 114 is opened, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the transmission of microwaves, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

When the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantaneously started again. When the door 114 is opened during the cooking process 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 continue to operate.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described.
FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking process 2 in FIG. 86 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily terminates the final cooking process (cooking process 2), the user operates the input key 43MT. Pressing this cancels the series of control sequences in the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after temporarily stopping the heating, it is necessary to select the heating source on the central operation unit 40M and then press the input key 43MS again. .

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is completed, if the input key 43MS is pressed again within a certain period of time, the microwave heating is instantaneously resumed so that additional heating can be easily performed. to start.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), the first specific screen 30SP is a display screen so that the user can know the timing of ending the RG cooking process, which is the final process of cooking with heat (cooking process 2). After 10A, the content changes to that displayed on the display screen 10B. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking process 2 will soon end.

On this display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, the load of the food to be cooked is determined, and the integrated control unit MC determines the arrival time until completion. Perform a process to predict and display the result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict when the cooking will be finished, the user may set a timer in advance so that the cooking process 2 is finished by time control. In this case, the load determination as described above is unnecessary.

As described above, when the user sets the timer in advance and finishes the cooking process 2 by time control, the reference information 2 can be notified (FA2) as described with reference to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 87B, the first specific screen 30SP changes to display the display screen 10B after the display screen 10A, and matches the reference information 2 as part of the notification (FA2). is displayed.

The display screen 10C in (B) of FIG. 87 indicates that heating will be performed again within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds. However, if the door 114 is opened, 15 seconds from that time) immediately after the cooking process 2 is finished. This is an example showing that it can be started.
The "time button" referred to in this display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has reached a high temperature due to the cooking just before this, additional information 331 such as "Caution for grill high temperature" is displayed to enhance the user's safety.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, details of changes in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 during the period until the shift to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 60 is started will be described in detail.

88 to 90 show the correspondence relationship between the contents of displays E1 to E5 described in item E "central display section" and the input operation section in explanatory drawing 1 showing the relationship between the various processes and operations described in FIG. is shown.

The state of FIG. 88 shows the stage of "E1: initial screen of cooperative cooking", which is the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the central operation unit 40M. It shows the relationship with
FIG. 89A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: change menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the step of operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from among the cooperative cooking modes, and selecting the corresponding cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 89B shows the stage of "E3: Change selected heating source (select right IH)". It shows a step in which the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 90A shows the stage of "E4: right IH input button pressing guidance display". This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays that the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation unit 40R must be operated in order to start cooperative cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 90B shows the stage of "E5: IH preheat display". At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress", "preheating completed", and "Notice that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 91 to 97 show the relationship between various processes and operations for cooking the "hamburger" (coordinated cooking mode) explained in FIG. It shows the correspondence between the contents of E17 and the input operation section.

FIG. 91A shows the stage of "E11: IH preheating display" described in item E (central display portion) of FIG. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that the set temperature will be reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 91(B) is the stage of "E12: IH heating display" also described in FIG. At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready for heating. In other words, it indicates that it is the stage of proceeding to the step of induction heating (IH heating).

The stage in FIG. 92 shows the display contents after a certain period of time (for example, one minute) after the display in FIG. 91 is displayed. This display of FIG. 92 is not described in item E of FIG.

The stage of FIG. 92 indicates that the user needs to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L in order to finish the cooking process 1 by the induction heating source 9 currently being executed.

Next, FIG. 93 shows the stage of "E13: grill door opening/closing operation guidance display" described in FIG. At this stage, the induction heating (cooking step 1) has been completed, so the additional information 331 prompts to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (to perform the cooking step 2).

Next, FIGS. 94A to 94C show the stage of "E14: alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display" explained in FIG. At this stage, it is displayed that the heat power in the range grill cooking (compound cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, it is displayed that the grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS). are doing.

In FIG. 94(C), the input key 43MS is in a flashing state as indicated by a dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for user's operation. Note that the displays of FIGS. 94A and 94B are alternately performed, for example, every five seconds.

Next, FIGS. 95A to 95C show the stage of "E15: grill heating display" explained in FIG. Here, the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 2).

FIG. 95(A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 95(B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to perform combined heating. FIG. 95(C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

Next, FIGS. 96A and 96B show the stage of "E16: alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" described in FIG. Here, since the RG heating process has ended, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again.

It is displayed that if the user does not desire the extended heating, the cooperative cooking mode can be ended without extended heating by pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT). Note that the first specific screens 30SP having the contents of FIGS. 96A and 96B are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next FIG. 97 is the stage of "E17: display of time setting". Here, when the input key 43M2 is used to extend the cooking time and cooking is performed again inside the heating chamber 113, the result of setting the extended time is displayed. After this time setting display, "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 98 to 102 will be described.
98 to 102 show the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooking of "fried chicken" (cooperative cooking mode) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 explained in FIG. The contents of the displays E21 to E26 described above and the state of the input operation section are shown.

FIG. 98A shows the stage of "E21: IH preheat display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation. In other words, induction heating has already started for the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL.
FIG. 98B shows the stage of "E22: grill door open/close operation guidance display". Here, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is urged to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 62).

Next, FIGS. 99A to 99C show the stage of "E23: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "microwave grill driving section", it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 99A and 99B are alternately performed, for example, every 5 seconds.
If the door 114 remains open, the display of FIG. 99(C) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 100A and 100B are the stage of "E24: Microwave heating display".
Fig. 100(A) displays that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven.
FIG. 100(B) shows the contents displayed after the cooking starts, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until the cooking ends. This stage is the stage where the cooking process 1 is started.

Next, FIGS. 101(A) and 101(B) are the stage of "E25: alternate display of extension operation guidance display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking step B24 (see FIG. 62), which is performed by driving the "range grill drive unit", is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the heat cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 101(A) and the display screen of FIG. 101(B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP at, for example, intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 102 shows the stage of "E26: display of time setting". Here, it is displayed that the cooking step B24 is further extended to, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "range grill (RG)" heating is completed at the stage of FIG. 102, then the cooking process 2 can proceed to the left heating section 17HL, which has already been preheated.

(Operation management system for home appliances)
Next, FIGS. 103 to 112 will be described. 103 to 112 relate to an operation management system for the heating cooker 1 and home electric appliances, which is the subject of the present disclosure.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the heat cooker 1 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 103 shows the control operation on the heating cooker 1 side. FIG. 104 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information among three parties, the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the heating cooker 1, in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 105 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the transfer of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the heating cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG.
FIG. 106 is a plan view showing display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 immediately after startup in the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section immediately after startup in the heating cooker 1. FIG.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 immediately after activation. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in FIG. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing exchange of information with the refrigerator 401 when the cooker 1 performs the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 103 will be described.
The operation steps shown in FIG. 103 are defined in the control program for executing the cooperative cooking mode of integrated control device MC.
An inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent before this first step SD1. That is, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the stage of step ST2 in FIG.

The operation steps shown in FIG. 103 are after the user's operation (A23) shown in FIG. In step SD1, when the cooking process 1 is started by selecting, for example, "fried chicken" as the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, the heating of the ingredients is started by microwaves.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in FIG. At this stage, as shown in notification F24 in FIG. 62, a voice notification saying "Range and finish standardization will begin" is issued.

Next, measurement of elapsed time TN3 from the time of step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG.

In the next step SD3, the content of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that has been started is collated. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, and the integrated control device MC can check that the cooking of "fried chicken" is being executed.
At this point, it is also known that the heating chamber 113 is used in the cooking step 1 for cooking the fried chicken. In other words, it can be seen that the heating chamber 113 is not used after the cooking process 1 is finished.

It should be noted that step SD3 may be omitted and a dedicated program may be prepared for each linked cooking mode (for example, fried chicken, hamburger steak, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not it is in a specific cooperative cooking mode. This "specific cooperative cooking mode" is, for example, as follows.
(1) Foods such as fried chicken, hamburgers, and dumplings, which can generally be classified as side dishes.
(2) Items to be cooked in individual cooperative cooking modes (eg, hamburger) and items that are usually eaten together (eg, soup, French fries).

If "No" at step SD4, the operation of FIG. 103 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether the cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113 or not. If "No" at step SD5, the operation of FIG. 103 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SD6. At step SD6, an inquiry signal RQ3 (see FIG. 104) is issued to home gateway 411 in order to inquire about the inventory information of the foodstuffs stored in refrigerator 401. FIG.

At the time when the main power switch 97 of the heating cooker 1 is turned on, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the heating cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG.
In this first embodiment, the conditions are further narrowed down, and the stock inquiry signal RQ3 is sent at the stage when it is found that the stock information is highly likely to be required (step SD6 in FIG. 103).

In the next step SD7, stock information of ingredients is acquired from the home gateway 411. FIG. Then, the integrated control device MC temporarily stores it in the storage device MM.

In the next step SD8, the received food inventory information is analyzed.
In this step SD8, the presence or absence of ingredients highly relevant to the cooking (in this case, fried chicken) being executed in the cooperative cooking mode is searched. The “relevance” here refers to a food ingredient (for example, frozen vegetables) that is often eaten together with a side dish such as fried chicken, or rice as a staple food. Therefore, in this step SD8, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted, and the following description will be made.

If the determination at step SD7 is "No", the process of FIG. 103 is terminated and the user is not informed of anything.

At the next step SD9, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed.
Then, in the next step SD10, it is notified that the cooking process 1 will soon end. Note that this notification is not shown in FIG. Also, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after completion of the cooking process 1, another cooking menu that makes effective use of the heating chamber 113 that is no longer used for cooking fried chicken is announced.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether or not the user has performed an operation to stop the cooking process 1. In this step SD12, if the user performs a stop operation, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, the end of the cooking process 1 is notified (F25: see FIG. 62).
Then, when the user takes out the object to be cooked (food for fried chicken) from the heating chamber 113 and places it in the object to be heated (such as a frying pan) N that has already been preheated to a high temperature, the cooking process 2 is performed. begin. At this stage, the cooking oil put into the object to be heated N is already at a high temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, the user can know the recommended cooking menu at step SD8 before the cooking process 1 ends.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from the refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to perform another cooking before the cooking process 2. can.

As described above, for the fried chicken cooperative cooking mode, the rice that is the staple food can be thawed and warmed cooking can be prepared at the same time. time can be shortened. As a result, user convenience can be improved.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has finished the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is used within a short time after the cooking process 1 is finished, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 may be high.
As described above, in the "heating" (range automatic) control menu using microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the target temperature is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when high heat remains in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits the automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, if the heating chamber 113 that has finished the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is to be used after that, the control menu (single heating cooking) of "range manual" should be selected. In other words, the user can set the microwave heating time.

As described with reference to FIG. 57, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, but the cooking process 1 is finished. The processing (by the integrated control unit MC) of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 is not performed until after the stage. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Furthermore, even if the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking is finished in the heating chamber 113, if a control method is adopted in which the exclusive state of the heating chamber 113 is continued until after that (after the cooking process 2), Only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8, the control program may exceptionally cancel the occupied state of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

Next, FIGS. 104 and 105 will be described.
FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 are diagrams explaining, in chronological order, the exchange of information with the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power supply of the heating cooker 1 is turned on.
With reference to FIG. 104, the following description assumes that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time they are installed in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in the "home mode" (step SE1 in FIG. 104). "Home mode" refers to a driving pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are out, it switches to "answering mode".

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the heating cooker 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 103). Heat cooking is started according to the user's input operation.

In the heat cooker 1, as described with reference to FIG. 103, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the start of the cooking process 1 (step SD1). . This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives detection information from the human detection unit 413H that detects the presence and movement of people in the kitchen KT, so it determines that it is a cooking scene, and mutually cooperates with the heating cooker 1. Switch to operation (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401 .
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from the communication section 446 of the home gateway 411 to the wireless communication section (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. FIG. Transmission and reception of other signals are also performed by wireless communication between communication unit 446 and a communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401 .

Refrigerator 401 retrieves the inventory of food stored in refrigerating compartment 401B and a plurality of freezing compartments 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own storage unit (step: SE4). The food stored in the refrigerator has various forms, such as partially processed food at home and bagged food purchased outside. Many proposals have already been made for methods of identifying and retrieving such inventory information, and the use of images taken with cameras, the use of RF tags, two-dimensional codes, and the like are known.

In addition, a method of manually inputting data such as the name of food and its attributes when putting food into the refrigerator 401, or a method of optically or magnetically automatically reading information such as food and accumulating inventory information, etc. Various methods have been proposed.
In Embodiment 1, any method may be used because there is no restriction on the identification of the food when the food is placed in the refrigerator 401 or after the food is stored.

Refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as reply signal RS1.
Home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data sent by reply signal RS1 in storage device 450 (SE5). Here, "temporarily" means a period from when the data of the inventory information is sent again from the refrigerator 401 until it is received, and does not mean that the storage is continued over a long period of time. The latest stock data in the storage device 450 is always overwritten and saved.

In the heat cooker 1, as explained in FIG. 103, when the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 103). RQ3 is sent (SE6).

In the home gateway 411, the latest inventory data stored in the storage device 450 is transmitted from the communication section 446 to the wireless communication section 49 of the heating cooker 1 as an inventory data signal RS2.

In the cooking device 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the storage device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of FIG. 103, the integrated control device MC selects another cooking menu (ingredients and dishes) directly related to the one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode being executed from the stock data. name, etc.) is notified (SE8).
In the example of FIG. 103, only "fried chicken" was described as the cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, but as shown in FIG. But it's okay.

Next, FIG. 105 will be described.
FIG. 105 is a diagram explaining the operations after step SE8 in FIG.
When all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (SE9), the heat cooker 1 sends main data indicating the content of the cooperative cooking (hereinafter referred to as "cooking execution data") to the home gateway 411. is transmitted as signal BS1.

Here, "cooking implementation data" refers to at least one of the following information.
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the name of the food to be cooked (including abbreviations) such as "fried chicken" and "stir-fried vegetables".
(2) Information about the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (for example, microwave output 500 W, thermal power 1500 W during induction heating, or "medium heat") (4) Information indicating the time required from the cooking process 1 to the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process) (6) All the time from the start of the preheating process Information indicating the time required until the end of the cooking process 2 (7) Information identifying the heating source (for example, the left heating unit 17HL) that performed the heat cooking operation (8) Information regarding restrictions imposed on the user during the next heat cooking ( Example: The heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature, so range (automatic) heating cannot be performed.)
(9) Information related to user safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food to be cooked" is information such as "fried chicken: 300 g", for example. This can be estimated by the integrated controller MC from the temperature rise rate of the food (deep-fried chicken) in the cooking process 1 .

The “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for home gateway 411 and refrigerator 401 .
Also, the “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for the alarm device 445 as well.

For example, among the "cooking execution data", "(4) information indicating the time required to finish the cooking process 2", "(5) information indicating the end time", and "(6) completion of all the cooking process 2 "Information indicating the time required to reach" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411 . By accumulating these data, it is possible to estimate the time zone during which cooking is concentrated in the kitchen KT.

Furthermore, among the "cooking execution data", "(9) information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440 as well. This is because the "deviation" between the current temperature on the heating cooker 1 side and the estimated temperature optically measured by the temperature monitoring device 440 side can be known.

The “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for the refrigerator 401 . For example, since the "cooking implementation data" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate the time zone during which cooking is concentrated, the timing at which food will be stored in the refrigerator 401 after that can be assumed.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information representing the state of the external environment from an external electrical device (for example, an air conditioner or a cooking appliance) and controls the operating state of each part such as a cooling device is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019. -211153, etc. However, in the conventional proposals, the environment information provided from the heating cooker 1 side is often ambiguous, and is not necessarily useful from the refrigerator side. On the other hand, the "cooking implementation data" of the first embodiment is suitable for specific control menus and has a high utility value.

The home gateway 411 converts the "cooking data" sent by the sending signal BS1 to the refrigerator 401 as a signal BS2 including the "cooking data". The contents of the "cooking implementation data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS1 and the "cooking implementation data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS2 may be basically the same, but may be different. The "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 includes information useful for the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445. It may be transmitted to the refrigerator 401 after being deleted.

Refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data", and collects and analyzes data useful for the operation of refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, in refrigerator 401, the operating conditions of refrigerator 401 are changed based on the analysis result of the "cooking execution data" (SE12).

Central control unit 447 of home gateway 411 stores the “cooking implementation data” in storage device 450 . Also, the “cooking history data” of the schedule management unit 451 is updated. As a result, the execution date and time, time zone, cooking menu (for example, cooking name “fried chicken”), and other related information (for example, estimated fried chicken “300 g”) of this one heat cooking (cooperative cooking) are recorded.

Further, the schedule management unit 451 recommends specific ingredients such as "frozen rice" and cooking menus from the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 in the recorded "cooking history data". (See step SD8 in FIG. 103), the recommended facts may be included. When the actual state of daily cooking is accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 using artificial intelligence or the like improves the ability of "learning and prediction", so the value of providing information to the user gradually increases. improves.

After finishing all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heating cooker 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
After that, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end notice signal BS3, it terminates the "mutual cooperation operation mode". Further, the alarm device 445 is switched to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). Thereby, regardless of whether or not the user is in the kitchen KT, the temperature change inside the kitchen KT is monitored.

(Inventory information display example 1)
FIG. 106 is an enlarged plan view showing the peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
This FIG. 106 shows the scene of step SD11 in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 106 is the stage of executing "fried chicken" which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode.
While the cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113, the integrated display section 30 displays that there is "frozen rice" as inventory information. Note that the voice synthesizing device 95 also informs by voice in the same manner.

If the input key 43MT is pressed in the state of FIG. 106, the microwave heating cooking in the cooking process 1 is stopped. The setting of the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is taken out from the heating chamber 113, and the food to be cooked is placed on the food N to be heated placed on the left heating unit 17HL, from that point onwards (cooking step 2) ) induction cooking can be started. As shown in the integrated display section 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is pressed at the initial preheating start stage as described with reference to FIG. 62 (see operation A21 in FIG. 61). Therefore, there is no need to newly operate the left operation unit 40L.

(Inventory information display example 2)
107 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display section 30 of the cooking device 1. FIG.
This FIG. 107 is an example in which the display contents of the integrated display section 30 of FIG. 106 are changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 displays time saving information 333 meaning that the time can be reduced, and recommended cooking information 338 "warming up".

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display "You can heat/defrost in the heating chamber." In other words, it indicates that the heating chamber 113 can be used for “warming” and “thawing”.

In FIG. 107(A), symbols 335U and 335D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if one of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to these symbols is pressed, the following information is displayed. Information is displayed.

Another example shown in FIG. 107B displays refrigerator information 334 in characters in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 .
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display two types of individual ingredient information 339, "frozen rice" and "oden". ing. In other words, the user is informed that the refrigerator 401 has “frozen rice” and “oden” as ingredients.

The individual ingredient information is information specifying one food item. The “ingredient information” of the refrigerator 401 means an aggregate of the individual ingredient information 339 .

The display of FIGS. 107A and 107B may be performed alternately every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In any case, the user can understand that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 during the cooking process 1 by using the food information stored in the refrigerator 401 .

FIG. 108 is an enlarged plan view showing transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30. FIG.
This FIG. 108 is an example in which the display contents of FIG. 46 are improved.

In FIG. 108, the display screen 1, the display screen 2A and the display screen 2B are the same as those explained in FIG. 46, so the explanation is omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. This display screen 2C prompts the user to perform an input operation by a recommendation sentence 30R1 to select a heating source.

Next, FIG. 109 is an enlarged plan view showing transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG.
This FIG. 109 is still another example in which the display contents of FIG. 46 are improved.
In FIG. 109, the display screen 2D is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

The display screen 2C of FIG. 109 informs the user that the cooker 1 is automatically confirming the food information in the refrigerator 401 . In other words, it notifies that the stock information acquisition operation is being executed.

It has been explained that the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted in step ST2 shown in FIG.
The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D in FIG.

Next, FIG. 110 is an enlarged plan view showing transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG.
After the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 110, the display screen 2E informs the user that the ingredient information has been acquired. Furthermore, immediately after that, the display screen 2E notifies that there are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "dumplings" as specific ingredients. Note that the heating source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in FIG. 38) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of home gateway operation)
FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway.
The home gateway determines whether or not the schedule management unit 451 has entered the "cooking time period" while the alarm device 445 is operating in the "home mode" as described with reference to FIG.

The resident may manually input the “cooking time period” using the input unit 449 . For example, on weekdays, 6:30 am to 7:30 am may be set as the cooking time zone.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operation time zone of the heating cooker 1 in the past, for example, 30 days, and the average time zone is "from 6:20 am to 7:30 am". I have determined that there is.

In the above situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the cooking time period.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, it means that it is in the average time zone (6:20 to 7:30 am) as described above, so "Yes" is answered. Then, the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human sensors 452 and 453 of the human detector 413H have detected a person.
For example, when a resident moves in the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1 or stops in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1, such human movement is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to next step SF3.
In step SF3, whether or not the door (not shown) of refrigerator 401 has been opened is determined based on the operation information from refrigerator 401 side. When it is sensed that the door has been opened and then closed (SF4), the latest status of food stored in refrigerator 401 is checked in the next step SF5.

Confirmation of inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described in FIG.

Refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as reply signal RS1, as described with reference to FIG.
Therefore, the main control section 447 of the home gateway 411 compares the collected latest inventory information data with the inventory information data sent from the refrigerator 401 last time. exit.

In step SF6, if there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with new data (SF7).

Then, preparation is made for the arrival of the stock inquiry signal RQ1 from the heating cooker 1.例文帳に追加
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 before the main power switch 97 of the heat cooker 1 is turned on, and promptly receives an inquiry from the heat cooker 1. It operates in such a way that it can provide inventory information.

It seems that it takes a certain amount of time to investigate the inventory of food stored in the refrigerator 401 in detail, and when the door of the refrigerator 401 is left open, the light from the outside lighting becomes disturbance light. There is also a concern that it will become an obstacle to optical detection, image analysis, and the like. Under such circumstances, the inventory information is quickly acquired immediately after the door of the refrigerator 401 is closed.

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the return signal RS1 for inventory data collection described with reference to FIG. In other words, the system is such that the heating cooker 1 can acquire the latest inventory information.

(Display of individual ingredient information during heating pause period)
FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing another operation program for acquiring the individual foodstuff information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the cooperative cooking mode of the heat cooker 1. FIG.

In the operation program of FIG. 103, the inventory information is automatically obtained in the middle of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113, and the recommended cooking menu is notified.
On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 112 notifies that another cooking can be performed in the "heating pause period" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the linked cooking mode, and It is designed to let you know.
Therefore, the operation by the operation program of FIG. 103 and the notification method by the operation program shown in FIG. 112 do not contradict each other. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (used together).

The heating cooker 1 described up to FIG. 103 is
(1) Operating the induction heating source 9 (IH) single cooking mode KM1
(2) Single cooking mode KM1 for operating the microwave heating source 189 (microwave)
(3) Operating the oven heat source 188 (oven) single cooking mode KM1
(4) both or one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source through a transition period TR in which the start and end timings are determined depending on the user's input operation, Linked cooking mode KM3 that operates sequentially
is executed according to the user's input operation.

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR,
In the middle of the cooking process 1, after the first cooking process ends, the integrated control device MC controls at least the cooking menu executable in the heating chamber 113 and the individual ingredients information of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu. The configuration is characterized in that any one of them is notified by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 112, after the cooking process 1 is finished, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 (the above-mentioned (Concurrently with the cooking process 2) can be notified, and the notification can be made according to the user's instruction.

In FIG. 112, step SG1 is the step of selecting the cooperative cooking mode and selecting the cooking menu desired by the user (for example, "fried chicken") from the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, it is determined whether or not the cooking process 1 of the selected cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed in the heating chamber 113, as in step SD5 of FIG.
If this step SG2 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, the home gateway 411 is inquired about inventory information. In this step SG3, among the inventory information, especially the information on frozen food and reheated food is obtained. Note that FIG. 112 omits the step of stock information reception and temporary storage such as step SD7 in FIG. 103, but the operation program in FIG. 112 also performs similar processing.

In the next step SG4, it is determined whether or not the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber 113 has ended.

If the cooking process 1 has ended at the stage of step SG4, the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIG. 57) starts from that point. In other words, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking is suspended, and it is at the stage of waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2 from the user.

In such a transition period TR, in step SG5, it is determined whether or not another heat cooking can be performed. This is a process corresponding to step SD8 in FIG.

If step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, and the integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesizer 95 notify that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113. FIG. If the determination result of step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

At subsequent step SG6, if a specific input key of the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 20) is operated, it is determined "Yes".

In step SG7, one or a plurality of other cooking menus (for example, "heating gyoza") that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 are displayed. The place to be displayed may be the integrated display section 30 displaying the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8 to wait for a start command of the cooking process 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view showing the peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 114 is also an enlarged plan view showing peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG. FIG. 115 is also an enlarged plan view showing peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 113 shows a display example of the integrated display section 30 in the scene of step SG6 in FIG. As is clear from FIG. 113, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see FIG. 21) of the integrated display section 30 are combined into one to form a horizontally elongated display area.

In FIG. 113, 338 is recommended information indicating in characters that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and 337 is the operation of the input key 43M2 for displaying the suggested contents of the cooking menu of the recommended information. It is a display guidance part explaining.

In the state shown in FIG. 113, the individual light-emitting portion 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 blinks as indicated by the dotted circle to prompt the user to perform an input operation. If one of the (two) input keys 43M2 is pressed in this state, the individual ingredient information 339 such as specific recommended cooking (for example, "frozen rice") can be displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. can.

In FIG. 113, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the display screen is switched to that of FIG. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 113 changes to the contents of this FIG.
In FIG. 114, 339 is individual ingredient information that indicates in characters another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 .

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the weights and freezing temperatures of refrigerated “dumplings” and frozen “rice” are displayed. In other words, the individual ingredient information also includes information on the name, weight, and refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.) of one ingredient. Note that related information such as expiration date information and storage start time (date) in the refrigerator 401 may be included.

Next, FIG. 115 shows display contents that are automatically switched after a few seconds have passed while the display contents shown in FIG. 113 remain unchanged. In other words, when several seconds elapse without pressing the input key 43M2 after the state shown in FIG. 113, the display screen is switched to that shown in FIG. Further, after several seconds have passed in the state of FIG. 115, the display automatically returns to that of FIG.

As is clear from FIGS. 113 to 115, in the middle of the cooking process 1, after the first cooking process ends, the integrated control device MC controls the cooking menu executable in the heating chamber 113 and the cooking menu. At least one of the stock information of the refrigerator related to the menu is notified by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 during the transition period TR (“heating pause period P3” in FIG. 57) after the cooking process 1 is finished. It is possible to notify that it can be executed (simultaneously with the cooking step 2), and to notify the information of ingredients used for "another cooking" according to the user's command.
For this reason, for example, one cooking A (eg, fried chicken) in the cooperative cooking mode enters the stage of cooking process 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, and in the heating chamber 113, the cooking A separate cooking B (from thawing to warming of frozen rice) can be performed simultaneously. In other words, when eating cooking A and cooking B in one meal, the cooking can be done in parallel instead of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A. As a result, the overall cooking time can be shortened, improving the user's convenience.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
i.e.
an induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 serving as input means,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically advance the cooking process;
A cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
In the single cooking mode KM1, the heating operation is started by determining the control pattern of the first heating means HM1 (for example, "boiling water", "boiling"),
In the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating operation is started by determining the heating source to be used and the control pattern (for example, "range grill") in the second heating means HM2,
In the linked cooking mode KM3, the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger", "fried chicken") is determined and the heating operation is started.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, each cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed using two or more heating means. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the input operation unit 40 includes input keys (43L1, 43R1, etc.) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 and input keys (43M1, etc.) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2. ) and an input key (43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, respectively.

With this configuration, three cooking modes can be selected by the respective input keys (input means), so that the operability of the user can be improved even with the heating cooker 1 having an increased number of heating sources. can be done.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN uses the first heating means HM1. and the order of the cooking process using the second heating means HM2, and the identification information 330 indicating the food to be cooked. had disclosed.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which a plurality of heating means are used in combination, confirmation and input operation of necessary information can be performed using the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, even with the heating cooker 1 having an increased number of heating means, the operability for the user can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN displays discloses a configuration for displaying a dedicated display screen (second specific screen 30SC) displaying the heat sources (microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188) to be used.

Because of this configuration, in the composite cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating means are used in combination, confirmation and input operation of necessary information can be performed using the second specific screen 30SC. As a result, even with the heating cooker 1 having an increased number of heating means, the operability for the user can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN displays the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9), information indicating one type of control pattern (for example, “warm”, “preheat”, “water boiler”, etc.) and standard control conditions applicable to the control pattern (default set value: for example, heat 80° C., preheating 180° C., etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 48).

With this configuration, the control pattern and control conditions in the single cooking mode KM1 can be confirmed on the third specific screen 30ST. As a result, user operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the first specific screen 30SP displays standard control conditions (default setting values) applicable to the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") in the linked cooking mode. For example, a configuration has been disclosed in which the thermal power is displayed as "standard" (see FIG. 95, etc.).

With this configuration, the control conditions for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, user operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the second specific screen 30SC displays the heat sources used in the second heating means HM2 (the microwave heat source 189 and the oven heat source 188). ) is disclosed (see FIGS. 49 to 52, etc.).

With this configuration, the control conditions during cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 can be confirmed on the second specific screen 30SC. As a result, user operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the first heating means HM1 has disclosed the configuration provided with the induction heating source 9 provided with the IH coils 17L and 17R.

With this configuration, it is possible to heat and cook on the top plate 15 .
Thereby, convenience can be improved.
If a combustor equipped with a gas burner is installed instead of the induction heating source 9, the gas burner can be used to perform the heating operation in the single cooking mode on the top plate 15, and the same effect can be expected.

A configuration including a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 that heats the food by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189 as the heating sources that constitute the second heating means HM2. was disclosed.

With this configuration, even if the same heating chamber 113 is used for heat cooking, the heating principles are different, so a suitable heating method can be adopted for various types of food to be cooked. As a result, it is possible to provide the highly convenient heating cooker 1 that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the second disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a heating chamber 113;
display means (integrated display section 30, left display section 31L and right display section 31R);
outside the heating chamber 113, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2. has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the process,
When the main power supply is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z ) is displayed,
(1) When the first command (selection command by the input key 43MC: see FIG. 35) is received, the identification information 330 of at least one cooking object (for example, "hamburger") that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30,
(2) When receiving a second command (a selection command by the input key 43L1 or 43R1) before receiving the first command, at least one control pattern (for example, "water boiling") in the single cooking mode KM1 is displayed. information is displayed on the third specific screen 30ST of the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 48);
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform each cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Moreover, when the main power is turned on, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is first displayed, and during the period in which the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is being displayed, the first By giving a command or a second command, information that can specify the cooking item (eg, "hamburger") of the cooperative cooking menu and information that indicates the control pattern (eg, "water boiler") in the independent cooking mode KM1 are displayed, respectively. This can be expected to prevent erroneous operations by the user and improve operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives the first command, the specific screen (the first specific screen 30SP) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) ) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the common screen 30Z is switched to the first specific screen 30SP).

With this configuration, the user can recognize the selection result of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the first specific screen 30SP, and the user's operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives the second command, the specific screen (third specific screen 30ST) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) ) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the common screen 30Z is switched to the third specific screen 30ST).

With this configuration, the user can recognize the selection result of the single cooking mode KM1 on the third specific screen 30ST, and the user's operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the first specific screen 30SP includes information on applicable control conditions ("indicating microwave output level" in FIGS. 87 and 99) for each of the identification information 330. information 30V”) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

With this configuration, the control conditions for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, user operability and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the third specific screen 30ST shows applicable control conditions for each control pattern of the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "warming", "water boiling", etc.). A configuration in which information is displayed on the integrated display section 30 has been disclosed.

Because of this configuration, for example, control conditions such as heat retention of 80° C. and preheating of 180° C. are displayed on a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) (see FIG. 48), which improves user operability and convenience. can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the first heating means HM1, It has disclosed a configuration that performs a composite cooking mode KM2 that is driven simultaneously or with a time lag, or that is automatically switched and driven.

With this configuration, even if the same heating chamber 113 is used for heat cooking, the heating principles are different, so a heating method suitable for the food to be cooked can be adopted. In addition, since the heating source is automatically switched, the burden on the user is reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide the cooking device 1 that is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the linked cooking mode KM3 performs the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1, and the subsequent cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2. A configuration comprising a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1. was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, a method is adopted in which a plurality of heat sources are switched between two locations above the heating chamber 113 and the top plate 15 to heat the food to be cooked. It is possible to provide the heating cooker 1 which is highly convenient.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 relating to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 that receives a command signal from a user;
an integrated control device MC for controlling heating operations of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that uses both the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC determines whether or not to permit cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 for a specific food (for example, "hamburger") selected by the input operation unit 40, in an operation step STR1; STR2 ("operation step A", see FIG. 67) and, when permitting cooking in the associated cooking mode KM3, a first step containing information about the food to be cooked in the associated cooking mode KM3 (for example, "hamburger"). Operation step STR3 ("operation step B", see FIG. 70) for performing 1 specific notification, and when a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 40 after the 1st specific notification, the operation shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. and an operation step STR8 (“operation step C”, see FIG. 70),
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be surely executed by using two or more heating means without incurring a situation where the cooperative cooking cannot be carried out due to power shortage, for example. can be done. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the first specific notification includes the identification information 330 of the object to be cooked, the cooking process by the first heating means (induction heating source 9) and the cooking process by the second heating means HM2. Among the cooking processes, information on at least the cooking process to be started first is collectively displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

With this configuration, the user can check the food to be cooked in advance and can provide a cooking device that is easy to use.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the fourth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a heating chamber 113;
an integrated display unit 30 serving as display means;
outside the heating chamber 113, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2. has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the process,
When the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays an initial screen during standby (common screen 30Z) common to the first and second heating means HM1 and HM2 on the integrated display unit 30. and during the period in which this standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) Upon receiving a first command (by operating the input key 43MC) to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the standby initial screen is switched to the first specific screen 30SP, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be applied. Display the cooking menu (eg "hamburger"),
(2) When the second heating means HM2 receives a second command specifying a desired control pattern (by operating the input key 43M1), the standby initial screen is switched to the second specific screen 30SC, Displaying the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "range manual" (see FIGS. 37 and 51),
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Moreover, when a command specifying a desired food to be cooked is received (according to the operation of the input key 43M1), the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, and the second heating means HM2: When a command specifying a desired control pattern is received (according to the operation of the input key 43M1), the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "manual range") is displayed, thereby providing a highly operable heating cooker. .

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives the selection signal for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during the period in which the standby initial screen is displayed, The identification information 330 for specifying the object (for example, "hamburger") is associated with the guidance information 30P that serves as a reference for the user's operation, and is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which a plurality of heating means are used in combination, confirmation and input operation of necessary information can be performed using the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, even with the heating cooker 1 having an increased number of heating means, the operability for the user can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heat cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the selection signal of the single cooking mode KM1 is received, information (specific sentence 30J: see FIG. 50) specifying the control pattern (for example, "manual range") is provided. and information of control conditions applicable to one of the control patterns (microwave output value information 30X: see FIG. 50) to be displayed on the second specific screen 30SC,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, even in the case of the heating cooker 1 that uses a combination of a plurality of heating means, it is possible to check the control patterns and the control conditions in association with each other. Thereby, the operability for the user can be improved.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the fifth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the object N to be heated using the first heating means HM1, and after the preheating step, the object to be cooked (for example, " hamburger”), and after the cooking step 1, a cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2.
(See FIGS. 54 and 61).

Because of this configuration, an object to be heated N such as a frying pan or a pot placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, and an object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") is placed on the object to be heated N to be cooked. (Cooking step 1), and thereafter, a cooperative cooking menu can be executed in which the food to be cooked is cooked by the second heating means in the heating chamber 113 . As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the notification unit AN indicates the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") to be applied. A display unit (integrated display unit) 30 on which identification information 330 is displayed,
(See FIG. 54).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a cooker with high operability that allows easy selection of a specific food to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) to which the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is applied by the identification information 330.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The input operation unit 40 includes first operation units (left operation unit, right operation unit) 40L and 40R for setting the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and commanding the start and stop of the heating operation. , a second operation unit (central operation unit) 40M for setting the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commanding the start and stop of the heating operation;
The selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is performed by the second operation unit 40M,
The end of the preheating process is performed by the first operation units 40L and 40R,
The start and end of the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 are performed by the second operation unit 40M.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that uses a combination of a plurality of heating means can be selected by the second operation unit 40M, and the cooking process that uses the heating chamber 113 and is performed by the second heating means HM2. is also started and ended with the second operation unit 40M, the user can start and end the heat cooking in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 with the second operation unit 40M.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as a plurality of heating sources capable of heating independently of each other,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the plurality of heat sources in the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically proceed with one cooking process,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which have different heating principles (heating characteristics) for the food to be cooked, are automatically combined to automatically progress one cooking process in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The integrated control device MC controls the cooking step 1 by either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2, and the first heating means HM1 or the heating means not used in the cooking step 1. and a cooking step 2 that is started after the cooking step 1 is completed by either one of the second heating means HM2, and further has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, a plurality of heating means can be automatically combined to heat and cook a single food item at two locations above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 having a display screen,
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP,
When the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30,
When the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 displays the third specific screen 30ST.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, when one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, any one of the corresponding first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, and third specific screen 30ST is displayed. or one of them is displayed on the integrated display section 30 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the sixth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1, and in parallel with the preheating step, the object to be cooked is heated by the second heating means HM2. A cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having a cooking step 1 of heating and, after the cooking step 1, a cooking step 2 of using the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step and the first heating means HM1. with the ability to run
A heating cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 54 and 61).

Because of this configuration, the object to be heated N such as a frying pan or pot placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, and in parallel with this preheating process, the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, and then preheating is performed. A cooperative cooking menu can be executed in which a food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") is cooked (cooking step 2) on the food N to be heated. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can shorten the entire cooking time including the preheating time and that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the seventh disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a compound cooking mode KM2 with multiple control menus that operates two or more heating sources in a predetermined sequence;
a coordinated cooking mode KM3 having a plurality of coordinated cooking menus that operates the heating sources in a predetermined order at each location inside the heating chamber 113 and above the top plate;
display means (integrated display section) 30 for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu;
An input operation unit 40 that can select the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode,
When the start key 43MS of the input operation section is operated while at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means 30, a predetermined display position A (first The control menu displayed in the front-back direction central portion of 1 area 30L) is selected, and the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed,
When the start key 43MS is operated while at least two of the cooperative cooking menus are displayed on the display means 30 at the same time, a predetermined display position B (the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction) is displayed. part) is selected, and the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43M1 for sequentially displaying the control menu at the display position A of the display means 30 each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, and an input key 43M1 for displaying the control menu backwards for each operation. and the input key 43M1 displayed at the display position A of the means 30 (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) are arranged adjacent to each other,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43M1 for sequentially displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B (central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, and an input key 43M1 for displaying the linked cooking menu in the reverse direction at the display position B (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) are arranged adjacent to each other,
The input key 43M1 that forwards and reverses the control menu and the linked cooking menu and displays them at the display position A (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) and the display position B, respectively. , shared by the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, when the user selects the control menu of the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu, the user can select the menus forwardly or backwardly, thereby avoiding confusion. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can select between combined cooking and cooperative cooking with a simple operation, and that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
In the display means 30, a second display position (second In the display area 30M), the control conditions (for example, thermal power and heating time) that can be applied to one of the control menus displayed at the predetermined display position (the center of the first area 30L) are displayed.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, in the compound cooking mode, the control conditions applicable to one control menu can be easily confirmed in the second area 30M, making it possible to provide a heat cooker with high operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The input operation unit 40 sequentially displays the control conditions applicable to one control menu at a predetermined display position C (second display area 30M, see FIG. 49) of the display means 30 each time the input operation unit 40 is operated. The input key 43M2 to be displayed and the input key 43M2 to display the control condition in the display position C (second display area 30M) in the reverse direction each time the operation is performed are arranged adjacent to each other.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily check the control conditions displayed in the second area 30M, and a highly operable cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
In the display means 30, a predetermined display position D (second display area 30M) adjacent to the display position B (center of the first area 30L) is displayed while at least two of the cooperative cooking menus are displayed at the same time. 82(C)) shows control conditions (for example, , information indicating the output level 30 V. See FIG. 82) is displayed,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, even in the linked cooking mode KM3, the user can easily visually confirm the control conditions (for example, the heating power level) displayed in the second area 30M, thereby providing a cooker with high operability. can be done.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43M2 for sequentially displaying the control conditions at the second display position (second display area 30M) of the display means 30 each time the operation is performed, and and an input key 43M2 for displaying the control conditions in reverse on the second display section (second display area 30M) are arranged adjacent to each other,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the input key 43M2 can be used to forward and reverse the control conditions (for example, the thermal power level) to be displayed at a predetermined display position (second display area 30M), making it easy for the user to confirm. It is possible to provide a heating cooker with high operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The control conditions of the control menu KM2 and the control conditions of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are forwarded and reversed, respectively, and alternatively displayed on the second display section (second display area 30M). The input key 43M2 is shared by the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, even if a large area cannot be secured for the input operation unit 40, the installation area for the input keys 43M2 can be minimized, and operability is improved by sharing the heat cooking with high user convenience. equipment can be provided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
In a state where the control menu is displayed at the predetermined display position (the center of the first area 30L), for the control menu displayed at the predetermined display position, information specifying the heat source to be used (heat source display unit) 30K, information indicating the category of the food to be cooked (vegetables, meat, etc.) (see FIG. 51), and at least one of information 30P1 (see FIG. 49) indicating the characteristics of the control menu. Displaying auxiliary information 30P (reference information 30P: recommended text) on the display means 30;
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, when the user selects the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM3, the auxiliary information 30P allows the user to correctly understand, and it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The auxiliary information 30P includes summary information that is always displayed simply in characters or symbols when the control menu is displayed, and detailed information that is displayed in characters according to a user's display command or advance function settings. are doing,
(See FIGS. 37, 49 and 51).

With this configuration, when the user selects the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM3, the auxiliary information 30P allows the user to correctly understand, and it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability and convenience for the user.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the eighth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body case HC;
outside the heating chamber 113, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heat source HM2 having a plurality of heat sources 188 and 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking object is heated using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of the cooking object is selected. a first selection unit 43MC that displays two cooking menus in a selectable manner;
In a composite cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating sources 188 and 189 are automatically combined to heat one cooking object simultaneously or with a time lag, one of a plurality of control menus shared by multiple types of cooking objects is selected. a second selection unit 43M1 that selects one control menu (for example, “boil under leafy vegetables”);
and an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the selection of the first selection section 43MC and the second selection section 43M1. Ta,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily select the control menu of the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu by using the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The body case HC further includes an input operation unit 40,
The input operation unit 40 includes a first input key that constitutes the first selection unit 43MC and a second input key that constitutes the second selection unit 43M1, which are separately provided.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily select the control menu of the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu by using the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1, thereby enabling a wide range of cooking. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The input operation unit 40 further includes function setting input means 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC,
At least one of the display method of each cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the display method of each control menu in the combined cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, if the function mode is set, the display method of the control menu in the combined cooking mode and the display method of the linked cooking menu can be changed, and can be used for a wide range of cooking. A cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The main body case HC further comprises an integrated display section 30 as display means,
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1, respectively.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily distinguish between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the integrated display unit 30, and a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking is provided. can do.

Other features disclosed in the first embodiment.
It disclosed the following characteristic configuration.

(1) Part 1:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information FA1 or the second At least one of the reference information FA2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, it has a function to determine the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the temperature rise (TN1, TN2, etc.), and during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 Since reference information is automatically notified to the user at each stage, even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, or to temporarily stop the heating operation for confirmation during the cooking process. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC automatically advances the cooking process 1, terminates the cooking process 1 in response to a command from the user, and after the termination, receives a start command from the user and starts the cooking process 2, The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2. At least one of the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 related to the cooking process 2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN;
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, it has a function to determine the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the temperature rise (TN1, TN2, etc.), and during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 Since reference information is automatically notified to the user at each stage, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, or to temporarily stop the heating operation for confirmation during the cooking process. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(3) Part 3:
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking process 1 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113 and the food N to be heated placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking process 1 are completed. and a cooking step 2 for induction-heating the object to be cooked with the induction heating source, and
When a reservation for heat cooking in the linked cooking mode is made,
(1) the induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step;
(2) during the preheating step, a cooking step 1 by the microwave heating source 189 can be initiated in the heating chamber 113;
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source 9 and completing the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object N preheated by the induction heating source 9,
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heat cooker is characterized in that information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking process 1 can be started while the preheating process by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking process 1, and then the food to be cooked is moved to the preheated food N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Furthermore, since the reference information is automatically notified to the user during the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, even if the types of heating sources are increased, the user can be notified of the progress of cooking and dispel anxiety. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. It is expected that this will further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(4) Part 4:
The integrated control device MC
(1) IH single cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone (2) Range single cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated alone (3) Oven alone in which the oven heating source 188 is operated alone Cooking mode (4) A transition period TR in which the start and end timings of the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are determined depending on the user's input operation. and has an operation program for the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is operated sequentially through
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed in a place other than the heating chamber 113 after the transition period. including
During the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC notifies the annunciator AN of reference information about the cooking process 2 or information indicating that cooking other than cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113. be notified by
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, when performing heat cooking in the linked cooking mode, during the transition period TR during which the heating operation is stopped (preheating operation may be can be notified that cooking can be performed.
As a result, it is possible to shorten the time that the user spends on cooking with heat, realizing quicker cooking than before, reducing the burden on the user, and improving usability.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is started with a time lag,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven;
has the function of
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the linked cooking mode, and the microwave heating source in the heating chamber 113 at a time before finishing the cooking process 1. 189 or the oven heating source 188 can be used to perform cooking different from the cooking in the linked cooking mode by the notification unit AN,
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, when cooking with heat in the linked cooking mode, when the cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 ends, it is possible to notify in advance that another heat cooking using the heating chamber 113 can be performed. It is expected that the time spent on cooking can be shortened, cooking can be done more quickly than before, reducing the burden on the user, and improving usability.

(6) Part 6:
a heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N;
a transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
a notification unit AN;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked to perform cooking,
In the linked cooking mode, a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in accordance with a command from a user after the cooking process 1 is completed are executed.
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transmission/reception unit 49.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, when performing heat cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, it is possible to obtain information on foodstuffs in the refrigerator 401 as reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied. It is expected that the usability will be improved.

(7) Part 7:
a heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N;
a transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
a notification unit AN;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked by a cooperative cooking program to perform heat cooking,
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started according to a user's command after a transition period TR during which no heating operation is performed,
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit 49.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode, the execution data of the cooking is provided to the external information processing device (home gateway) 411 , which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401 . The utilization of such information can ultimately contribute to the improvement of user convenience, safety, maintenance and improvement of comfortable spaces, and the like.

(8) Part 8:
When receiving an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC performs a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode. By displaying either the screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

With this configuration, two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 can be easily used properly. can provide

Furthermore, an input operation unit 40 for inputting selection of one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and an integrated display that selectively displays the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC It was the structure provided with the part 30. FIG.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first and second heating means, and includes an operation unit 98 of a main power switch 97 that supplies power to the integrated control device MC, the cooperative cooking mode and the and an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for instructing the start of individual cooking in the composite cooking mode.
For this reason, the input operation unit 40 can be used to issue a command from turning on the main electric power to starting the heating, and the operability is excellent.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT serving as cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, the operation of both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be canceled with the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Further, the integrated control device MC accepts any one input of the combined cooking mode, the linked cooking mode, and the single cooking mode at the input operation unit 40, and a specific screen (first specific The screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen 30ST) are displayed on the integrated display section 30. FIG.

Moreover, for the individual cooking menus such as "hamburger" and "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode, the heat sources for the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and further the above-described first reference is displayed. Information beneficial to the user, such as the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2, is displayed, so that the cooking failure of the user can be reduced, and a cooking device with improved convenience can be provided.

In addition, after the main power supply is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC displays the caution information and reference information before heating and cooking on the integrated display unit 30. The standby initial screen (common screen 30Z ) is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, etc. according to the input from the input operation unit 40. FIG.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1 can be effectively used, and the user can be notified of caution information before heat cooking.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode. It was a configuration that was displayed alternatively.
For this reason, there is no fear of causing misunderstanding between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, which is convenient for the user.
.

(9) Part 9:
Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, the cooking process information 332 of one linked cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and one or more "control menus" applied to the menu. "Condition" information (including one or more combination of thermal power, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
Then, the integrated control device MC displays additional information 331 such as guidance prompting the user's operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. (see FIG. 54).

According to this first embodiment, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by three types of heat sources, the display screen 30D displays the heat source according to one control menu selected from the group of linked cooking modes and the cooking mode. Since at least three pieces of information, such as the process and the user's input operation, can be collectively displayed, even a composite heating cooker equipped with three heat sources can be a convenient heating cooker.

(10) Part 10:
In order to detect the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or the temperature rise from the start of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and outputs the first reference information FA1 or It was the structure which alert|reported the 2nd reference information FA2.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the reference information.

(11) Part 11:
The input operation unit 40 includes
(1) selecting means 43L, 43R for an IH single cooking mode for operating the induction heating source independently;
(2) Selecting means 43M1 for a range-only cooking mode for operating the microwave heating source alone;
(3) selection means 43M1 for an oven-only cooking mode that operates the oven heating source alone;
(4) A combined cooking mode selecting means 43M1 for automatically switching and operating both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source at the same time or with a time difference;
(5) It is the structure which comprised selection means 43MC of the said cooperation cooking mode.
Therefore, there is an advantage that each heat source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space for selecting means (input keys, etc.) for the three heat sources.

(12) Part 12:
The input operation unit 40 includes a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L, which are exclusive operation units for the induction heating source 9, and common operation for the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188. and a part (central operation part) 40M,
The shared operation unit 40M includes first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2,
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1), the first specific screen (30SP) for input related to cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. ) is displayed and
When the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC), the second specific screen 30SC for input relating to cooking in the composite cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration shown.
Therefore, selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 is more effective if the operation is performed first. In addition, since separate specific screens are displayed, there is no fear of erroneous selection between the two types of cooking modes.

(13) Part 13:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated controller MC. Met. For example, in "range manual" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from among 100 W, 200 W, and 500 W, but the default value is 500 W. In other words, it is determined to be 500 W unless otherwise specified.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce user input operations and improve usability.

(14) Part 14:
The end of the cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9 and the end of the cooking process 2 are determined by input operations to the dedicated operation units (the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 determine the start and stop timings of the induction heating operation.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operating section 40R or the left operating section 40L and concentrate on starting and ending induction heating.
In other words, there is no need to separately use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L and 40R to start and end the cooking process 1, thereby avoiding confusion in the user's operations.

(15) Part 15:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is set by the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R). ) was determined by the user's operation.
Therefore, the heating conditions (thermal power, heating time, etc.) can be set according to the object to be cooked, the heating mode, and the heat source, and the cooking finish can be improved.

(16) Part 16:
The notification unit AN includes first display units (31L, 31R) that perform display operations during the execution period of the IH single cooking mode, an integrated display unit 30 that performs display operations during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode, had
Therefore, especially when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 using a plurality of heat sources, the cooking process, heating conditions, etc. are intensively displayed by the single integrated display section 30, so attention should be focused on the integrated display section 30. be able to.

(17) Part 17:
In the linked cooking mode KM3, identification information 330 identifying a plurality of items to be cooked is displayed in a certain order on the first identification screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 is displayed in sequence. It was a configuration that could be selected.
Therefore, when the desired cooking (for example, hamburger) is to be made, the identification information can be sequentially displayed and selected, which simplifies the selection method and improves the user's operability.

(18) Part 18:
Composite cooking modes are distinguished by control menus that drive the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see FIGS. 34 and 37),
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J such as "warm" and "manual range" in FIG. 49).
Therefore, the user can easily select the control menu.

(19) Part 19:
The reference information that the integrated control device MC acquires from the home gateway 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 has been disclosed as information on ingredients that can be cooked.
For this reason, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process to check the information about the ingredients, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(20) Part 20:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the reference information (ingredient information) in the storage device MM until cooking in one of the linked cooking modes is completed.
Therefore, it is not necessary for the user to perform special operations for recording the reference information each time, or to write and record the reference information on paper.

(21) Part 21:
The food information was information held by the refrigerator 401 . Furthermore, the food information includes information on the refrigeration temperature or freezing temperature of the food.
For this reason, when cooking in the linked cooking mode with the heating cooker 1, it can be used as a reference when determining the control conditions (including one or more combinations such as thermal power, heating intensity, and target temperature). You can expect better quality cooking.

(22) Part 22:
Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC sends a signal (see RQ1, RQ3 in (home gateway) 411.
.
For this reason, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process to check the information about the ingredients, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(23) Part 23:
Before starting the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411, and further , the request for provision of reference information is notified by the notification unit AN (see FIG. 110).
Therefore, the user's action of moving to the refrigerator 401 to check the cooking can be postponed in advance, so that the user's labor can be reduced.

(24) Part 24:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the cooking execution data in the storage device MM after the cooking process 2 is finished.
Therefore, in order for the user to record the cooking execution data, there is no need for a special operation or a task of writing and recording on paper.

(25) Part 25:
The cooking implementation data is transmitted after the cooking process 2 is completed, and the cooking implementation data includes at least one or more of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (2) Information about the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (4) The cooking process 1 to the cooking process 1 Information indicating the required time until the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information specifying the heat source that performed the heat cooking operation (7) When the user performs the next heat cooking (8) Information related to the user's safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber. It is possible to eliminate the need for writing and recording work.

(26) Part 26:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store, in the storage device MM, information on the required time until the cooking is finished after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is finished.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform a special operation to record information on the time required for cooking each time, or to record the information on paper.

(27) Part 27:
In the home appliance operation management system of Embodiment 1, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects that a person is in the space where the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed. and when the startup information from the heating cooker 1 is received, it is determined that it is the heating cooking time zone, and an inventory data collection command is sent to the refrigerator 401 (step SD6 in FIG. 103 reference).
Therefore, when the user (resident) is near the refrigerator 401 or the heating cooker 1 and is likely to cook, the operation of collecting inventory data can be automatically performed. In addition, the user does not need to perform any special input operation for collecting the data, and useful information can be acquired without much effort, so that an operation management system that is highly convenient as a whole can be realized.

Embodiment 2.
116 to 126 show a cooking device according to Embodiment 2. FIG.
FIG. 116 is a perspective view showing a state where the door is closed in the (built-in combined type) cooking device 1 according to Embodiment 2. FIG. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of cooking device 1 is opened. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device 1 with the top plate removed. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device 1 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device 1 with the top plate, IH coil and cover removed. FIG. 121 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 122 is a bottom (lower) view of the upper unit of the cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 123 is a block diagram for explaining the overall control functions of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. 124 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation section and the integrated display section of the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent control menu. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section in the cooperative cooking mode. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment differs greatly from the first embodiment in that the outside air intake port of the heating cooker 1 is added (changed), and the control-related configuration is also changed.

Also, the configuration of the input operation unit 40 is significantly different from that of the first embodiment. Furthermore, when implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the content of limiting the operation of the heat source used is different.

Furthermore, the operation patterns of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are also significantly different from those of the first embodiment.

A description will be given with reference to the drawings, focusing on points that are particularly different from the first embodiment.
FIG. 116 will be described.
Reference numeral 118 denotes a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, which is also called a "reinforcing member" because it also has the purpose of reinforcement.

The connecting member 118 has a shape that continuously covers the right side of the lower unit 200 , the lower side, and the left side of the lower unit 200 .
Although not shown, the connecting member 118 includes a left vertical portion 118L that is fixed to the left side of the front portion of the lower unit 200 in close contact with the left vertical portion 118R, and the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. It also has a central flat portion 118M that is flattened. The central flat portion 118M is fixed to the lower surface of the bottom plate 101U in the front portion of the lower case 101 so as to overlap in close contact therewith.

Next, FIG. 117 will be described.
A mounting portion of the hinge portion 176, which will be described later, has a robust structure that does not cause deformation such as bending even if it receives a load or the like when the door 114 is opened or closed. As a result, it is possible to reliably support the door 114 when it is opened and closed.
Therefore, the door 114 is brought into close contact with the front peripheral portion of the opening 114A of the heating chamber 114 even when used for a long period of time, so that the opening 114A can be reliably closed, thereby providing a highly safe heating cooker without radio wave leakage. Realized.

The connecting member 118 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate (for example, a plate thickness of 1 mm) to form the right vertical portion 118R (not shown), the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L. are integrally formed.

116 and 117, 101RP is a protrusion formed integrally with the side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The convex portion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the side vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also protrudes outward over a certain area to form a protrusion 101LP (not shown).

A metal arm 116 supports the door 114 in a horizontal state and pulls the door 114 in the door closing direction when the door 114 is closed. The arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 and moves in the through hole 117 in the front-rear direction. The door structure of the high-frequency heating device using the arm 116 is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2002-39541, 2010-181106 and 2007-218544, etc., so a detailed description will be given. are omitted.

117, reference numeral 176 denotes a pair of left and right hinges, which are fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the door 114 is rotatably supported by the lower case 101 . The hinges 176 are sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U, and fixed at a plurality of locations by fasteners (combination of bolts and nuts, screws, etc.).

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes with the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 are supported from below by a roller (not shown) or a sliding member (not shown) provided rotatably on the back side of the through hole 117 so that the door 114 can be opened and closed. At times, the arm 116 moves back and forth while contacting the upper surface of the roller or slide member.

Further, although not shown, the arm 116 is always pulled toward the inside of the heating cooker 1 by a tension spring, so that the door 114 can be easily opened by the vibration even when subjected to vibration such as an earthquake. (prevents radio wave leakage through door 114 during microwave heating operation).

Front covers 112 are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200 and are made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape and is fixed to the lower case 101 so as to extend laterally beyond the width of the lower case 101 . When the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 covers as much as possible the entire front of the gap between the kitchen furniture 2 (the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L). This serves to make the gaps 301R and 301L inconspicuous when visually observed.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a metal support bracket, which has a length covering the entire lateral width of the lower case 101 . The support fitting 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186. As shown in FIG.

Reference numeral 146 denotes a box-shaped front operation section fixed to the front (surface) side of the right front cover 112 . This front operation unit 146 is used for microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 .
The input operation section 40 is composed of four parts: the front operation section 146, a central operation section 40M, a right operation section 40R and a left operation section 40L.

A display unit 147 having a liquid crystal screen is arranged on the ceiling surface of the front operation unit 146 so that the user can visually check the display contents from above when cooking. The front operation unit 146 is not rotated and stored inside the heating cooker 1 like the operation unit of the conventionally known "kangaroo pocket mechanism", but is always in front of the front cover 112. Exposed.

A plurality of touch-type or push-button input keys (not shown) are arranged near the display unit 147 on the upper surface of the front operation unit 146 . By operating these input keys, it is possible to input control conditions during microwave heating and oven heating, and to command the start and stop of the heating operation.

In FIG. 117, reference numeral 145 denotes a dedicated saucer used inside the heating chamber 113, and is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like. The receiving tray 145 has external dimensions such that it can be inserted into and removed from the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG.

A tableware usually made of porcelain or a highly heat-resistant material is placed on the saucer 145, and the ingredients placed in the tableware are cooked by microwaves. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a magnetic metal cooking utensil (object to be heated) N such as a frying pan (not shown) is placed on the top plate 15, and food (eg, hamburger) is induction-heated to some extent on this cooking utensil. After that, the cooking utensil may be moved into the heating chamber 113 and further heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete the cooking (this cooking method is one of the linked cooking modes). be).

116 and 117, reference numerals 152S1 and 152S2 denote auxiliary air intakes composed of a large number of small holes, which are provided at the lower end of the side vertical wall 101R forming the right side surface of the lower case 101. .

The auxiliary air intake 152S1 is an auxiliary air intake for the air intake (second air intake) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air.
Likewise, the auxiliary intake port 152S2 is an auxiliary intake port for the intake port (second intake port) 152B for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air. The maximum diameter of these auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 is about 3 mm in consideration of the effect of preventing leakage of microwaves.

Although not shown, the suction port of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with outside air is located near the auxiliary suction port 152S1. Similarly, the intake port of the fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air is also arranged near the auxiliary intake port 152S2.

Next, FIG. 118 will be described. FIG. 118 shows the state in which the top plate 15 is removed.
A display window 30W is formed in the holder 50 so as to have a size corresponding to the outer shape of the integrated display section 30 .

31LW and 31RW are display windows. The display windows are formed on the holder 50 at positions respectively corresponding to the left display portion 31L and the right display portion 31R.

A choke coil 56 is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54 . 17C is a coil base (coil support frame) on which two IH coils 17L and 17R are mounted.

The left IH coil 17L has a maximum outer dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This makes it possible to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. Therefore, when implementing the cooperative cooking mode, when a large metal container or cooking utensil used in the heating chamber 113 (both of which have no lid) is moved to the left heating unit 17HL and heated, the left heating unit 17HL is heated. Heating can be efficiently performed by the heating unit 17HL.

Alternatively, when the cooperative cooking mode is carried out, after heating a large area or a large number of objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, the objects to be cooked are transferred to a large metal container or cooking utensil, and left heating unit 17HL. Even when the heating is performed on the top, the heating can be efficiently performed by the left heating section 17HL. For this reason, in the second embodiment, there is a reason for wanting to use the left heating section 17HL exclusively for the cooperative cooking mode. The right IH coil 17R is the same as that of the first embodiment and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally made of a highly heat-resistant plastic material. The coil base 17C has a circular shape as a whole, matching the shape of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and has a plurality of arms 17CH radially extending from the center. In this second embodiment, there are eight arms 17CH. A gap serving as a large ventilation space is formed between each arm 17CH.

17F is a ferrite plate placed between two adjacent arms 17CH. In the left IH coil 17L, TS3 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
One temperature sensor TS3 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS3 are installed at positions outside the IH coil 17L, slightly away from the center.

TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor, such as an infrared sensor. In the right IH coil 17R, TS4 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor. One temperature sensor TS4 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS4 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17R, slightly away from the center.

TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. Measurement data from these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 are input to a temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing section) 93. FIG. These temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 may be called "first temperature sensors".

In FIG. 118, 66 is a magnetic shielding ring made of metal such as aluminum, which is fixed to the coil base 17C so as to surround the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.
41R is a right touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 of the first embodiment. 41L is a left touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 as well. These two touch key substrates 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50. As shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 119 will be described.
A transformer 57 is one of the important electrical components in the power supply circuit board 55 . In FIG. 119, the left end portion of the cover 70 is cut out within the width dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by the coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is arranged in this notched portion. That is, the notch is provided so that the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 do not come into contact with each other.

Next, FIG. 120 will be described. A capacitor 58 is one of the important electrical components in the inverter circuit board 80 .
As is clear from FIG. 120, there are two heat sinks 82 made of aluminum on the left and right (in two rows) and two on the front and back, so there are four in total. The four heat sinks 82 are installed such that two heat sinks 82 face each other close to each other. 59 is a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82 . The diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59 dissipates the heat generated during operation by the heat sink 82 and does not overheat.

As is clear from FIG. 120, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are separated by a distance LD of about 50 to 100 mm.
Next, FIG. 121 shows the flow of cooling air in the configuration shown in FIG. Cooling air is indicated by thick arrows.

Next, FIG. 122 is a bottom (bottom) view of the upper unit 100. As shown in FIG. D5 is the maximum front-rear width dimension of the upper unit 100 and is 432 mm. W4 is the left-right maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100, which is 544 mm.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the upper opening of the lower case 101 (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) are determined in consideration of the front-back direction maximum width dimension D5 and the left-right direction maximum width dimension W4 of the upper case 16. It is sized to fit.

Structurally, it is configured as described above. Therefore, when induction cooking is performed in the upper unit 100, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 60 are operated as indicated by the thick arrows in FIG. The inverter circuit board 80, the input operation section 40, the power circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54 are cooled by the cooling airflows RF1, RF2, RF3, and RF4 blown from the fan 61, respectively.

Next, FIG. 123 will be described.
FIG. 123 is a block diagram for explaining the overall control functions of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 123, arrows indicated by dashed lines indicate command signals for control.
In the heating cooker 1 showing this Embodiment 2, there are a total of six controllers mainly composed of microcomputers. This point is a major difference from the first embodiment.

Among the six control devices described above, the integrated control device MC controls the entire heating cooker 1 . It is the IH control section 90 that receives commands from the integrated control device MC and controls the induction heating cooking. Controller 105 controls both microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 . The control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 described in the first embodiment.

The two control devices 90 and 105 described above are sometimes called slave (SLAVE) microcomputers because they perform specified control according to commands from the integrated control device MC and return processing results to the integrated control device MC. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the six controllers described above will be described below.
First, in the input operation unit 40, the right input control device 23 processes the input of the right touch key group arranged on the right operation unit 40R and the display on the display unit 31R. The right input control device 23 further processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M.

The second is a left input control device 24 arranged in the left operation unit 40L, which processes the input of the left touch key group and the display of the display unit 31L.
The third is the power switch controller 28 .
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation unit) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation unit 40 and determines ON/OFF of the power supply.

123, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power supply 99. In FIG. Power with a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is conducted through the power cord 106 to the filter circuit board 54 . Note that the filter circuit board 54 is built in the upper unit 100 .

The right input control device 23 is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
The right input control device 23 transmits input signals of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M to the integrated control device MC.

As described in the first embodiment, whether or not a specific input key (one or more) other than the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M has been "long-pressed" is determined in the integrated control device MC. In other words, when the right input control device 23 transmits a signal from the time when the touch key group is touched to the time when the touch key is not touched to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC measures the duration of touch and ” is determined.

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 for turning ON/OFF the main power of the heating cooker 1 and a sub-relay (not shown). FIG. 1233 schematically shows only the main relay.

The main relay 107 is opened and closed upon receiving a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1 . As will be described later, the sub-relay receives a relay control signal from the power switch control device 28 and performs an opening/closing operation.
The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining ON/OFF of the power. A main power switch 97 is composed of the main relay 107 and the sub-relay.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operation information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates and processes them. determine and control.

The integrated controller MC controls the central operation unit 40M, the display operation of the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesizer 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. FIG. The integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23 and the power switch control device 28 are attached to the central operation board 32 that constitutes the input operation section 40 .

A right operation board 32R (not shown) and a left operation board 32L (not shown) are attached to the lower surface side of the holder 50. As shown in FIG. Therefore, they are not shown in FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG.
The central operating board 32 is composed of a right operating board 32R and a left operating board 32L. The right operating board 32R is mounted with the integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the right display section 31R. The two operation boards 32L, 32L are made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation. The left input control device 24 and the left display section 31L are mounted on the left operation board 32L (see FIG. 123).

Above the central operation board 32 and in front of the holder 50, a pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L and 41R on which various touch input keys are mounted are installed.

Reference numeral 55 denotes a power circuit board to which commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit 54. As shown in FIG. and a power supply circuit B36 through which power is applied. By these two power supply circuits A34 and B36, the power of voltage 200V is converted into a plurality of low voltage direct currents such as 24V, 18V, 6V and 5V, respectively. That is, a plurality of DC power sources with different voltages are generated.

The 5V electric power is supplied as a power source for the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28.
Also, the 6V power is used as a power supply (including a backlight power supply) for the integrated display section 30, the right display section 31R, and the left display section 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 is used as the power supply for the control and various display parts in the upper unit 100. It is used.

80 is an inverter circuit board of the induction heating source 9 installed inside the upper unit 100 .
The inverter circuit board 80 includes a right inverter circuit 81R with a DC power supply section 75R and a left inverter circuit 81L with another DC power supply section 75L.

AC power with a voltage of 200 V is applied to the inverter circuit board 80 from the filter circuit 54 . Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls induction heating in general, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control section 90 transmits drive signals to drive circuits 37L and 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a and 79b in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. The two drive circuits 37L and 37R operate with 18V power supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a and 79, respectively. This controls the driving frequencies of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R and reduce the thermal power. Or conversely, control is performed to raise the drive frequency and raise the thermal power. These driving frequency commands are issued from the IH control section 90 .

77a is an input current detector installed on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and 77b is an output current detector that detects power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.
The detected values of the input current detector 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH controller 90. FIG.

In the initial stage of induction cooking, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the driving frequency is changed from one driving frequency to another, the change in the input current value is observed to determine whether the material of the object to be heated such as a pot is magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, etc. Then, the driving frequency of the switching elements (IGBT) 79a, 79b is automatically adjusted to an appropriate value. When the object to be heated is determined to be non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a driving frequency (eg, 31 kHz) higher than the driving frequency (eg, 23 kHz) when the object is determined to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R. TS8 and TS9 are contact temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 . Temperature detection data from each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated controller MC.

Although the temperature detection circuit 93 is provided in the first embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 in the form of hardware is not provided in the second embodiment. Processing such as temperature detection, temperature comparison, and whether or not there is an abnormality is executed by software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door opening/closing detection mechanism. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 includes one switch that is opened and closed according to the opening/closing operation of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects whether the switch is properly opened/closed. This point is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

Reference numeral 120P denotes a power supply circuit unit of the microwave heating device 120, which generates AC power as a low voltage (for example, 24V and 5V) power supply from commercial voltage (200V) power supplied from the filter circuit 54. FIG.

Electric power with a voltage of 5 V is supplied as a power supply for the control device 105, and electric power with a voltage of 24 V is supplied to the driving circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 123, power of 200 V is supplied to the driving power source of the antenna driving motor 126. As shown in FIG.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B for heating the heating chamber 113 are controlled by the controller 105 by opening and closing the relays 178A and 178B. The relays 178A and 178B may use semiconductor switching elements capable of finely controlling the energization rate, but in the second embodiment, only ON-OFF control is performed, so relays are used. The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are applied with a voltage of 200 V, which is the same as the commercial power supply, and operate.

A door open detection switch 132M constitutes a part of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 .
This switch itself is installed inside the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, but is drawn at a different position in FIG.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact type (temperature) that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120 sensor.

The TS 10 is a contact sensor such as a thermistor, and is installed on the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 113, the inner space of the exhaust duct 102, the wall surface thereof, or the like. For example, it is installed on the outer ceiling of the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 near the back of the heating chamber 113 .
The temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only during cooking with the oven heating source 188 driven, but also during cooking with the microwave heating source 189 (for example, thawing frozen food).

Temperature detection data from the temperature sensors 160, TS1, and TS10 are all input to the controller 105. FIG.

121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and its oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. Opening and closing of the relay 182 is performed by the control device 105 .

Drive circuits 60P and 61P drive the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. The drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to instructions from the IH control section 90. FIG.

Although FIG. 123 does not show a temperature sensor for monitoring the temperatures of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40 in the upper space 300A, such a temperature sensor is actually installed to , the temperature measurement data is always acquired by the integrated controller MC (at regular intervals), and monitored so that the temperature does not become abnormal.

As described above, the temperature detection data of various temperature sensors 160, TS1, and TS10, which measure the temperature of heating chamber 113 and the food to be cooked, are all input to control device 105. The measurement unit 158 is not provided in this second embodiment. The function of the temperature measurement unit 158 is realized by a computer program of the control device 105. FIG.

Since the heat cooker 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, first, to turn on the main power switch 97, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed. For example, if the switch is held down for several seconds, this operation is detected by the power switch controller 28 and the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54 is closed.

Therefore, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power circuit board 55 . A power supply with a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55 and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated controller MC is activated, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Also, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120 , the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105 . Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC. The integrated controller MC presumes that the user will perform microwave heating cooking, displays necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts an input for starting heating.

When the user puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 again transmits a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. do. Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects whether there is a touch input on the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

Also in this second embodiment, in the combined cooking mode KM2, microwave heating is performed first, and after heating the food to some extent, the pattern is heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and the heating is performed in the reverse order. There are three types: a pattern and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.

Further, the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 for microwave heating and oven heating performed by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B can also be executed.
Furthermore, as will be described later, a cooperative cooking mode KM3 can also be executed.

In general, microwave heating is often performed by putting the food to be cooked in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware. There is a risk that containers, tableware, etc.

In the combined cooking mode KM2, the integrated display unit 30 displays a cautionary message warning against heating a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113 . In other words, when executing the control menu "microwave grill", this caution display sentence is one type of "standby time common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the control menu of "heating" (range automatic), the control device 105 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically heats the microwave when the target temperature is reached. Stop the oscillation. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the user is notified to select the control menu (single heating cooking) of "range manual". Since the "microwave manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, even if the temperature of the food in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 are high, the cooking can be performed without any trouble. The display text displayed on such an integrated display unit 30 is also one type of the "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

When the user issues a heating start command through the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC transmits a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A. Start microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the driving circuits 177A and 177B of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129 start operating. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 123, the antenna drive motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125 . As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to heat and cook the food.

As is clear from the above description, during the period in which microwave cooking is being performed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are turned on unless "abnormal" (abnormal overheating). , not driven at all. Therefore, the power consumption of the entire heating cooker 1 can be kept low.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of the second embodiment includes an IH control section 90 that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and an oven. A control device 105 that controls both the heating source 188 and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105,
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power supply 99, and a power supply circuit (34, 36) that converts the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage,
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low-voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as power sources,
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are connected to the filter circuit 54, the power supply circuit 34, 36 is applied with power (200V power source).

This configuration simplifies the power supply configuration of the heating cooker 1 as a whole, and suppresses unnecessary noise propagation, etc., so that reliable operation can be expected.

In addition, according to this configuration, three types of heating, induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating, can be performed in one cooking device, and the cooking device is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

Next, FIG. 123 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation section 40 and integrated display section 30 of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS and 43MT for the linked cooking mode.
Each of these input keys is an input key that can be input using a change in capacitance when the user touches it lightly with a finger or the like. An input key corresponding to the input key 43M3 described in the first embodiment is not provided.

In the second embodiment, the input operating section 40 includes four of a right operating section 40R, a central operating section 40M, a left operating section 40L, and the front operating section 146. FIG. Although not shown, the operation keys (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 are located on the upper surface of the main body 110 and located on the top plate 15 as in the case of the central operation unit 40M, as in the first embodiment. , and near the right end of the top plate 15 .

The right operation unit 40R is an individual operation unit because it is for performing input operations only for the induction heating source. Similarly, the left operating section 40 is also an individual operating section.
On the other hand, a part of the central operation unit 40M is commonly used when the "cooking mode" KM3 using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is performed. An operation unit 40MC.

In the first embodiment, the input operations of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are performed in the central operation unit 40M, but in the second embodiment, the front operation unit 146 possesses these functions. are doing.

In FIG. 124, 43MS is a touch-type input key capable of instructing the start of the heating operation in the linked cooking mode KM3 in the linked cooking mode KM3 using the heating chamber 113 . This input type key 43MS is slightly different from the function of the input type key 43MS of the first embodiment, and has two functions of starting and stopping heat cooking.

When the input key 43MS is pressed once by the user, it transmits a command signal to start the heating operation to the integrated control device MC, and when it is pressed again after that, it transmits a command signal to stop the heating operation.
Depending on the number of times you operate in this order, different signals will be sent. This point is different from the input key 43MS of the first embodiment.

The screen configuration of the integrated display section 30 is also slightly different from that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two areas, a first area (left area) 30L and a second area (central area) 30M.

The reason why the two areas 30L and 30M are limited in this manner is that the integrated display section 30 displays the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the first area 30L and the additional information 331 in the second area 30M. and the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed.

43MC is not an input key that selects to use combined cooking mode KM2 using oven heat source 188 and microwave heat source 189. This input key 43MC is an input key for selecting only the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Since the input key 43MC itself lights up, the individual light-emitting portion 27M2 provided in the first embodiment is omitted in the second embodiment.

Next, FIG. 124 will be described.
124 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 53 of Embodiment 1. FIG.
An input key 43M1 is arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 provided in the central operation unit 40M.
This input key 43M1 is touched when selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Note that a push-button type switch may be used instead of the touch type key.

The input key 43MC is illuminated by a light source (not shown) such as a light-emitting diode installed below, and appears to be illuminated during the period of transition to the cooperative cooking mode.

The pair of input keys 43M1 selects the target identification information 330, in other words, the object to be cooked from among the plurality of pieces of identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed. is an input key that selects There is a pair of left and right touch keys.
Every time the left input key 43M1 is pressed, the display contents can be switched in a certain order. Each time the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen can be switched in reverse order.

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing that the operation of a heat source used is restricted during cooperative cooking;
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 125 is the "second cooperative cooking mode" described with reference to FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.

In the "second linked cooking mode" of this example, the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means HM2) is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 is operated as the first heating means HM1. make it work. At the same time as the microwave heating source 189, an oven heating source 188, which is one type of the second heating means HM2, may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 125, the second cooperative cooking mode consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking mode until the heat cooking is started by the input key 43MS.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189).
At P3, since the cooking by the second heating means HM2 is switched to the cooking by the first heating means HM1 (in this case, the induction heating source 9), the operation of the microwave heating means 189 is temporarily stopped, and the induction heating means 9 is turned on. It is a rest period until the cooking of the food is started.
P4 is a heating cooking period (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9 .

As is clear from FIG. 125, input The left operation unit 40L of the left heat source 17HL cannot be used from the time the key 43MS is used to decide to start cooking. Also, the input operation of the front operation unit 146 is restricted.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) Among the input signals from the front operation unit 147, the signal for selecting the control menu such as "warm up" is invalidated. As a result, even in the heat cooking period (cooking step 1), the front operation unit 146 can be used, but only two inputs of "stop" and "heating start" can be performed. Then, using the heating chamber 113, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 cannot perform cooking substantially unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode. Note that the heating power (power consumption) during oven heating may be changed so that it can be performed by input keys (not shown) on the front operation unit 146 .
(2) Perform processing not to recognize the input signal from the left operation unit 40L as a valid signal. As a result, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 40L cannot be used. Then, the left heating unit 17HL cannot perform induction heating cooking. It should be noted that the right heating unit 17HR can be used.

Thus, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the integrated controller MC disables the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 for free use.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted".

Further, the function of the front operation unit 147 is "restricted" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, when the "cooking process 1" of the cooperative cooking mode is started, the front operation unit 146 cannot be used to execute either the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM3 using individual heat sources. become a state.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state is released, so that the front operation unit 147 can be operated to enable the single cooking mode. However, after the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the operation of the front operation unit 146 to start the single cooking mode is restricted. The reason is that the food heated by the cooperative cooking mode is present in the heating chamber 113 .

Therefore, only when the integrated controller MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) is over, the integrated controller MC controls the microwave heating or Upon receiving an oven cooking start command, the cooking is started.

Even if the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 is opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, if the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value , there is a concern that the integrated control device MC and the control device 105 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before the independent cooking mode is executed.
For this reason, even after the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the control menu of "range automatic" in the control menu cannot be executed immediately. A range manual control menu can be implemented. Therefore, in parallel with the execution of the cooking process 2, other cooking (for example, thawing and warming of “frozen rice”) can be performed in the heating chamber 113 .

Next, FIG. 126 will be described.
FIG. 126 shows the display contents of the cooperative operation section 40MC dedicated to cooperative cooking provided in the central operation section 40M and the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
The integrated display section 30 shows three types of display screens 11A to 11C.

The cooperative cooking mode KM3 implemented in FIG. 126 corresponds to both the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode" described with reference to FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.
For convenience of explanation, the case of the "first cooperative cooking mode" will be explained below. In other words, this is the case where the induction heating source 9 is used for the first cooking step.

When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the right input control device 23 that processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M notifies the integrated control device MC of the input result.
The integrated control device MC grasps the use state of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR from the information of the IH control unit 90, and sets "permission condition 1" and "permission condition" 2 as described in the first embodiment. First determine if it is satisfied.

When neither the left heating section 17HL nor the right heating section 17HR is used, the integrated control device MC confirms that the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition 2" are satisfied.
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30SP.

The display screen 11C of FIG. 126 is the first screen displayed through the above process.
That is, the name "hamburger" is displayed as the identification information 330 in the first area 30L.
When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 of the first specific screen 30SP, that is, at the first stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit Both selection marks 334L are displayed. This is because both the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR can be used as described above.

As shown in FIG. 126, the default setting gives priority to the left heating unit 17HL. This is because the left heating section 17HL uses the IH coil 17 having a larger diameter than the right heating section 17HL. In other words, it is possible to handle the object to be heated N having a pan bottom larger than that of the right heating unit 17HR.

For this reason, the left heating section selection mark 334L displayed with "left" in white characters is selected.
If the state of the left heating unit 17HL can be changed to the cooperative cooking mode, the input key 43MS surrounded by a dotted line circle can be pressed to prompt an input operation. A dotted circle indicates that the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

As shown in FIG. 126, the first specific screen 30SP provides the user with additional information 331 regarding the start of cooperative cooking of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger). In the example of FIG. 126, it is recommended to select either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL.

When the user wants to confirm the cooperative cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR instead of the left heating unit 17HL, the user can touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M.
Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 of the two left and right key operation units is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screens 11C to 11B.

On the display screen 11B, the left heating section selection mark 334L disappears, and only the right heating section selection mark 334R is displayed, for example, in white letters such as "RIGHT". Even at this time, the input key 43MS is waiting for an input from the user, so the individual light emitting section 27M6 is blinking.

As the additional information 331, for example, "Press the start button to confirm" is displayed. This means that the cooperative cooking mode is determined by the input key 43MS. That is, the heating source to be used first can be determined as the right heating unit 17HR.

When the user wants to confirm the cooperative cooking mode using the left heating unit 17HL instead of the right heating unit 17HR, the user can touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M.
Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 of the two left and right input keys 43M2 is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11B to 11A.

On the display screen 11A, the right heating section selection mark 334R disappears, and only the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed as, for example, "LEFT" in white. Even at this time, the input key 43MS is waiting for an input from the user, so the individual light emitting section 27M6 is blinking. As the additional information 331, for example, "Press the start button to decide" is displayed.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, the second embodiment discloses a heating cooker related to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, the heating cooker 1 disclosed in Embodiment 2 is
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit (central operation unit 40M, front operation unit 146) 40,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means H1 is operated alone,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heat sources of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically advance the cooking process;
A cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. and
The single cooking mode KM1 determines the control pattern of the first heating means HM1 and starts the heating operation.
In the combined cooking mode KM2, a heating operation is started by determining a heating source and a control pattern to be used in the second heating means HM2,
In the linked cooking mode KM3, the heating operation is started by determining the food to be heated by the input means.
It is a configuration characterized by

Due to this configuration, two or more heating means HM1, HM2 can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, the second embodiment discloses a cooking device related to the second disclosure as follows.
That is, the heating cooker 1 disclosed in Embodiment 2 is
a heating chamber 113;
an integrated display unit 30;
outside the heating chamber 113, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2. has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the process,
When the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and during the period in which the standby initial screen is displayed, ,
(1) when receiving a first command, display identification information 330 of at least one cooking object that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the integrated display unit 30;
(2) when receiving a second command before receiving the first command, displaying information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode KM1 on the integrated display unit 30;
It is a configuration characterized by

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform each cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In the second embodiment, the same configuration as in the first embodiment can be expected to have the same effect as described in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 127 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heat cooker 1 and the type of heat cooking for disclosing the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a time chart 1 showing timings for starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. FIG.
129 is a time chart 2 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. FIG. FIG. 130 is a time chart 3 showing timings for starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. FIG.
FIG. 131 is a time chart 4 showing timings for starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. FIG. FIG. 132 is a time chart 5 showing timings for starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. FIG.
Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations described in Embodiments 1 and 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In the heat cooker 1 shown in FIG. 127, the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is basically started at the same timing as the start of heat cooking.

As shown in FIG. 127, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are operated in the following pattern.
Induction cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.
Microwave cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated.
Oven heat cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 is operated.
The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated.

As described above, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in any of the three cooking modes of induction heating cooking, microwave heating cooking, and oven heating cooking.

In the case of microwave heating cooking, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated differently from the first embodiment.
Even in the case of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated to prevent the upper unit 100 from overheating.

The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 and a power supply circuit board 55, and the electronic components (for example, the transformer 57) mounted on these circuit boards are subjected to either microwave heating or oven heating. Even if power is supplied, the temperature rises.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

In the case of oven heating cooking, the third cooling fan 128 is operated. This is the same as the first embodiment.
However, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate. This point is different from the first embodiment. In the case of oven heating cooking, the magnetron 122, which is the object of cooling by the fourth cooling fan 129, is not driven, so the heat radiation portion 122H does not become hot.

The operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is started when each heating source starts heating operation. In the induction heating source 9, if the preheating operation is started, the operation is started in synchronization with the start of the preheating operation.

The timing of the end of operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is partially different as described below because the objects to be cooled and the cooling air paths of each cooling fan are different.

Next, FIGS. 128-132 will be described.
Solid line arrows in FIGS. 128 to 132 indicate periods from the start to the end of operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129. FIG.
A dashed arrow following the solid line indicates "additional operating time for heat dissipation", which will be described below. Note that the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 do not actually stop operating at the end of the solid line arrow, but continue to operate for the additional operating time.

In the third embodiment, the time from start to finish of operation of each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: Starts operating at the timing when the heating operation by each heat source is started.
In the case of induction heating cooking, the end of the operation is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is completed. In this case, the "radiation time Th1" is determined in consideration of the time during which the high-heat portion such as the top plate 15 during induction heating cooking can be cooled.
During induction heating cooking, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is determined according to the value determined by the "product" of the length of the heating operation time and the maximum heat power used (power consumption of the inverter circuit). , 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes. This is done by the IH control section 90 .
On the other hand, during microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking, the first cooling fan 60 starts radiating heat from the point in time when those heating operations are completed.

Second cooling fan 61: The “time Th2 of heat dissipation operation” is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60 . This is done by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90 . The start of operation is the same timing as the first cooling fan 60 .

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "Heat dissipation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation ends. That is, this "time Tm2 of heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes. This operational control is performed by the microwave heating control section 130 .
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: Since the microwave oscillation part 122 is not driven, the heat radiation part 122H also does not become hot. Therefore, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: “Heat dissipation operation time Tm1” is the same as that of the fourth cooling fan 129 . Further, the start and end of operation are controlled by the microwave heating control section 130 as with the fourth cooling fan 129 .
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: The measurement of the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is repeatedly performed at regular intervals by at least one of the temperature sensor TS2 and the temperature sensor 160, but the outside temperature of the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 may be added with a thermistor-type temperature sensor or the like that measures by contact (see temperature sensor TS10 described in FIG. 123 of Embodiment 3).
All temperature measurement data is sent to the controller 105 . Ultimately, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to operate until an operation end command to the fourth cooling fan 129 is issued. In other words, the “time Tm2 for heat dissipation operation” changes from time to time.

Next, each heat cooking mode will be described.
FIG. 128 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9 and the cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time, finish the microwave heating operation, and operate until after the notification 6 is given by the notification unit AN. "Heat radiation operation time Th1" and "Th2" start counting at least when microwave heating is finished.

As can be seen from FIG. 128 , in the case of microwave heating cooking, the “heat radiation operation time Tm2” of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be longer than the “heat radiation operation time Tm1” of the third cooling fan 128 . This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). In other words, when microwave cooking is performed once, hot air remains in the heating chamber 113, and it takes time to cool it to normal temperature.

In FIG. 128, notification 1 notifies that induction heating cooking has started. Alternatively, it notifies that the preheating operation has started.
Notification FA1 is notification of the first reference information (reference information 1) described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 61). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement result of "elapsed time TN1" indicating that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and "rising temperature TN1" obtained by measuring the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA1 also includes prompting the user to turn over the food to be cooked. Since the IH control unit 90 does not determine that the object to be cooked is abnormal even when the object to be cooked is turned over in the object to be heated N (for example, a metal pot), the induction heating operation continues.

Notification 3 is for notifying that the induction heating has ended (or that the cooking process 1 has ended).
The “transition period” (heating rest period) TR shown in FIG. 128 is the same as that described in the first embodiment.
After induction cooking is performed on the top plate 15, it is necessary to move the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 in order to shift to microwave heating.

The transition period TR provides time for such movements. The maximum duration of this transition period TR is determined in advance by the integrated controller MC.

Notification 4 is for notifying that microwave heating cooking has started as a result of the user's command from the central operation unit 40M.
Substantially simultaneously with this notification 4, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating.

Notification FA2 is notification of the second reference information (reference information 2) described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 61). For example, the notification timing is determined from the measurement result of "elapsed time TN2", which is three minutes after the start of microwave heating, and "rising temperature TN2", which is the magnitude of the temperature rise.

Notification 6 is for notifying that microwave heating has ended (or that cooking step 2 has ended).

Next, FIG. 129 will be described.
129 shows the case where the cooking process 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking process 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time that the microwave heating source 189 starts operating.

The fourth cooling fan 129 starts operating at the same time that the microwave heating source 189 starts operating.
The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 ends after the "time Tm2 of the heat dissipation operation" has elapsed from the end of the operation of the microwave heating source 189 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once the microwave heating operation (cooking step 1) is finished. The operation continues until after the heating operation (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop operating after the "heat radiation operation times Th1" and "Th2" have passed since the induction heating operation (cooking step 2).

In FIG. 129, notification FA3 is the same as the notification of the third reference information (reference information 3) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement result of "elapsed time TN3" indicating that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and "rising temperature TN3" obtained by measuring the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, notification FA5 is the same as the notification of the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement result of "elapsed time TN4" indicating that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and "increased temperature TN4" obtained by measuring the magnitude of the temperature rise. Note that the content of the notification FA4 includes prompting the user to turn over the food to be cooked (at the time of induction heating in the cooking step 2).

Next, FIG. 130 will be described.
130 shows the case where the cooking process 1 is performed with the oven heating source 188 and the cooking process 2 is performed with the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time when the oven heating source 188 starts operating.

The third cooling fan 128 starts operating at the same time that the oven heating source 188 starts operating.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 is finished after the "heat radiation operation time Tm1" has elapsed from the end of the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once the oven heating operation (cooking step 1) is finished. The operation continues until after the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all during the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1). The cooking process 2 is also not operated.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop operating after the "heat radiation operation times Th1" and "Th2" have passed since the induction heating operation (cooking step 2). In FIG. 130, the period from notification 1 to notification 3 for the fourth cooling fan 129 is indicated by a dashed arrow. This indicates that you are not driving during this period.

In FIG. 130, notification FA6 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement result of "elapsed time TN6" indicating that five minutes have passed since the heating chamber 113 started heating, and "increased temperature TN6" obtained by measuring the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, notification FA7 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 60 and 63). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement result of "elapsed time TN7" indicating that 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of heating and "rising temperature TN7" obtained by measuring the magnitude of the temperature rise. Note that the content of the notification FA7 includes prompting the user to turn over the food to be cooked and furthermore that the cooking process 2 will soon end (announcement).

Next, FIG. 131 will be described.
FIG. 131 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is performed with the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking process 2 is performed with the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Although the heating operation time of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is exactly the same, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Also, the two heating sources do not have to end their operation at the same timing.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time as the cooking process 1 starts.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating at the same time as the cooking process 1 starts.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is finished after the "heat radiation operation time Tm1" and the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" have elapsed from the end of the cooking process 1, respectively.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once the cooking process 1 is finished. The operation continues until after the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop operating after the 'radiation operation time Th1' and the 'radiation operation time Th2' have passed since the cooking process 2 is completed.

In FIGS. 131 and 132, notification FA8 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 62 and 64). For example, the notification timing is determined from the measurement result of "elapsed time TN8", which is five minutes after the heating chamber 113 started heating, and "rising temperature TN8", which is the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 131 and FIG. 132 described later, notification FA9 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 62 and 64). For example, the notification timing is determined based on the measurement results of "elapsed time TN9", which is five minutes after the start of heating, and "rising temperature TN9", which is the magnitude of the temperature rise. Note that the content of the notification FA9 includes not only the notification of the temperature and the elapsed time, but also the fact that the cooking process 2 will soon end (notice).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated later than the third cooling fan 128.
This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). That is, when oven cooking is performed once, the heating chamber 113 is continuously heated for up to 60 minutes.
Therefore, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 as a whole becomes high (for example, 200° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113 .

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is assumed to be high from the beginning when microwave heating cooking is performed immediately next time.
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the microwave heating source 189 cannot be used for “warming (automatic microwave)” cooking as described in the first embodiment. This is because the "warm" control menu adopts a control that automatically stops microwave irradiation when the food is heated to, for example, 80° C. (default value). Therefore, in order not to confuse the user, for example, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is 80° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform error processing and not to accept heat cooking. Alternatively, the notification unit AN may notify that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is lowered by operating the cooling fan 129 .

In the above description, it is assumed that the airflow rate (airflow capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 during cooking is constant. In some cases, changes such as reducing the amount of air blown may be performed. Also, the capacity variable operation may be performed such that the blowing volume is reduced when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when it is higher.

The "control program" that realizes the operating conditions for determining the operating time (operation start, operation stop) of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 and the air flow rate is the IH control unit 90 and the microwave heating control. It is not limited to the form stored in the unit 130 or the like (see FIG. 30 of Embodiment 1).
For example, they may be collectively stored in the integrated control device MC as a fan control program. Also, as in the second embodiment, the control device 105 may control the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

As is clear from the above description, in the third embodiment as well, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are operated as follows.
(1) Four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 were operated during all the heat cooking operations (cooking steps) by the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188;
(2) When only the heating operation is performed by the microwave generation source 122, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated. Ta.
(3) In the case of the single heating operation of the oven heating source 188 only, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and furthermore, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 128 are operated. The cooling fan 129 was running.
(4) One control menu (RG continuous cooking) is executed by designating an operation for sequentially and automatically executing only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and only the heating operation by the oven heating source 188. During this period, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 were operated.
(3) Only the heating operation by the IH coil 17 is designated by the input operation unit 40, and the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated while one control menu is being executed. Also, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not operate.

According to such a configuration, when the user selects one cooking menu or control menu and starts cooking, various cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are activated when induction heating or microwave heating is completed. The operation is temporarily stopped and the operation is restarted, and the mode is smoothly shifted from the end of the heat cooking (cooking process) to the heat radiation operation mode.

(Modification of Embodiment 3)
FIG. 132 shows a modified example of a time chart showing timings for starting and ending operation of the cooling fan of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 126-130.

FIG. 132 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is performed with the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking process 2 is performed with the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative heating cooking. Although the heating operation time of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is exactly the same, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Also, the heating operations of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have to be completed at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 132, this example is characterized in that the "tenth reference information" FA10 is notified by the notification unit AN during the transition period TR.

The tenth reference information FA10 can acquire the recommended information 338 described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 113 and 114). In particular, it is notification information corresponding to step SG7 in FIG. Therefore, the individual food information 339 that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 that has finished the cooking process 1 can be known on the integrated display section 30 .

The timing for acquiring the tenth reference information FA10 is during the transition period FR as shown in FIG. That is, since neither the cooking process 1 nor the cooking process 2 is executed during this transition period, when the input key 47 arranged on the input operation unit 40 is pressed, the reference information FA10 is transmitted to the heating cooker 1. may be set so that

Alternatively, the speech synthesizer 95 may guide the user to press a specific input key in the central operation unit 40M, and when the input key is pressed, the tenth reference information FA10 may be acquired. . Moreover, even if the user does not issue any command, the reference information FA10 may be automatically notified after the integrated control device MC enters the transition period TR, thereby further reducing the burden on the user.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, in the third embodiment as well, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, after finishing the cooking process 1, during the transition period TR, it is notified that another cooking can be performed (simultaneously with the cooking process 2) in the heating chamber 113, It is designed to notify the information of ingredients to be used for "another cooking" according to a user's instruction or automatically (see FA10 in FIG. 132).

For this reason, for example, one cooking A in the cooperative control mode enters the stage of the cooking process 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, and in the heating chamber 113, cooking other than that cooking is performed. B can be executed concurrently. In other words, when cooking A is a side dish and cooking B is a staple food (for example, rice) in one meal, cooking B is not started after finishing cooking A, but cooking A is performed in parallel. and Cooking B can be completed. As a result, the overall cooking time can be shortened, improving the user's convenience.

Embodiment 3 has disclosed a heating cooker 1 having the following configuration.
i.e.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started with a time lag, and the microwave A combined cooking mode KM2 in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started at the same time or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the linked cooking mode KM3, and when terminating the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113, the integrated control device MC terminates the cooking process before or after the termination. After that, the notification unit notifies that cooking different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed using the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 (acquisition of reference information FA10). do,
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used. It is possible to provide a highly efficient heating cooker.

Furthermore, when the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 is finished, it is notified that the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used to perform cooking other than the cooperative cooking mode. For this reason, it is expected that the user can be notified of time-saving cooking that the user is unaware of, can cook efficiently, and can improve the user's convenience.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 3 (FIGS. 128 to 132), the following heating cooker 1 is disclosed.
i.e.
an induction heating source 9 capable of performing a preheating process for the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
A cooperative control mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the cooperative control mode KM3 is set, the cooking process 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the food contained in the heating chamber 113, and after the cooking process 1 is completed, the top A cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induction-heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on a plate can be reserved,
When a reservation for heat cooking is made in the cooperative control mode KM3,
(1) the induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step;
(2) during the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113;
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source to finish the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 is started on the object N preheated by the induction heating source 9 (in response to a start command from the user). ) and
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, automatically reporting information indicating the progress of the cooking process;
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode that can also perform preheating operation can handle a wide range of cooking. can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is automatically notified to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking due to the user temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation during the cooking process.

According to the third embodiment, it can be expected that the heating cooker 1 has more types of heating sources, but further improves the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 3 (FIGS. 127 to 132), the following heating cooker 1 is disclosed.
i.e.
When a reservation for heat cooking is made in cooperative control mode,
(1) the induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step;
(2) during the preheating process, the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) can start and end the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113;
(3) After finishing the cooking step 1, preheating is performed without the user operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M). The cooking step 2 can be started by placing the object to be cooked on the object N to be heated,
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, automatically reporting information indicating the progress of the cooking process;
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the coordinated cooking mode in which preheating can also be performed enables a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking. .

Furthermore, since the information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is automatically notified to the user, the user's anxiety can be eliminated, and the heating operation can be temporarily stopped for confirmation during the process. , failures such as impairing execution of efficient cooperative cooking can be avoided. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Furthermore, the preheating process of the induction heating source is started before the cooking process 1, and during this preheating process, the cooking process 1 can be started and ended by the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M); after finishing the preheating process by induction heating without operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M). The cooking process 2 can be started using the object N to be heated. Therefore, the user's input operation can be reduced, and a user-friendly heating cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 3, the notification unit AN displays a dedicated input screen (first specific screen) 30SP for setting heat cooking in the cooperative cooking mode,
The input screen 30SP displays the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2 in the order of execution.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, the input screen 30SP allows the user to easily understand the cooperative cooking process, and avoids the user's hesitation or mistake in operation. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Embodiment 4.
133 to 136 show a (built-in composite type) heating cooker according to Embodiment 4 of the present disclosure.
FIG. 133 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the heating cooker. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 133 and an external information management device or the like. 135 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L in the heating cooker of FIG. 133. FIG. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation section 40MC and the display information of the integrated display section 30 and the left side display section 30L in the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In the heating cooker 1 shown in the fourth embodiment, there are three display units arranged on the upper surface of the main body 10, but there is no difference among the three in terms of display function, effective area of the display screen, and planar shape.
In other words, the functions of the integrated display section (central display section) 30 shown in the first embodiment are also provided in the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R in the fourth embodiment. However, the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46) at startup immediately after the main power is supplied to the heating cooker 1 is displayed only on the integrated display section 30 in the center.

A first specific screen 30SP, a second specific screen 30SC, and a third specific screen 30ST are displayed at appropriate timings on the centrally arranged integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R. However, as will be described below, the integrated display unit 30 in the center has priority in display timing.

In the integrated display section 30, display relating to the "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1" relating to the range/grill is performed.
The left display section 31L displays the left heating section 17HL and the left operation section 40L.
The right display section 31R displays the right heating section 17HR and the right operation section 40R. Note that FIG. 133 omits illustration of the input key 47 for instructing wireless communication with the outside.

The integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed to display related information when driving in the cooperative control mode KM3.

In the heating cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, the cooking courses can be broadly divided into a range/grill-related "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1" course and a "cooperative cooking mode KM3" course. There are two courses to choose.

As shown in FIG. 133, a central operation unit 40M is provided with a cooperative operation unit 40MC. As in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC performs four types of cooking: single heating cooking by the microwave heating source 189, single heating cooking by the oven heating source 188, combined (heating) cooking, and cooperative (heating) cooking. It is a collection of various input keys shared by forms. In FIG. 133, the range of the cooperative operation section 40MC is indicated by a dashed frame.

FIG. 134 will be described.
In the fourth embodiment, the information management device 411 does not exist inside the house HA. A router 419 is installed inside the house HA, and the cooker 1 is connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 via the router 419 . The information management device 411 having the home gateway function of the first embodiment is wirelessly connected to the Internet 416 . The information management device 411 may be composed of one or more server devices. Servers may be distributed for major parts such as storage, retrieval, and information processing.

In FIG. 134, steps SK1 to SK11 show main operations of the integrated control device MC of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
FIG. 134 shows the operation steps for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and shows the period from when execution of the cooperative cooking mode is determined until the cooking process 2 is finished.

When execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is determined, the content of the execution (for example, including information that the food to be cooked is a hamburger) is notified by the notification unit AN, and is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK1). . In the following description, since cooking device 1 and information processing device 411 can communicate with each other, the destination of information transmitted from cooking device 1 is not specified.

Next, the start of the heat cooking operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is notified, and the wireless communication section 49 transmits the information to the outside (step SK2).
If the cooking requires preheating, the start of the preheating operation is notified, and the wireless communication section 49 transmits to the outside (step SK3).

Next, it notifies that the cooking process 1 in the cooperative control mode has actually started, and transmits it to the outside from the wireless communication section 49 (step SK4).

Next, in the cooking process 1, when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has passed since induction heating was started, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified. Further, the content of this notification is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication section 49 (step SK5). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 1 is notified (step SK5).

Next, the notification information for step SK5 is received from the outside (step SK6). The source of this notification information may be the information processing terminal 418 described in the first embodiment.

The information received at step SK6 may include, for example, a remote control signal such as reducing the heating power. Depending on the content of the received report information, the report unit AN reports it to the user. Especially in the case of remote signals, annunciation is necessary so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the user.

Next, when the cooking process 1 is automatically finished, the contents thereof are notified by the notification part AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking process 1 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is made. Then, notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK7).

At the stage of step SK7, the heating operation is halted and the transition period TR is entered.
Then, when the user prepares for the cooking process 2 and commands the start of the cooking process 2, the notifying unit AN notifies that the cooking process 2 has started after the transition period TR ends. Also, it is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication section 49 (step SK8). In this case, the content of the notification includes information on the heat source of the cooking process 2. When the cooking is started with the timer set, the set time information of the timer is also included.

Next, in the cooking process 2, for example, when a predetermined time (second time TN1) has passed since the microwave heating was started, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified. Further, the contents of this notification are transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication section 49 (step SK9). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 2 is notified (step SK9).

Next, the notification information for step SK9 is received from the outside (step SK10). This received information may include, for example, a "remote control signal" such as reducing firepower.
Depending on the content of the notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user of the information. The "remote control signal" may be issued from the information processing terminal 418 described in the first embodiment.

Next, when the cooking process 2 is automatically finished, the contents thereof are notified by the notification part AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking process 2 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is made. Then, notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK11).

As is clear from the above description, the contents of the cooperation investigation of the heating cooker 1 are transmitted to the outside in real time. The progress of heating and cooking can be grasped at a certain place. Therefore, especially in the cooperative cooking mode, there are cases where cooking is relatively long, lasting more than an hour. It is also possible to monitor with the terminal device 418 .

If the remote control signal to the heat cooker 1 from the outside is limited to two, that is, to lower the heating power and to stop the heat cooking operation, an erroneous operation from the outside may cause the heat cooker 1 to There is no concern that the will misbehave.

Next, FIG. 135 will be described.
The cooperative operation section 40MC and the integrated display section 30 operate in the order of steps SX1 to SX6.
As described in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation section 40MC is arranged at the center of the input operation section 40 which is horizontally long on the upper surface of the main body 10 .
The arrangement of various input keys on the input operation unit 40 is the same as in the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

In order to select the "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1" related to the range/grill, select the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR course using the induction heating source 9 and the central operation unit 40M (linkage operation unit 40MC). ) using either or both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

A case of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 for cooking will be described below.
In FIG. 135, first, the input key 43MC of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to transmit a command signal for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC1). Next, upon receiving this signal, the integrated control device MC displays at least the integrated display section 30 (SC2).

At step SC2, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
At least the following three pieces of information are displayed simultaneously on the first specific screen 30SP. You may display in a form like a list.
(1) Identification information 330 for each food to be cooked in cooperative cooking mode KM3
(2) Cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2) and preheating process (3) Heat source used and heating unit (in the case of induction heating source 9)

The user operates the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M to select the "identification information" 330 that specifies only one menu (kind) of the food to be cooked in one cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC2). . On the first specific screen 30SP, as described in the first embodiment, it is desirable to simultaneously display a plurality of identification information 300 and identification information 330A and 330B of the next candidate to be cooked.

Next, while the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired food to be cooked is displayed at a predetermined position (such as the central portion of the first area 30L) of the first specific screen 30SP, the second area 30M, the third Control conditions such as heating temperature and heating power displayed in area 30R are selected by input keys 43M2 and 43M3 (SC3).

Thereafter, by pressing the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation section 40MC, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is confirmed (SC4).
Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started (SC5). , information indicating the presence or absence of the cooking process and the preheating process is displayed (SC5).

In the fourth embodiment, the operation program for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 defines the following two types of sequences according to the food to be cooked, as in the first embodiment.
(1) A pattern in which the induction heating source 9 is first used and subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188 .
(2) A pattern in which at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9 .
The pattern (2) of using at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 first includes a pattern of starting the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 first. (Cooking of “fried chicken” described in Embodiment 1. See FIGS. 62 and 65).

The example of FIG. 135 is a pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188 is used first in the cooking step 1. Next, the induction heating source 9 in charge of the cooking process 2 is a pattern that performs cooking that requires a preheating operation.

The display operation is started by the integrated display section 30 before the other two display sections (31L, 31R).
The integrated display section 30 displays the contents of the cooking process 1 . However, since the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 in charge of the cooking process 2 is also started, for example, when the cooking process 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL, the left display unit 31L displays that the preheating process has started. .

As described above, when the preheating process is started, the left display section 31L dedicated to the left heating section 17HL is activated to display that the preheating process has started (SY1). After that, the preheating temperature is displayed as, for example, "200° C.", and it is also displayed that preheating is in progress (SY2).
After that, the cooking process 1, the transition period TR, and the cooking process 2 are performed, which are omitted in FIG.

The operation input procedure and display order shown in FIG. 136 are basically the same as in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, when the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 1, the operation input procedure is as follows, which is different from the first embodiment.

FIG. 136 shows a case where a cooking menu different from that shown in FIG. 135 is performed.
Specifically, this is the case of cooking "fried chicken" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
In the case of "fried chicken", the cooking step 1 is performed with the induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is in charge of operations up to the step of selecting the "identification information" 330 of one cooperative cooking menu (step SC2) by operating the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC. . That is, the identification information 330 indicating one of the linked cooking menus (for example, "fried chicken") is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the first specific screen 30SP is displayed), and then one corresponding to the desired cooking item is displayed. The steps up to the step of selecting the identification information 330 with the input key 43M1 are performed by the cooperative operation unit 40MC.

If the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is in the cooperative cooking mode specified in the cooking process 1 at the stage of step SC2, subsequent input commands cannot be performed by the cooperative operating unit 40MC.

That is, when the left heating unit 17HL is used in the cooking process 1 for the (coordinated cooking) menu (for example, "fried chicken") of the coordinated cooking mode selected in step SC2, the subsequent input operation is the left operation. 40L.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the left display portion 31L. Then, on the first specific screen 30SP, characters indicating that the cooking of the cooperative cooking menu will be performed are displayed (step SX1).

Next, control conditions such as the heating intensity (thermal power) and heating time displayed on the first specific screen 30SP are selected using the various input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L (step SX2).

Further, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is operated. As a result, the start of the cooking process of one linked cooking menu is commanded (SX3).
After that, it is displayed that the heat cooking operation is started and that the cooking process 1 has started (SX4), and furthermore, the fact that the cooperative cooking is being performed and information such as the cooking process are displayed (SX5).
On the other hand, the integrated display unit 30 displays information indicating that cooperative cooking has started, information indicating the heat source for the cooking process, and the like (SC12).

Due to the configuration as described above, when the object to be heated N is placed on the left heating unit 17HL before the cooking process 1 is started, the user's body is positioned slightly to the left of the center of the heating cooker 1. That is, it should be located in front of the left operation section 40L.
Therefore, the cooking of the linked cooking menu can be started by operating the left operation unit 40L as it is, and the user can operate from the position facing the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L from the start of the cooking process 1. There is

If the left heating unit 17HL has already been used for another cooking, the reason for not being able to perform cooperative cooking is displayed to the user through the integrated display unit 30 in the step of selecting the identification information 330 (SC2). Notify (the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies in the same way).

At step SX1, the user knows that the first cooking process 1 will be performed in the left heating unit 17HL. The user is guided by the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the left display unit 31L so as to put the object to be cooked on or inside the object to be heated N such as a dedicated frying pan or pot (speech synthesizer 95 However, the same notice will be given).
Therefore, after placing the food to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL, the user operates the input key 43L1 of the left operating unit 30L to issue a command to start the cooking process of one linked cooking menu (SX3). .

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process 1 (first cooking process) of the linked cooking menu has started. Since the user concentrates on the left display section 31L and the left operation section 40L during the cooking process 1, all basic information is displayed on the left display section 31L.

When the stage of the cooking process 2 using the heating chamber 113 is reached, the display is changed to center on the integrated display section 30 . Further, the operation (heating operation control) is changed to the central operation unit 40M located in front of the integrated display unit 30 .

Specific functions of the fourth embodiment will be described.
When the input key 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC shown in FIG. 133 is pressed, the function setting menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30. Up to this point, the heating cooker 1 described in the first embodiment is the same.
In the fourth embodiment, the following functions can be set for the integrated control device MC.

(1) Narrowing down to specific information transmissions to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. For example, in the case of cooking such as “tempura” or “fried chicken” where cooking oil is added to the object to be heated during cooking, in order to maintain the monitoring function, a specific cooking menu (such as , "Tempura" or "Karaage"), the transmission steps SK3 and SK5 shown in FIG. 134 are performed each time at a constant temperature step. For example, when the preheating temperature is set to 180°C and preheating is started, the process of temperature rise is notified in detail such as 160°C and 170°C.

(2) Narrowing down the inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 to a specific range (for example, frozen foods). In this case, "freezing temperature information" and "meat" may be further specified in the condition setting, and as a result, only "meat whose freezing temperature is lower than the specified value" may be collected.
For example, as a method of aging meat in a refrigerator, an independent cooling space (room) is provided in the refrigerator, meat such as beef, pork, chicken, etc. is placed in the freezer compartment, and the temperature of the air in the freezer compartment is adjusted to 2 C. to 5.degree. C. (hereinafter referred to as "ripening temperature"), humidity is maintained at 87% to 98%, and exposure to cold air is known in a certain range (circulating cold air volume). Therefore, by collecting information on foodstuffs stored in a specific aging temperature range in this way, the user's convenience is further improved.

(3) Setting of expert mode and beginner mode.
When the beginner mode is selected, all the notifications to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 134 are performed.
When the expert mode is set, SK7 is limited to the transmission of information to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. However, the content displayed on the first specific screen 30SP should be the same between the expert mode and the beginner mode.
(4) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 includes information on the storage period and freshness.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-124053 discloses that food stored in a refrigerator is photographed, a plurality of food images are stored in association with the photographed image and the photographing date, and these images are reproduced from the same image with different photographing date. A refrigerator has been proposed that extracts the difference, determines that the food has been stored for a certain period of time or longer, and estimates the storage period if there is a portion where there is no difference for a certain period of time.

In addition, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-89913, a food image of food stored in the storage room is extracted from the image in the storage room of the refrigerator, and the food image is obtained from the temporal change of the food image. A refrigerator has been proposed that generates information about deterioration of corresponding food and transmits the food image and the information about deterioration to an external portable information terminal device via a communication device.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, if the information on the refrigerator side as described above is acquired, the user's convenience is further improved.

Although the reference information 1 (FA1) and the reference information 2 (FA2) of the fourth embodiment were not described in detail, the elapsed time from the start of the cooking process 1 as described in the first to third embodiments ( In addition to the first time TN1) and the elapsed temperature, as shown in FIG. may be added to the reference information FA1 and FA2. Alternatively, notification (display or voice guidance) may be provided instead. A refrigerator according to the present invention comprises a storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for capturing an image of the interior of the storage chamber by capturing an image of the interior of the storage chamber, and an image of the interior of the storage chamber obtained by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit, wherein the control device extracts the food image from a temporal change of the food image. Information about deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information about deterioration are transmitted to the portable terminal via the communication device. A refrigerator according to the present invention comprises a storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for capturing an image of the interior of the storage chamber by capturing an image of the interior of the storage chamber, and an image of the interior of the storage chamber obtained by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit, wherein the control device extracts the food image from a temporal change of the food image. Information about deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information about deterioration are transmitted to the portable terminal via the communication device.

As is clear from the above description, even in the heating cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be expected for the parts having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment.

In this Embodiment 4, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
i.e.
an integrated display unit 30;
a left display portion 31L and a right display portion 31R of the induction heating source 9;
an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L;
A central operation unit 40M for giving commands from a user to the integrated control device MC, a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R,
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M has a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC2), and allows the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed cooperative cooking modes KM3. It has a function (step SC3) and a function (step SC4) for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Further, when the heating unit used in the cooking process 1 is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to be executed, the integrated control device MC
(1) Display information on the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the dedicated display section 31L of the (left heating section 17HL).
(2) The cooking process is displayed on the left display section 31L (step SX1).
(3) Display control conditions such as heating power and temperature on the display section 31L, and select the control conditions on the left operation section 40L (step SX2).
(4) Send an input command to start the cooperative cooking mode from the left operation unit 40L (step SX3).
It was a configuration with the function of

As a result, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 1, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is clarified up to the display stage of the cooperative cooking mode. When the cooking process 1 is started by a command, the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 30L are used to change the control conditions, end the cooking process 1, display related information, and the like.
For this reason, the effect of being able to provide the heating cooker 1 with good usability is acquired.

In addition, between the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL, the contents of the linked cooking mode to be displayed, the display format (including the display format of the identification information 330), and the configuration of the first specific screen 30SP are displayed. If they are the same, the user's misunderstanding will disappear, but they do not necessarily have to be the same.
This is because there may be a case where the integrated display section 30 and the display section 31L have different display areas, different physical display principles, and the like.

Embodiment 5.
137 to 139 show a (built-in composite type) heating cooker according to Embodiment 5 of the present disclosure.
FIG. 137 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the heating cooker. FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing main control function parts of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 137. As shown in FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 137 from when the main power is turned on until the cooking mode or control menu is selected. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 shown in the fifth embodiment is characterized in that the linked cooking mode KM3 can be preferentially displayed on the display means (integrated display section 30) by user's setting.

That is, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 5 is
a heating chamber 113;
outside the heating chamber 113, an induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 188, oven heating source 189) for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 as selection means for selecting a cooperative cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode prepared for each type of food to be cooked, and a control menu shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked;
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40 and controls the integrated display unit 30, which is one of display means, the first heating means HM1, and the second heating means HM2, respectively;
A function setting unit 550 that limits the function of the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC controls a combined cooking mode KM2 that uses one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in combination, a cooking process that uses the first heating means HM1, A function of executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a function of controlling the integrated display section 30 according to the information set by the function setting section. and
After the main power is supplied and the integrated display unit 30 is activated, the integrated control device MC performs the function when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected or when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened. When the permission condition preset by the setting unit is satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP displaying the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
It is a configuration characterized by

Details of the fifth embodiment will be described below.
In FIG. 137, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit, which has a dot-matrix rectangular liquid crystal display screen 30D. The basic configuration of this integrated display unit 30 is as described in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 137, the leftmost input key 43KP is a key (button) portion of a function setting input switch (not shown) that enables various operations and displays of the entire heating cooker 1 to be set as desired by the user. be.
When the input key 43KP is pressed after the switch 97 of the main power switch 98 is pressed to supply the main power to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, switches to the "function mode", and the display of the integrated display section 30 is performed. The screen 30D changes to a display screen configuration displaying a "function setting menu".

There are at least the following four "function setting menus".
(1) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption is selected from four levels of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(2) Setting of display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of cooperative cooking mode KM3 (3) Each control of combined cooking mode KM2 (4) After turning on the main power switch 97, the heating chamber 113 is turned on. Setting to automatically display the cooking menu or control menu of the cooking mode used last time on the integrated display unit 30 when the door 114 is opened.

FIG. 137 sets whether or not to preferentially display each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooking menu or control menu of the previously used cooking mode. shows an example.

In FIG. 137, 340 is a title display portion for function setting. From this title display portion 340, it can be understood that it is the setting scene of the cooking menu to be displayed preferentially.
A reference numeral 341 denotes an explanatory display text prompting the user to operate the input keys.

On the near side of the explanation display text 341, a linked cooking mode selection section 342L is displayed in a square frame shape on the left side. A combined cooking (RG) mode selection section 342M is displayed on the right side of the linked cooking mode selection section 342L. Further, on the right side, a selection portion 342R for the cooking menu or the control menu of the cooking mode in which the food was cooked last time is displayed.

In the state of FIG. 137, the composite cooking (RG) mode selection section 342M displayed in the left-right central portion of the title display section 340 is displayed in white characters. Mode is set to be displayed preferentially.

The input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 arranged in front of the three selection sections 342L, 342M, and 342R all have valid input functions.
Individual light-emitting portions 27M3, 27M4, and 27M5 corresponding to these input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 so as to be adjacent to each other are all in a light-emitting state as indicated by star-shaped figures.

In FIG. 137, if the input key 43M1 is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode selection section 342L is selected, so the cooperative cooking mode selection section 342L changes to a form displayed in white characters. At the same time, the composite cooking (RG) mode selection unit 342M stops the white display.

To change the function setting title display portion 340 to another function setting, the input key 43MC is pressed. Finally, when the input key 43KP is pressed, the setting operation of the "function setting menu" is completed. Normally, at this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 returns to the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46).

The individual light emitting portion 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the individual light emitting portion 27M1 is in a blinking state. The individual light-emitting portion 27M1 continues blinking from the start point to the end point of the function mode.

Next, FIG. 138 will be described.
A memory device MM formed from a semiconductor memory device or the like stores a basic operation program of the integrated control device MC. The basic operation program includes the computer program from the standby mode before the main power switch 97 is closed to the execution of various cooking modes and control menus.

In FIG. 138, solid-line arrows are drawn from the input operation unit 40 to each component, and these arrows indicate the flow of command signals, control data, and the like.

551 is a function setting data storage unit. The function setting data storage unit 551 is prepared as one storage area in the storage device MM or as an independent storage element (semiconductor memory, etc.) on hardware.

The setting information input to the function setting section 550 by the input key 43KP, the input keys 43M1 to 43M3, etc. explained in FIG. The stored information is read into the integrated control device MC each time the integrated control device MC is activated.

Next, FIG. 139 will be described.
This FIG. 139 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment.
In the built-in cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power supply 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed. is pressed to turn on the power (step SU1 in FIG. 139).

Then, as described in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether or not there is an abnormality in itself.

The integrated control device MC checks whether the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130 are abnormal.

For example, the IH control section 90 transmits the temperature measurement result of each section measured by the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to the integrated control device MC. Thereby, the integrated control device MC can determine whether or not there is an abnormality (SU2).

If no abnormality is found, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display "no abnormality, cooking can be started" (SU2). The display screen at this initial time point is the same as the standby initial screen described with reference to FIG.
At the same time, the speech synthesizing device 95 notifies the same content as the content displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by voice (SU2).

In the next step SU3, the integrated control device MC reads function setting information from the storage device MM.
If the function setting unit 550 is set in advance by the input operation unit 40 so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is preferentially displayed, such information "cooperative cooking mode priority" is read. .

In the next step SU4, notification and voice guidance for prompting selection of a heating source are performed.
At this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 is the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46).

When the user opens the door 114, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139) sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC as described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 30 and 40). Send (SU5).

The next step SU6 is a "permission condition" determination step for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Since this determination step has been described in detail in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 66), a detailed description will be omitted.

If it is determined in this step SU6 that the permission condition is not satisfied, step SU6 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SU8 to display on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 that cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be performed. do. Then, the process returns to step SU4.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SU6 that the permission condition is satisfied, step SU6 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SU7, where the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. to display. That is, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is switched to the first specific screen 30SP.
After that, a cooking menu (for example, “hamburger”) for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be selected to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, but the following description will be omitted.

The case where the door 114 is not opened in step SU5, that is, the case where the door 114 remains closed will be described.
As shown in step SU10, when various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are operated, one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 is selected according to the content of the operation.

As shown in step SU11, one of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to the input operation in step SU10. be. Then, after waiting for the subsequent input operation, the cooking is started.

In step SU10, if the input operation unit 40 is not operated at all, the process returns to step SU5. , a display or voice guidance may be provided to prompt the user to perform selection operations.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 139, in the step SU11, before the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, it is determined whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as in the step SU6. There is a determination step of "permission conditions" to be performed.

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, in the fifth embodiment as well, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 5, the heating cooker 1 regarding 8th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body case HC;
outside the heating chamber 113, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heat sources 188 and 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking object is heated using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of the cooking object is selected. a first selection unit 43MC for selecting one cooking menu;
In a composite cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating sources 188 and 189 are automatically combined to heat one cooking object simultaneously or with a time lag, one of a plurality of control menus shared by multiple types of cooking objects is selected. a second selection unit 43M1 for selecting one control menu;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the selection of the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 5,
The input operation unit 40 further has an input key 43KP serving as function setting input means for changing the function of the integrated control device MC,
By the function setting input means 43KP, it is possible to set whether each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is preferentially displayed or whether each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 is preferentially displayed. had a configuration.

Because of this configuration, if it is set to the function mode, the priority between the display of the control menu in the combined cooking mode and the display of the linked cooking menu can be changed, and it is possible to respond to a wide range of cooking, convenience can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 5, the heating cooker 1 regarding 9th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
After the main power supply is supplied and the integrated display unit 30 is activated, the integrated control device MC operates when the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected or when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened. , a first specific screen 30SP displaying a cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the permission condition preset by the function setting unit is satisfied. is.

Therefore, when the user preferentially uses the cooperative cooking mode, opening the door 114 can display the first specific screen 30SP on which the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed.
As a result, it can be expected that the usability for the user will be further improved.

Embodiment 6.
140 to 144 show a (built-in composite type) heating cooker according to Embodiment 6 of the present disclosure.
FIG. 140 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the heating cooker. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing main control function parts of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140. As shown in FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart 1 showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. FIG. 143 is a flow chart 2 showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. FIG. 144 is a flow chart 3 showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 6 is characterized in that the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the like can be selected by voice input.

In FIG. 140, an input key 43MX for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. FIG. The input key 43MX may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like the input keys 43M1 to 43M3.

27M7 is an individual light emitting unit which emits light when the input function of the input key 43MX is valid and continues to emit light until the input function becomes invalid.

Next, FIG. 141 will be described.
In FIG. 141, the input operation unit 40 includes an audio signal receiving unit 40VR that receives the voice uttered by the user and converts it into a predetermined audio signal, and receives the audio signal from the audio signal receiving unit 40VR and converts the content of the voice. and an audio signal analysis unit 40VS for analysis. The voice signal receiving unit 40VR is connected to a microphone that collects voice (not shown).

Inside the storage device MM, there are a storage unit MM1 for the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a storage unit MM2 for the combined cooking mode KM2, and a permission condition storage unit MM3 that stores conditions for permitting or not permitting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. I have.

MNP is a search unit that receives a command signal from the voice signal analysis unit 40VS, searches the data stored in the storage units MM1, MM2, and MM3, and extracts a cooking menu or a control menu. Note that the function of this search unit MNP may be held as a search program in the integrated control device MC, as indicated by the dashed frame in FIG. 141 .

A signal line 373 connects various functional parts and control parts inside the upper unit 100 . This signal line 373 is part of the signal transmission section 73 described in the first embodiment.

The notification unit AN of the sixth embodiment includes a display command unit 63SP for the first specific screen 30SP, a display command unit 63CS for the second specific screen 30SC, and a display command unit 63ST for the third specific screen 30ST. , is equipped with

A display unit drive circuit 63 for driving the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L, respectively, and the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, 63ST are connected to a common control microcomputer (not shown). ). The functions of the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, and 63ST may be realized by the integrated control device MC.

Next, 142 will be explained.
FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. The following shows the steps up to the determination of the cooking menu, control conditions, and the like.

Steps S20 to S35 are executed by integrated control device MC.
In the operation program shown in FIG. 142, the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (eg, "hamburger"), the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2 (eg, "grill range"), etc., and the control conditions (eg, "microwave heating Output value”, “heating time”) can also be input by voice. In addition, as described in Embodiment 1, the control menu of the "single heating cooking mode" using either one of the microwave heating source 189 using the heating chamber 113 or the oven heating source 188 (for example, "range Manual”) can also be selected.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43MC of the input operation section 40 (central operation section 40M), the command signal SN1 is issued to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation section 40 (central operation section 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, the command signal SN2 is issued to the integrated control device MC.

Step S19 is a user input step. Two cases are assumed, namely, when the input key 43MC is pressed and when the input key 43MX is pressed.

In step S20, it is determined whether or not the signal SN1 has arrived, and if the signal SN1 has arrived, the user touches the input operation unit 40 to proceed to a route for confirming the cooking menu or the like.

When the input key 43MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected as described in the first embodiment, so that the food to be cooked can be selected with the input key 43M1. One linked cooking menu prepared in the storage unit MM1 described with reference to FIG. 30.

On the other hand, as described in steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 or step STX2 of FIG. 69 in Embodiment 1, the "permission condition" must be satisfied before the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is permitted. Therefore, in step S21, it is determined whether or not the permission condition is satisfied.

If the determination in step S21 is "No", the process proceeds to error notification processing in step S35. In this step S35, the user is notified by the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 that "the cooperative cooking mode cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the determination in step S21 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S22.
After that, input of the input key 43M2 is completed (step S23), and when it is determined that the input key 43MS has been pressed (step S24), the process shifts to the heat cooking process according to one linked cooking menu, and the integrated display section In 30, on the first specific screen 30SP, the identification information of the cooking menu and the control conditions are displayed in correspondence (for example, side by side). Therefore, one linked cooking menu to be executed (for example, "hamburger") is determined at the next step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20 is "No", in the next step S25, it is determined whether or not the signal SN2 has arrived. Enter the voice input processing step.

In step S26, the voice input support mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to the route for confirming the cooking menu or the like. The voice synthesizer 95 prompts the user to input by voice, for example, "From now on, input by voice is accepted. Please say the desired menu."

In step S27, it is determined whether an audio signal has been input. If an audio signal is input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, if there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95 provides voice guidance to the user as shown in step S34.

In step S28, the search for the control menu and control conditions in the combined cooking mode KM2, the search for the cooking menu and its control conditions in the linked cooking mode KM3, and the control menu and control conditions in the single cooking mode KM1 are performed. There is a step to search.

That is, in step S28, as shown in FIG. 142, step S28A for searching the control conditions for the combined cooking mode KM2, step S28B for searching the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3, and step S28B for searching the control conditions for the single cooking mode KM1. and a step S28C of selecting .

In step S27, when the name of the food to be cooked, for example, "hamburger" is input by voice, in step S28, a cooking mode and a control menu in which hamburger can be prepared are searched.

However, when there is a voice input of "grill room. hamburger", only the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is searched (S28B) using the voice input of "grill room."

In step S29, the data obtained by learning the past search results, the linked cooking menu executed in the past, and the control conditions at that time are read out from the storage device MM and collated (the step in FIG. 79 of Embodiment 1). See SJ11).

Step S30 is a step of determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied, as in step S21. Also in this step S30, as described in steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 or step STX2 of FIG. judge.

If the determination in step S30 is "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process in step S35. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 inform the user that "the cooperative cooking mode was selected as a result of the search, but that cooperative cooking mode cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

In the next step S31, the searched result is announced by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display section 30 . At this stage, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not yet been selected, but the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 31, and if the result matches the desired one, the user performs voice input of approval, such as "determine" or "hamburger OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S32).

The cooperative cooking menu and its control conditions are determined by the above step S32 (step S33).
At the stage of step S27, for example, when "spinach is boiled" is input by voice, one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2, "boiled under leafy vegetables" (single heating of the microwave heating source 189) is extracted. be done.

When boiling spinach in hot water boiled by the induction heating source 9, the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R should be operated instead of the central operating section 40M.

Next, 143 will be explained.
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions. The following shows the steps up to the determination of the control menu, control conditions, and the like. In addition, as described in Embodiment 1, the control menu of the "single heating cooking mode" using either one of the microwave heating source 189 using the heating chamber 113 or the oven heating source 188 (for example, "range Manual”) can also be selected.

Steps S20A to S35 are executed by integrated control device MC.
In FIG. 143, step S19 is a user input step. Two cases are assumed, namely, when the input key 43M1 is pressed and when the input key 43MX is pressed.
Steps S22 to S35 are the same as those explained in FIG.

In the operation program shown in FIG. 143, even the control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2 (for example, "microwave grill") and the control conditions (for example, "microwave heating output value" and "heating time") can be input by voice. It is characterized by dots.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43M1 of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M), the command signal SN3 is issued to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation section 40 (central operation section 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, the command signal SN2 is issued to the integrated control device MC.

In step S20A, it is determined whether or not the signal SN3 has arrived. If the signal SN3 has arrived, the user touches the input operation unit 40 to confirm the control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2. go to.

When the input key 43M1 is pressed, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected as described in the first embodiment, so the control menu can be selected by the input key 43M1. A control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2 prepared in the storage unit MM1 described in FIG. are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 one by one.

After that, the input of the input key 43M2 is completed (step S23), and when it is determined that the input key 43MS has been pressed (step S24), heating by one control menu (for example, "range grill") of the composite cooking mode is performed. The process shifts to the cooking process, and the specific sentence 30J of one control menu and the control condition (for example, microwave output value of 500 W) are displayed on the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display unit 30 . That is, the control menu for one composite cooking mode KM2 to be executed is determined at this step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20A is "No", in the next step S25, it is determined whether or not the signal SN2 has arrived. Enter the voice input processing step.

In step S26, the voice input support mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to the route for confirming the cooking menu or the like. The voice synthesizer 95 prompts the user to input by voice, for example, "From now on, input by voice is accepted".

In step S27, it is determined whether an audio signal has been input. If an audio signal is input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, if there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95 for voice input provides guidance to the user by voice, as shown in step S34.

In step S28, when searching for the control menu and control conditions in the combined cooking mode KM2 (S28A), when searching for the cooking menu and its control conditions in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (S28B), and in the case of searching for the control menu in the single cooking mode and control conditions (S28C).

In step S27, for example, when the name of the control menu (specific sentence 30J) of "range grill" is input by voice, in step S28, a control menu capable of performing the heating pattern of the range grill is searched.

However, when there is a voice input of "grill room, hamburger", the term "grill room" is also used for the search, and only the cooperative cooking mode search (S27B) is performed.

In step S29, the data obtained by learning the past search results, the linked cooking menu executed in the past, and the control conditions at that time are read out from the storage device MM and collated (the step in FIG. 72 of Embodiment 1). See SJ11).

Step S30, like step S21 shown in FIG. 142, is a step for determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied. Also in this step S30, as described in steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 or step STX2 of FIG. judge.

If the determination in step S30 is "No", as described with reference to FIG. 142, the process proceeds to error notification processing in step S35. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "as a result of the search, the cooperative cooking mode was selected, but the cooperative cooking mode cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the result of the search in step S28 is not related to the cooperative cooking mode (for example, the control menu of "thaw" in the combined cooking mode KM2), the determination in step S30 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the search result is notified by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display section 30 . At this stage, the user has not yet selected the combined cooking mode KM2, but the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 30, and if it matches the desired one, the user performs voice input of approval such as "range grill decision" or "OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S32). Immediately after this step S32, the "speech input support mode" started in step S26 is canceled.

The composite cooking mode KM2 and its control conditions are determined by the above steps. For this reason, the voice synthesizer 95 provides voice guidance such as, for example, "heating of the range grill will start" (step S33).

At the stage of step S27, for example, when "boil spinach" is input by voice, one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2, "boil under leafy vegetables" (single heating of microwave heating source 189) is extracted. be done.

When boiling spinach in hot water boiled by the induction heating source 9, the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R should be operated instead of the central operating section 40M.

Next, 144 will be explained.
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions.
FIG. 144 explains the functional restrictions of various input keys of the central operation unit 40M after "starting the voice input support mode" explained in step S25 of FIG.

After the process of step S24 in FIG. 143, when the voice input support mode is started in step S25, the integrated control unit MC disables the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. (step S25A).

In other words, when the input key 43MX switches to the voice input support mode, the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 are not effective even if they are touch-operated. input signal is not generated. Also, the input key 43M2 for setting control conditions such as microwave output and heating time cannot be input.

Therefore, from the stage of step S25A, the central operation unit 40M can perform only voice input to the integrated control device MC. However, the input functions of the input keys 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT are still effectively maintained. Therefore, if the input key 43MT is pressed at step S30, the input result of the voice signal up to that point is canceled, and the input function is canceled at step S25. back to step .

After step S25, when the input key 43MX is pressed, the entire voice input support mode is canceled. Therefore, even if search results such as cooking menus are displayed on the integrated display section 30 after step S25, they are all automatically erased. Also, since the process returns to step S19, the integrated display unit 30 returns to the state of the standby initial screen.

In step S29, the search result is notified by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display section 30 . At this stage, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed although the combined cooking mode has not yet been selected.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 29, and if it matches the desired one, the user performs voice input for approval, such as "microwave grill OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S30). Immediately after step S30, the "speech input support mode" started in step S25 is cancelled. At the same time, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS whose input functions were invalidated in step S25A are restored at this point (step S30A).

The next step S30B is a step for finally confirming the start of cooking. At this step S30B, it is not possible to process by voice input. Since it is a critical decision to initiate heating, it requires physical manipulation by the user. That is, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
In this step S30B, if the input key 43MS is not pressed for a certain period of time, the processing from steps S25 to S30A is canceled and the process returns to step S19. Therefore, the integrated display unit 30 returns to the standby initial screen state.

In the above description, the audio signal analysis unit 40VS provided inside the heating cooker 1 and the search unit MNP are used to extract the cooking menu specified by the user. Functions such as menu search may be shared by external devices (for example, home gateway 411 , external server 417 , information processing terminal 418 ) connected via wireless communication unit 49 .
In other words, not all voice input processing functions need to be provided inside the heating cooker 1 .

Summary of Embodiment 6.
As is clear from the above description, the sixth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
i.e.
an induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 serving as input means,
The integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically advance the cooking process;
A cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
In the single cooking mode KM1, the heating operation is started by determining the control pattern of the first heating means HM1 (for example, "boiling water", "boiling"),
In the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating operation is started by determining the heating source to be used and the control pattern (for example, "range grill") in the second heating means HM2,
In the linked cooking mode KM3, the heating operation is started by determining the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger" or "fried chicken") by the input means.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, each cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed using two or more heating means. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the input means (input operation unit) 40 includes an audio signal receiving unit 40VR for inputting an audio signal from the user and an audio signal analysis unit 40VS,
Further, it comprises a search unit MNP that selects one of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 based on the audio signal data from the audio signal analysis unit 40VS,
When the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 is extracted by the search unit MNP, the notification unit AN notifies the control pattern by display (second specific screen 30SC) or by voice.
was the configuration.

With this configuration, it is possible to select the cooking menu of the two cooking modes and the control menu by voice, so that even if the heating cooker 1 has an increased number of heating sources, the user's operability is improved. be able to.
In addition, even when the user cannot operate the input operation unit 40 by touching it many times, it is possible to assist the user in inputting by voice, so that a highly convenient heating cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is extracted by the search unit MNP, control conditions applicable to the cooking menu can also be presented, so that the user can control It is also possible to omit the trouble of setting the conditions, and it is possible to improve the operability for the user.

As is clear from the above description, the sixth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 described below.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated containing the object to be cooked on the top plate;
a second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heat sources for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
a control unit MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 that determines the cooking menu and the control menu,
The control unit MC has a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically advance the cooking process;
A cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
Furthermore, a voice signal receiving unit 40VR to which a voice signal from a user is input, and the user with a search unit MNP that extracts either one of the cooking menu or the control menu specified by the voice signal of
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, by inputting the desired cooking name, heat cooking state, etc. by voice, the desired cooking and control menu can be easily extracted from the database of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. , cooking can be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Embodiment 7.
145 to 163 relate to the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 145 is a block diagram 1 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 146 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an operation example of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart for explaining the entire control operation of the heating cooker 1 before starting cooking. FIG. 149 is a flow chart for explaining the overall control operation after the start of cooking in the heat cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the main internal functions of the personal digital assistant. FIG. 151 is a diagram 1 for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 152 is a display operation explanatory diagram 2 of the portable information terminal. FIG. 153 is a display operation explanatory diagram 3 of the portable information terminal. FIG. 154 is a display operation explanatory diagram 4 of the portable information terminal. FIG. 155 is a display operation explanatory diagram 5 of the portable information terminal. FIG. 156 is a diagram 6 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 157 is a diagram 7 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram 8 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 159 is a diagram 9 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 160 is a diagram 10 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 161 shows a modification of Embodiment 7, and shows an operation management system for heating cooker 1 and home appliance 400 . FIG. 162 shows a modification of Embodiment 7, and is a diagram 1 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 163 shows a modification of Embodiment 7, and is a diagram 2 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 7 is characterized in that the remote control signal from the portable information terminal 418 can be used to set the cooking mode, control conditions, and the like.

One feature of the heat cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 is that it has an "external notification mode".
The "external notification mode" is to automatically notify the mobile information terminal device 418 in which the device identification code is registered in detail up to the intermediate stage of the cooking process.

The heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 further improves the voice input mode described in Embodiment 6, and one of the features is that it enables at least voice input during the period from the start to the end of the cooking process. It is a feature.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 adds a function to sense that the user is near the heating cooker 1, and enables the voice input mode when the user is near the heating cooker 1. One of the features is that the safety is further improved by allowing the

In FIG. 145, JC is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiver (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays to the front of the heating cooker 1 and receives the reflected input. This human detection sensor JC is installed inside the upper unit 100 so as to radiate ultrasonic waves or infrared rays from the upper surface or the front surface of the upper unit 100 . A dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving section is not provided, and the received signal is analyzed by the integrated control unit MC to determine whether or not there is a person.

In the following figure 145, QC is a seismic sensing device (vibration detection unit) that detects shaking at the time of an earthquake. send. Upon receiving the signal, the integrated controller MC determines that an earthquake has occurred, and immediately cuts off the inverter circuit 82 and the like in order to stop all heating sources in use, or at least the heat cooking performed on the top plate 15. perform the action to be performed. However, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 are not stopped in an emergency.

In cooking on the top plate 15, there is a risk that a boiling pot (including a frying pan, etc.) may tip over or move sideways due to an earthquake. However, since the door 114 is closed with a constant force, the heat cooking performed inside the heating chamber 113 is less dangerous than the cooking on the top plate 15. It is not necessary to make an emergency stop at the signal of .

In FIG. 146, 40VS is the audio signal analysis unit described in the sixth embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the computer program of the integrated controller MC incorporates an audio signal analysis function.
The function of the retrieval unit MNP explained in the sixth embodiment is held as a retrieval program in the integrated control unit MC as indicated by the solid line frame in FIG.

Next, FIG. 147 will be described.
FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an operation example of the heating cooker 1 after turning on the main power switch. In particular, the operation of the human sensor JC and the voice signal receiver 40VR is described. TL1 to TL13 indicate the timing of the operation of the heating cooker 1 or the user's operation, and are from TL1 to TL13 in order of occurrence.

First, the main power switch 97 is closed (TL1).
Then, the human detection sensor JC senses the presence of a person. A sensing signal when a person is sensed is sent to the integrated controller MC (TL2).

The input functions of various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are enabled (TL3). For example, input from the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43R1, etc. becomes possible. Since the input function of the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97 is enabled before these input keys, the main power can be turned on as described above.

In this seventh embodiment, an input key 43MX for selecting voice input as described in the sixth embodiment is arranged. When this input key 43MX is pressed, the voice input mode is entered as described in the sixth embodiment. (TL4). That is, it is possible for the user to perform both finger operation and voice input.

The heating chamber 113 can be used (TL5) if no cooking has been performed previously.
After TL4, when the user selects, for example, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by voice input or touch operation, it is determined at TL6 whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied. The “permission condition” mentioned here has been explained in detail in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147, if cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected (TL7), cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started in the right heating unit 17HL (TL8). At this point, the voice signal receiving section 40VR is still ready to accept input. That is, the voice input mode is maintained.

Therefore, the user can set other cooking while the cooking process 1 is being executed. For example, a new heating operation can be started in the left heating unit 17HL that is not in use, and heating operations for various control menus (preheating, boiling water, etc.) using the induction heating source 9 can be started.

By the way, one of the features of the seventh embodiment is that such a heating operation can be started by an audio signal.
In other words, when the user is performing one cooking task or preparing for another cooking task, and in a situation where touch operation is difficult, the user can issue a heat cooking command by voice without touch operation. .

With this configuration, another cooking can be started quickly, so the total cooking time can be shortened, which contributes to reducing the burden on the user.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, after finishing the cooking process 1, there is a heating rest period (transition period) TR. It is possible to change and even stop the heating operation (TL9).

After the transition period TR ends, the cooking process 2 can be started by either touch operation or voice input (TL10). In this cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is occupied by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, so other cooking cannot be performed.

After that, when the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is finished, the reception function of the voice signal receiver 40VR is invalidated by the integrated controller MC (TL13).
Therefore, since voice input cannot be performed after this point, it is necessary to press the input key 43MX to set the voice input mode again.

As is clear from the above explanation, it is only during the period when the presence of a person is detected by the human detection sensor JC that the voice input mode allows the heating operation to be performed by voice from start to finish. . For example, when the user goes away from the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, safety is ensured by disabling voice input.

When the human detection sensor JC detects that the user has left the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the notification unit AN may issue an alarm at that point. In addition, when the presence of a person cannot be detected by the human detection sensor JC, the voice input mode is not disabled, but only two commands are given: to stop heating and to lower the heating power of the induction heating source 9. Only limited inputs may be enabled.

Next, FIG. 148 will be described.
FIG. 148 is a flow chart for explaining the entire control operation of the heating cooker 1 before starting cooking. A basic operation program from power-on to start of preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

Steps SW1 to SW3 are the same as those shown in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, so steps up to step SW3 will be briefly described.
When the main power switch 97 is closed (step SW1), the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether there is an abnormality in itself (SW2).

In step SW2, the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the information processing device 411 such as a home gateway in a living space such as a kitchen KT that the heating cooker 1 will start operating. This advance notice signal corresponds to the signal L2 described in FIG. 42 of the first embodiment.
In addition, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 of the refrigerator 401 is transmitted from the cooking device 1 to the information processing device 411 .

If the information processing device 411 is not inside the house HA, the cooker 1 sends the stock inquiry signal RQ1 to the external server 417 via the router 419 (not shown) and the wide area communication network 416. Send the corresponding information. A personal digital assistant 418 owned by a user or a resident is connected to the wide area communication network 416 .

If no abnormality is found in the integrated control device MC, the integrated display unit 30 is activated, and the voice synthesizer 95 provides voice guidance indicating that driving should be started (SW3).
In order to prompt the user to select the heat source to be used, display is performed on the integrated display unit 30, and voice guidance for prompting the user to select the heat source is also performed by the voice synthesizer 95 (SW4). At this stage, instead of selecting the heating source, a cooking mode such as the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 may be selected.

Although not shown in FIG. 148, if the “external notification mode” is not set, the input operation unit 40 is used to set the external notification mode at this stage.
Specifically, the input key 43KP is pressed to switch to a "function mode" described later, and the setting operation is performed according to the display of the integrated display section 30. FIG.
In the function mode, the specific mobile information terminal 418 owned by the user is registered as one notification destination.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, when the seismic sensing device QC senses a certain acceleration or more, the integrated control device MC has a function to instantly stop the induction heating source 9 during heating operation. Further, in the function mode, it is possible to set so as to automatically transmit a signal to the outside via the wireless communication section 49 . As a result, the warning signal can also be transmitted to the home gateway 411 and the warning device 445 can issue a warning.
When the function mode is set, the function mode is released after the necessary setting inputs are completed.

Even when the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 is set to the "external notification mode" as described above, or when it is set to a state in which mutual wireless communication with the mobile information terminal device 418 is possible in another state, The "function setting menu" that becomes available when the input key 43KP is pressed cannot be selected. In other words, the function mode restricts the user to directly operate the input operation unit 40 of the heating cooker 1, thereby enhancing safety.

In the next step SW5, it is determined whether or not the input in the input operation section 40 is completed. When the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. are operated as described in the first embodiment, and the desired cooking menu (eg, "fried chicken") or control menu (eg, "manual range") is selected, This step SW5 becomes "Yes".

In the next step SW6, if the input key 43MS is pressed on the input operation unit 40, the result is "Yes", and the heating source actually starts to be driven (SW7). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43L1 and 44L. Further, in the case of the right heating unit 17HR, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43R1 and 44R (these key input procedures may be omitted).

On the other hand, if the input from the input operation unit 40 has not been completed in step SW5, the input is waited for 30 minutes. During this 30 minutes, measurement is started at the stage of step SW4.

At step SW8, it is determined whether or not 30 minutes have passed, and if 30 minutes have passed, the integrated controller MC automatically turns off the main power switch 97 (SW14).

During the 30-minute input grace period, unless the wireless communication unit 49 receives a "remote operation signal" (external input), which will be described later, from the outside, the completion of the input of the input operation unit 40 and the presence or absence of external input ( Step SW9) is repeatedly checked.

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside, in step SW10, it is determined whether the command is for designating the cooperative cooking mode or something else.

If the instruction is to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the process proceeds to step SW11. In this step SW11, it is determined whether or not permission conditions such as "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" described in Embodiment 1 (particularly, FIGS. 67 to 69) are satisfied.

If it is determined in step SW11 that the permission condition is satisfied, the process advances to step SW12, and the processing of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is performed.

On the other hand, if the cooperative cooking mode is not set, step SW10 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SW12.

At step SW12, determination and processing of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) are performed.
First, when the externally designated cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
Next, when the cooking mode specified from the outside is the combined cooking mode KM2, the integrated display section 30 displays the second specific screen 30SC. On the other hand, in the case of the single cooking mode KM1 of the induction heating source 9, the integrated display section 30 displays the third specific screen 30ST.

In the next step SW13, information indicating that the remote control information has been received is returned to the information processing device 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information.

If it is determined at the stage of step SW4 that the permission information is not satisfied, the information processor 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information cannot be controlled by the remote control information. reply with the information of

At the step SW11 or SW12, the user manually changes the control conditions (thermal power, microwave output, heating time, control temperature, etc.) set by the remote control information using the input operation unit 40. can be At the stage of step SW12, the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are displayed, respectively. Also good.

FIG. 148 explained the operation of the heating cooker 1 when the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is set.

Next, FIG. 149 will be described.
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 switches to the "function setting" mode by operating the input operation unit 40 during standby before starting the heating cooking operation, and switches to the "external notification" mode. mode”. Therefore, as will be described below, it is convenient when the user is always in front of the cooking device 1 and cannot engage in cooking.

For example, immediately after starting cooking, the user moves around the kitchen KT, or uses other cookers and electrical appliances in the kitchen KT. However, when cooking a cooking menu that uses edible oil such as fried food, the human detection sensors 452 and 453 work, and if a person is not detected in the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the alarm device 445 (Fig. 4) gives an alarm.

In addition, since this heating cooker 1 itself is also provided with a human detection sensor JC whose detection area is set toward the front from the vicinity of the door 114, a specific cooking menu such as "deep-fried food" can detect a person. A warning message is output from the speech synthesizer 95 when the time for not performing it exceeds a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds). Then, the heating power of the induction heating source 9 is lowered, and thereafter the heating operation is stopped.

FIG. 149 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the integrated control device MC after the start of the heat cooking operation.
FIG. 149 shows the operation program when the "external notification mode" is set in the basic operation program from the start of the cooking process 1 to the start of the cooking process 2. FIG. This program is also stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

In the cooperative cooking mode, the following description is based on the assumption that the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113 and the cooking process 2 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL in the selected cooking menu.

FIG. 149 shows operation steps following step SW7 in FIG.
When the cooking process 1 is started and the microwave heating is started, the integrated controller MC confirms that the "external notification mode" is set (step SW20).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of cooking process 1, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the start of cooking (step SW21).

Further, information indicating that cooperative cooking has started is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside.
Since the portable information terminal device 418 is registered in advance as an external notification destination of the heating cooker 1 , the information of the operation start of the heating cooker 1 is delivered via the external server 417 .

Measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started from the time of step SW21.
In the seventh embodiment, the inventory inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted to the outside at the next step SW22. As in Embodiment 1, if the information processing device (home gateway) 411 is inside the house HA, the information is transmitted to the information processing device 411 .

On the other hand, if the device corresponding to the information processing device 411 is the external server 417 , the stock inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted from the heating cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416 .

Thereafter, the presence or absence of an abnormal operation during the cooking process 1 is checked (SW23), the presence or absence of a command to stop the cooking process 1 by the user (SW24), and the presence or absence of the elapsed time TN1 exceeding (SW25) are checked.

These steps SW23 to SW25 are repeatedly performed at short time intervals, but if an abnormality is detected, the integrated notification unit 30 or the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the abnormality detection (SW34). In addition, as one of the processes of this "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified, and the portable information terminal 418 is also notified of the occurrence of an abnormality.

When it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has exceeded (“Yes” in SW25), the notification of the reference information 1 is performed on the first specific screen 30S of the integrated display section 30. FIG. At the same time, reference information is transmitted to the outside. This reference information also finally reaches the mobile information terminal 418 via the information processing device 411 and the external server 417 .

In the next step SW27, it is determined whether or not inventory data has been received from the outside in response to the inventory information inquiry RQ1 of refrigerator 401 (see step SW2 in FIG. 148).

If inventory data has been received, it has been stored in the storage device MM at that time, but the stored information is also confirmed in the next step SW28.

Next, when the inventory data has arrived at the integrated display section 30, the integrated control device MC evaluates and analyzes the actually related cooking menu from the acquired inventory data.
If a recommended cooking menu is extracted, the integrated display unit 30 does not notify that there is a recommended cooking menu at this point (SW29). Then, it is not transmitted to the external server 417 either.

Exceptionally, if the user performs the above-described "function setting" and sets transmission before the transition period TR, it is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at this time as well. The notification data is also transmitted to the portable information terminal device 418 .

After that, it is repeatedly checked whether or not there is an end command of the cooking process 1 from the user (SW30). In addition, when the cooking process 1 is performed by timer setting in advance, the cooking process 1 ends automatically when the time set by the user elapses.

When the cooking process 1 is finished, in the next step SW31, the integrated display unit 30 notifies that the cooking process 1 is finished and that the cooking process 2 will be started after the user's instruction.

Further, in step SW31, as one of the processes of the "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified that the cooking process 1 has ended.
Further, similar to the notification performed in step SW29, if there is a recommended cooking menu for the heat cooker 1, it is notified on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 and also to the external server 417. be done. Therefore, even with the portable information terminal device 418, the presence of the recommended cooking menu can be known from the display screen 480 as shown in FIG. 159, which will be described later.

As can be seen from FIG. 149, the step SW31 is a transition period TR during which the heating operation is suspended, and the user takes out the object to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 and prepares the object to be heated on the left heating section 17HL. It is necessary to carry out work to transfer to N (pot, etc.).

The length of the transition period TR can be freely determined by the user until the user gives an instruction to start cooking (cooking step 2) (however, a long pause such as 30 minutes or longer will result in an error, cooking mode is automatically canceled).

Therefore, the user can examine the value of the recommended cooking menu by using this pause period TR. If necessary, it is possible to check the foodstuffs in the refrigerator 411 at this point, or to ask the opinion of the residents. During the rest period TR, the monitoring level of the human detection sensor JC is automatically changed to a lower level, so that when the user leaves (became absent) from the front of the heating cooker 1, the heating cooker 1 immediately 1 never raises an alarm.

When the user presses the input key 43MS, the pause period TR immediately ends, and induction heating (cooking step 2) in the left heating section 17HL is started (SW32).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of the cooking process 2, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the start of cooking. Further, information indicating that the cooking process 2 of cooperative cooking has started is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (SW33).

Next, the portable information terminal device 418 shown in FIG. 150 will be described.
The portable information terminal device 418 includes a transmission unit and reception unit 460, a communication control unit 461, a central processing unit (CPU) 462, a ROM and RAM 463, a speaker 464, a touch-type operation unit 465, and a display screen. a display unit 466 , a cooker database (storage unit) 468 , a posture detection unit 469 , a remote operation information generation unit 470 , and a storage unit 467 . The transmitter/receiver 460 has an NFC input/output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication.

475 is an audio input unit that converts audio into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 466 , the display unit 467 and the voice input unit 475 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 471 . Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 475 and performs word search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the mobile information terminal 418, or may be provided in the external server 417 and the search function may be provided outside the mobile information terminal 418. FIG.

The orientation detection unit 469 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the mobile information terminal 418 . As a result, a signal obtained by detecting the vertical direction of the portable information terminal 418 is output to the central processing unit 462 .

The central processing unit 462 receives a detection signal from the posture detection unit 469 and controls the display direction of the display unit 467 .
The central processing unit 462 inputs the signal received from the wireless communication unit 49 of the heating cooker 1 to the remote operation information generation unit 470 .

The heating cooker database 468 stores the "notification data" 472 of the heating cooker 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 of the heating cooker 1. I have.
The cooker database 468 also holds “remote operation data” 473 for the integrated controller MC of the cooker 1 .

The notification data 472 and the remote control data 473 may be stored in the portable information terminal 418 from the beginning, but are connected to an external server 417, which is information providing means, via a wide area communication network 416. However, it may be obtained by downloading from the external server. In other words, the heating cooker database 468 does not have to be fixedly stored and constructed, and may be in a form in which information is acquired as necessary and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The remote operation information generation unit 470 processes the signal obtained from the heating cooker 1 via the central processing unit 462 and the input signal from the display operation unit 471, respectively. Generate information.

The "remote operation information" referred to here is information on the input operation corresponding to all cooking modes including the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker 1, and integration in the linked cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, etc. Display information of the display unit 30, and further display information related to the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L are included. However, information serving as a command to start the heating operation is not included in any of the cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the cooking device 1 does not receive a command to start the heating operation based on this remote control information.

The central processing unit 462 executes the processing of the entire portable information terminal device 418 according to the control program stored in the ROM/RAM, and reads necessary data from the ROM/RAM in the process of executing the processing. , the data generated in the process of executing the process is stored in the ROM/RAM. The storage unit 471 is a semiconductor non-volatile memory, and can store the information of the heating cooker 1 read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 460 .

When the user touches a specific portion of the display unit 467 of the portable information terminal 418, the remote control information generating unit 470 generates remote control information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitter/receiver 460 to the cooker 1 .

The integrated control device MC of the heating cooker 1 that has received the remote control information treats this remote control information as input operation information for the cooking mode. For example, when a remote control signal relating to the cooperative cooking mode is received, the first display screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 accordingly displays the selection of one cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode as shown in FIG. 158 described later. Transition to the screen. However, the heating cooker 1 is not unconditionally operated by the remote control information of the mobile information terminal device 418 . This is as explained in FIG.

On the other hand, on the side of the mobile information terminal 418 that transmitted the remote control information, the display on the display unit 467 changes based on the remote control information. In other words, the contents of the display screen by the touch operation on the display operation unit 471 of the portable information terminal device 418 and the contents of the display on the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1 change in a similar operation procedure, but the state of the change is The information is not transmitted one by one to the heating cooker 1 in real time.

Even if the remote control information is generated in portable information terminal 418, it is recognized as a regular remote control signal in heating cooker 1 after the confirmation signal of the cooking mode is transmitted. In other words, the remote control information from the mobile information terminal 418 is transmitted all at once when a predetermined enter key is pressed on the mobile information terminal 418 in order to confirm the cooking mode.

Remote operation information transmitted from the mobile information terminal device 418, for example, regarding the linked cooking mode includes information necessary for cooking a specific cooking menu (eg, "fried chicken") in the linked cooking mode, and heating control conditions (parameters) such as sources, details of the cooking process, thermal power, heating time, and the like. In other words, detailed control conditions that can be set by the user on the first specific screen 30SP are also included.

Many proposals have already been made for methods of controlling microwave ovens and induction heating cookers using wireless signals from the mobile information terminal device 418 .
For example, from a portable information terminal (home network terminal) placed near the heating cooker, information on the cooking procedure is transferred to the heating cooker by short-range wireless communication (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-113787), and portable information Techniques for transferring heating control information from a terminal device to a heating cooker by wireless communication have been proposed (for example, JP-A-2005-37068 and JP-A-11-14063).

A technique for generating a remote control signal including graphic information corresponding to the operation content of a heating cooker (gas stove) and transmitting it from a portable information terminal device by wireless communication (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-163539) is also proposed. It is

In this seventh embodiment, the display contents of the display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 480 of the portable information terminal device 418 will be mainly described below.

151A and 151B are display screens of the portable information terminal 418. FIG.
This display screen 480 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Various icons (input keys) 491L, 491M, 491R, 492 to 496, etc. described later are visually displayed on the display screen 480, although they do not appear as physical structures on the upper surface (surface) of the glass plate. recognizable above. Although a specific part of the glass plate itself does not emit light or generate an image, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the characters, figures, and other information are displayed in this way from the standpoint of the user. Standing on the , use the expression "display on the display screen".

An "icon" can be used for desired input. That is, each icon portion has a capacitive sensing key. By touching the icon, a command signal to the central processing unit 462 is generated in the touch operation unit 466 (see FIG. 150).

To indicate the presence and function of the icon, certain functions are represented by text or graphics (at least when input is available). For example, as in the example of FIG. 151(A), it is displayed with characters 491L such as "Left IH operation unit".

Reference numeral 481 denotes a menu display portion on the initial screen shown in FIG. 151(A). This menu display portion 481 changes to the menu selection display portion 482 of the left heating portion in FIG. 151(B). In addition, in FIG. 152A, the display changes to a heat source selection display portion 483 labeled "heat source selection".

Further, the menu display portion 481 is changed to a range grill control menu selection display portion 484 labeled "RG control menu selection" in FIG. 152(B).
Furthermore, the menu display portion 481 is changed to a cooperative cooking menu display portion 485 labeled "choice of cooperative cooking menu" in FIG. 158(A).

The menu display section 481 changes to a preparation information display section 486 labeled "next preparation guide" in FIG. 158(B). 159A and 159B, the menu display portion 481 is changed to a cooperative cooking menu name display portion 487 showing "fried chicken" which is one of the cooperative cooking menus.

In FIG. 151(A), 490 is a warning information display portion as an initial screen during standby.
Before starting the operation, the heating chamber 113 may already be hot due to the heat from the previous cooking, and FIG. 151(A) is an example of calling attention to this.
It also indicates that the power is already on.

491M is a selection section (icon) of the central operation section 40M. By operating the central operation unit 40M, cooking can be performed with a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

491L is a selection section (icon) of the left operation section 40L. 491R is a selection section (icon) of the right operation section 40R.
492 is an advice display selection section (icon). When this is touched, the reference information of the operation corresponding to the touched scene is announced on the voice synthesizer 95 or the integrated display unit 30 .

FG indicates the user's fingertip.
Triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 in FIGS. 151A and 151B and other figures are screen switching marks.

There is also a screen switching mark 503 in the next FIG. 152(B). By touching these marks, the display screen 480 can be switched in a certain order each time the mark is touched. By the way, when the screen switching mark 502 is touched in FIG. 151(B), the display screen 480 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 appears from the left side.

Note that the screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by providing a scroll function for switching screens by moving the fingertip FG while touching the display screen 480 and moving the display screen accordingly. .

In FIG. 151(A), when the left operation section selection section (icon) 491L is touched, the display screen is switched to the display screen 480 shown in FIG. 151(B) without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504. FIG.

In FIG. 151(B), 493 is a control menu display portion (icon) for the IH single cooking mode.
There are a total of eight control menus for the IH single cooking mode. Five of them are displayed in the right half of the display screen 480 in FIG. 151(B). These control menu display portions (icons) 493 are "boiling", "boiling", "cooking rice", "boiling + keeping warm", and "cooking".

Also, the remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 480 . There are three control menu display portions (icon) 488 for “warming”, a control menu display portion (icon) 494 for “fried food”, and a control menu display portion (icon) 489 for “preheating”.

In FIG. 151B, 495 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen.
Reference numeral 496 denotes an input confirmation display portion (icon) for confirming that one control menu (for example, "boiling water") in FIG. 151(B) has been selected. When this button is pressed, for example, if it is the above-mentioned "boiling water", the screen automatically switches to the control condition setting screen for boiling water.

Next, FIG. 152(A) will be described.
497A and 497B are induction heating source selection sections (icons) for selecting the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR. 497C is a heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave heating source 189 .

In FIG. 152(A), 498 is a range grill heat source selection section (icon), and 499 is a cooperative cooking selection section (icon).
In FIG. 152(A), when the range grill heating source selection portion (icon) 498 is touched, the screen changes to the display screen 480 in FIG. 152(B).

Next, FIG. 152(B) will be described.
500 is an RG control menu selection section (icon) indicating a range grill (RG) control menu. There are a total of 10 menu items for controlling the range grill (RG), including "warm", "manual range", and "thaw meat".

In FIG. 152B, 497A is an induction heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the left heating section 17HL. 497B is also a selection section (icon) of the right heating section 17HR.

497C is a selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave induction heating source 189 .
When the screen switching mark (icon) 503 is touched in FIG. 152(B), the display screen 480 in FIG. 152(B) changes to that shown in FIG. 153(B).

Next, FIGS. 153A and 153B will be described.
FIGS. 153A and 153B show a state in which all (10 items) of the range grill (RG) control menu are displayed. FIG. 153(A) shows five control menus 500, and FIG. 153(B) shows the remaining five control menus 500. FIG.

The large arrows shown in FIGS. 153A and 153B respectively indicate the rearward direction and the forward direction when the display screen 480 is horizontal. The display screen 480 can be operated horizontally, vertically, or obliquely.

Next, FIGS. 154A and 154B will be described.
FIG. 154(A) shows a state in which the "warm" control menu 500 is selected from among the range grill (RG) control menus in the state of FIG. 152(A).
When the fingertip touches the RG control menu selection section (icon) 500, the selection section 500 senses the touch and changes the display color, for example, reverses to outline characters. When the input determination key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 154(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 154(B).

FIG. 154B is the default screen of the range grill (RG) control menu.
504 is a name display portion (icon) of the RG control menu.
The control menu display form and design of FIG. 154(B) are similar to those shown in FIG. 49 and the like of the first embodiment. Such a display is possible because there is the heating cooker database 468 and the remote operation information generating section 470 (see FIG. 150).

In FIG. 154B, 505 is the temperature display section (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 154(B), the default value is 80° C., but since there are 75° C. and 85° C. as the next candidates that can be selected, they are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 154(B), in the name display section (icon) 504 of the RG control menu, the next display candidates "oven" and "boiled under leafy vegetables" are displayed in slightly smaller sizes adjacent thereto. be done.

If the user wants to change the set temperature of the range to 75° C. in the state shown in FIG. This is explained in the following FIG.
Similarly, when changing "warm" in the control menu to "oven" or "boiled under leafy vegetables", the candidate switching mark (icon) 519 near "oven" or "boiled under leafy vegetables", Just touch 520.

In FIG. 154B, 506 is a reference image display section. The reference image may be anything other than a photograph, and may be an illustration showing the image of "warm up" in the control menu.

Next, FIGS. 155A and 155B will be described.
When the orientation of the portable information terminal device 418 is changed in the vertical direction, the display screen 480 is vertically elongated as shown in FIGS. 155(A) and (B). Note that the display screen 480 may be set to be fixed to portrait display as shown in FIGS. 155(A) and (B).

Switching between FIG. 155A and FIG. 155B can be performed only by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503 .
Next, FIGS. 156A and 156B will be described. In order to select the "warm" control menu 500 shown in FIG. Invert to outline characters.
When the input determination key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 156(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 156(B).

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 156(B), if you want to change the (heating upper limit) setting temperature of the "heating" range (microwave heating) to 75° C., the 75° C. display area (RG control A fingertip FG can be placed on the temperature display portion 505) of the menu. Then, the display screen 480 changes to the state shown in FIG. 157(A).

In FIG. 156B, 507A is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. In this FIG. 156(B), the user is advised to select the set temperature.

Next, FIG. 157(A) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 157(A), the set temperature is changed to 75.degree. Since it is still before the control conditions are finalized, the other set temperature "85°C" is still displayed.

In the state of FIG. 157A, the transmission key display portion (icon) 521 of the remote control signal is displayed for the first time.
In this FIG. 157(A), when the transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information displayed in this FIG. 157(A) is collectively transmitted to the heating cooker 1 as remote control information.

The state of FIG. 157(B) is the stage where all the conditions for executing “warm” in the RG control menu have been selected, so the heating temperature “75° C.” displayed on the temperature display section 505 is the heating condition. It is sent to the cooker 1.

In FIG. 157A, 507B is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. FIG. 157(A) shows that the input work is completed by pressing the send key display portion 521 .

At the stage of FIG. 157(B) after the completion of the remote control signal, the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. By pressing this button, the heating operation at the stage of FIG. 157(B) can be stopped. Once the stop key display section 522 is pressed, the process returns to the initial stage, so all the remote operation conditions are input again.

The portable information terminal device 418 is provided with a stop key display portion (icon) 522 capable of immediately transmitting a command to lower the heating stop, and has a function of ensuring the safety of the heating cooker 1 .

Next, FIG. 158(A) will be described.
FIG. 158(A) is a screen displayed when the cooperative cooking selection portion 499 shown in FIG. 152(A) is touched. Note that the display screen 480 of FIG. 158(A) may be displayed by touching the central operation section selection portion 491M of FIG. 151(A). However, when the central operation section selection section 491M is touched, the screen is shared with the range grill cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM2) selection screen, so the number of touch operations to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 increases a little.

FIG. 158(A) is an example of selecting "fried chicken" in one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
When the user touches the linked cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C because he wants to cook "fried chicken", the display color changes as shown in FIG.

When the input determination key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 158(A), the display screen (not shown) for cooking "fried chicken" is displayed. A display screen 480 of FIG. 159(A) is a display screen showing the stage of the cooking process 1 of "fried chicken".

Note that FIG. 158(A) only shows the cooperative cooking menu and omits the subsequent selection of the heating unit and the control conditions. If the section (icon) 500C is selected (touched), the display screen 480 for setting the selected cooking menu (for example, "fried chicken") is displayed.

On the display screen 480 for setting "fried chicken", icons (334L, 334R) for selecting the left and right heating units 17HL, 17HR as shown in FIGS. A key display section (icon) 521 is displayed.

FIG. 159(B) is a notification example corresponding to "reference information 1" FA1 notified by the heating cooker 1 in the middle of the cooking process 1 when cooking "fried chicken" in the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode. be.

In this Embodiment 7, in the "first reference information" FA1 notified by the heating cooker 1, as shown in FIG. Two are notified: removal of heated food from chamber 113 .

Also on the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418, as contents corresponding to the above reference information FA1, as shown in FIG. A preparation work reference image 510 showing that the food to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer is displayed.
Note that 511 is alert information. Reference numeral 512 denotes auxiliary information describing the user's work.

Next, FIG. 159(A) will be described.
The display screen 480 of FIG. 159(A) displays the stage of the cooking process 1 of "fried chicken".
513 is a process information display part. FIG. 159(A) shows that microwave heating is still continuing. 514 is a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is next performed in the right heating section 17HR.

A reference numeral 515 denotes a display section for a recommended menu. This display unit 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) retrieved from inventory information obtained in advance from the refrigerator 401 . The example of FIG. 159(A) suggests that after the heating chamber 113 currently being used for "fried chicken" is no longer used, there will be another recommended cooking menu that can be cooked in that heating chamber.

Specifically, the recommended menu is not automatically displayed at the stage of FIG. 159(A). When the user touches the detail display instruction section (icon) 523 displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 159(B).

Note that the selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 521 as shown in FIG. After a certain period of time, the screen of FIG. 159(A) automatically returns to the screen of FIG. 158(A).

Even at the stage of FIG. 159(B) after the transmission of the remote control signal is completed, the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

In FIG. 159(B), 487 is a name display portion of the linked cooking menu, and in this case, the name of the food to be cooked "Karaage" is displayed. 516 is a display portion of the recommended menu. Specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed on the recommended menu display unit 515 . We recommend thawing and warming when cooking.

In FIG. 159B, 517 is the supplementary information of the recommended menu, which indicates that cooking is possible with the control menu of "warm" using microwave heating.
518 is a cooking reference image of the recommended menu. Illustrations (image diagrams) are acceptable instead of photographs.
Also at the stage of FIG. 159(B), the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

Next, FIG. 160(A) will be described.
The display screen 480 of FIG. 160(A) is in a state in which the cooking process 1 of "fried chicken" is completed and the transition period TR is entered.
513 is a process information display part. FIG. 160(A) shows that microwave heating has ended. 514 is a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is next performed in the right heating section 17HR.

A reference numeral 515 denotes a display section for a recommended menu. In this display unit 515, when there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) retrieved from the inventory information acquired in advance from the refrigerator 401, the recommended cooking menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 160(A). indicates that there is

When the detailed display instruction portion (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 480 of FIG. 160(A) is touched, as shown in FIG. Display the details of possible cooking menu candidates.

A selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. However, if the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 is not of the touch input type, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key is pressed.

When the input confirmation key display portion (icon) 496 in FIG. . In other words, the intention of "agreeing with the recommended menu" is transmitted to the user who is cooking in front of the heating cooker 1 .

When the information on the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is sent to the heating cooker 1, the owner of the portable information terminal 418 can use the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) without being in the kitchen KT. ) may be notified. In other words, another user may be in front of the cooking device 1 at that moment. In any case, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to know that cooking can be performed concurrently.

In the above explanation, the signal from the portable information terminal device 418 was explained by the method of reaching the heating cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416. Therefore, the NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the heating cooker 1 side may be input by directly approaching or contacting it.

Summary of Embodiment 7.
As is clear from the above description, the seventh embodiment discloses the cooking device 1 described below.
i.e.
a heating chamber 113 whose opening is openably closed by a door 114;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a notification unit AN30 that notifies information about the cooking process;
an input operation unit 40 that enables touch input and voice input;
A wireless communication unit 49 that wirelessly transmits cooking control information to the outside and receives information from the outside;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one or both of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source are cooperatively driven,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 by at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, receives a start command from the user after the end of the first cooking process, starts the cooking process 2, and automatically starts the second cooking process. is to proceed,
The integrated control device MC, in the middle of the cooking process 1,
(1) reference information FA1 regarding the cooking step 1;
(2) Using the heating chamber 113 occupied in the cooking process 1, reference information FA1 regarding another cooking that can be executed concurrently with the cooking process 2 is transmitted by the notification unit to the stage or transition of the cooking process 1. In the period TR, it was configured to automatically notify.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, it can be expected that the user's convenience will be further improved as compared with the first embodiment.

In addition, the user can input by voice without inputting by hand, and the heating operation can be started and stopped.

Moreover, since the voice input mode is restricted to when there is a person near the heating cooker 1 by the human detection sensor JC, safety can be improved.

In addition, in the heat cooker 1, in the process of starting the input operation for starting heat cooking after turning on the main power supply, only in the stage where the input has not been completed yet, the external portable information terminal device 418 The remote control signal is validated (Fig. 148; see step SW5).

As a result, while the user is inputting data using the input operation unit 40 on the heating cooker 1 side, a remote control signal from the outside interrupts the input, resulting in a situation in which the input is wasted. do not have. Moreover, the user who is actually cooking in front of the heating cooker 1 is not confused.

Also, on the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal device 418, as shown in FIG. 158(B), the preparation work reference image indicating that the door 114 is to be opened is displayed as the content corresponding to the above reference information FA1. 509 and a preparation work reference image 510 showing that the food to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer are displayed.

Therefore, even if there is no user or resident who has the portable information terminal device 418 in the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the user can timely acquire useful information for effectively using the heating cooker 1. be able to. In other words, it is possible to prepare in advance necessary work when the current cooking process is finished, or to reconfirm the procedure for transitioning to the next cooking process, thereby further improving the user's convenience.

In Embodiment 7, the mobile information terminal device 418 has the function of transmitting a "remote control signal" to the heating cooker 1 .
Correspondingly, the heating cooker 1 has a function of receiving the "remote control signal".

When the wireless communication unit 49 of the heating cooker 1 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside, it is determined whether or not a predetermined "permission condition" is satisfied, and it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied. Only in this case, the process proceeds to the step of the cooperative cooking mode according to the remote control signal (external input).
Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations such as interruption of cooking due to lack of electric power or failure of cooking due to lack of thermal power (heating) in the middle of the cooking process of cooperative cooking without satisfying the permission conditions.

Furthermore, even if a remote control signal is received, whether or not to start the heating operation is ultimately left to the judgment and input of the user facing the heating cooker 1, and an incorrect remote control signal from the outside may There is no danger that heating will start carelessly (unconditionally) against the will of the user or the resident.

Although it is difficult to imagine a situation where the user holding the portable information terminal 418 transmits the remote control information from a remote location far away from the heating cooker 1, the portable information terminal 418 in the same kitchen KT may be placed on a dining table or the like and operated by the user.

By the way, as described in Embodiment 7, the display screen (display design) of the integrated display unit 30 and the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418 in the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 are There are many similarities in terms of cooking menu display, control condition default value display, and modification. Therefore, when the user performs work while checking the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418, there is no great sense of discomfort, and the burden of remote operation input on the user is small.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 156(B), 157(A) and (B), at the stage of determining the cooking menu and control conditions (temperature, heat power, etc.) on the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418, the heat cooking The display design corresponds to the display screen of the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display section 30 of the device 1 .

The display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418 and the display screens of the second specific screen 30SC and the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1 corresponded (approximately design).
Even a user who is accustomed to using the input operation unit 40 of the heating cooker 1 usually feels little discomfort in operating the portable information terminal 418, and there is no concern that the user's operability will be impaired. Conversely, a user accustomed to operating the portable information terminal device 418 does not lose operability even in the actual input operation section 40 of the heating cooker 1 .

In Embodiment 7, the portable information terminal device 418 has a function of manually inputting a "remote control signal" for the heating cooker 1 in the portable information terminal device 418 and transmitting the input result. Recipe information held in the external server 417 may be obtained and used as a remote control signal.

As shown in FIG. 46 of Embodiment 1, two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) leading to a dedicated recipe site (one of the external servers) is displayed on the standby display screen 2A at startup.
By reading the two-dimensional information with the portable information terminal device 418, it is possible to connect to the recipe site, so that various cooking recipes (procedural manuals for cooking methods, data, etc.) can be viewed and the data can be easily downloaded. You can

Therefore, until step SW5 in FIG. do it. In that case, the recipe data is prepared in a format that allows the content to be analyzed at steps SW10 and SW11 in FIG.

(Modification of Embodiment 7)
FIG. 161 shows a modification of Embodiment 7, and shows an operation management system for heating cooker 1 and home appliance 400 . FIG. 162 is a diagram 1 for explaining the display operation in the portable information terminal 418 of FIG. FIG. 163 is a display operation explanatory diagram 2 of the portable information terminal device 418 of FIG.

The external server 417 is a collection of multiple processes that process different information. Note that the operation manager of the external server 417 may be the same or different. For example, one external server may provide useful information to alarm device 441 or temperature monitor device 440 .

In this modified example, the personal digital assistant 418 can be directly wirelessly communicated with the heating cooker 1 . Moreover, the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal device 418 are greatly different from the seventh embodiment in that they are automatically connected when they are within a communicable range of each other.

In FIG. 161, the communication method between the portable information terminal device 418 and the heating cooker 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. A wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the information terminal device 418 and the router 530 .

First, the mobile information terminal device 418 performs mutual authentication with the heating cooker 1 . The heating cooker 1 has an input key 43KP for function setting, which is operated at the time of initial start-up to display a setting screen for mutual authentication from the menu for function setting and carry out mutual authentication.

Application software for the cooking device 1 is stored in advance in the cooking device database 468 or storage unit 467 of the portable information terminal device 418 .

When a signal for automatic connection is transmitted from the portable information terminal device 418 when the heating cooker 1 is activated, mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal device 418. .

Like the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) described in the first embodiment, a connection command means (not shown) for commanding wireless communication at an arbitrary timing is provided, and even if it is operated when the heating cooker 1 is started, good. For example, at the stage of steps SW2 to SW4 shown in FIG. 148, the connection instruction means (not shown) may be operated.

When the connection between the cooking device 1 and the mobile information terminal device 418 is established as described above, the state of direct wireless communication between the cooking device 1 and the mobile information terminal device 418 continues. When the mobile information terminal device 418 moves away from the heating cooker 1, it may temporarily become unable to communicate, but when it returns to the communicable range (distance), the connection state is automatically restored. Recover.

In addition, after the heating cooker 1 starts the cooking process 1 or the preheating process in a state where the connection between the heating cooker 1 and the mobile information terminal device 418 is established, When the mutual wireless communication state between them is interrupted for a certain period of time or more, an alarm is issued on both the heating cooker 1 side and the portable information terminal device 418 side.
After this alarm, the heating cooker 1 is automatically kept in a state where the heating power value at that time is lowered by one step or two steps.
In order to cancel this pending state, a specific partial input key of the input operation unit 40 of the heating cooker 1 may be touched (the input key 47 described with reference to FIG. 19 may be touched). Thereby, the integrated control device MC of the heating cooker 1 has confirmed the existence of the user.

In addition, even if the user stops the heating operation during each of the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2, the heating cooker 1 maintains the connection state established with the portable information terminal 418. not automatically shut off.

Also during the transition period TR, the heating cooker 1 does not automatically disconnect the connection established with the mobile information terminal 418 .

When the heating cooker 1 shuts off the main power switch 97, the connection established with the portable information terminal 418 is automatically shut off. After that, when the main power switch 97 is closed again and the heating cooker 1 is started, if it is desired to connect with the portable information terminal device 418 again, it is necessary to perform the specified operation again. For example, as described above, the input key 47 may be pressed during standby (before starting the heating start operation).

According to this modification, since the operating state of the heating cooker 1 is transmitted to the personal digital assistant device 418 as needed (in real time), the user temporarily leaves the heating cooker 1 and moves in the kitchen KT. Or, even if the user temporarily moves to another living space, if he/she has the portable information terminal 418, he or she can know the latest cooking state.

If the portable information terminal device 418 is provided with a function that can transmit a minimum remote control signal to ensure safety, such as a command to stop heating or lower the heating power, even if the user is at a remote location, heating can be performed. It is possible to stop the operation of the cooking appliance 1 or reduce the heating power to the minimum without going through the external wide area communication network (Internet) 416 .

It is assumed that the wide area communication network 416 may experience temporary communication failure for some reason. On the other hand, in this modified example, since the wide area communication network 416 is not interposed between the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal device 418, reliable information exchange can be expected.

Next, FIG. 152(A) will be described. This is an improvement of the cooperative cooking menu display screen 480 described in FIG. 158(A).
For example, when the linked cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C for selecting "fried chicken" is touched, the display color changes, for example, to reverse to outline characters, as shown in FIG. 162(A).

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 162A, a key display portion (icon) 524 for requesting a search for obtaining inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is displayed. When this key display portion 524 is touched, the display screen changes to that shown in FIG. 152(B).

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 162(B), the display unit 525 simply displays whether or not there is an ingredient of the cooking menu that can be eaten with "fried chicken". 526 is a key display section (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 162(A).

Next, FIG. 163(A) will be described. This is an improved version of the RG control menu display screen 480 described with reference to FIG. 156(A).
For example, when the RG control menu selection section (icon) 500 for selecting "warm up" is touched, the display color changes as shown in FIG.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 163(A), a key display portion (icon) 527 for the search request is displayed. When this key display portion 527 is touched, the display screen changes to that shown in FIG. 163(B).

On the next display screen 480 in FIG. 163(B), the display unit 528 simply displays whether or not there is food in the cooking menu suitable for "heating". 529 is a key display portion (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 163(A).

After the use (occupation) of the heating chamber 113 in the cooking process 1 is finished, the food information in the cooperative cooking mode in which the inventory information is obtained in order to effectively utilize the heating chamber 113, and the ingredients information as shown in FIG. The purpose of use is different for the ingredients information when the RG control menu is selected. In the search when the RG control menu is selected, one of the search conditions for cooperative cooking, ``Do you have ingredients for the cooking menu that can be eaten with hamburgers?'' is unnecessary, so it is extracted from the search results. Food information will increase.

Therefore, the characteristics of the RG control menu, for example, the microwave heating and the radiant heat of the oven heating source 188 are used simultaneously to produce effective ingredients such as frozen meat (compared to microwave heating alone). It is also possible to set conditions in advance for ingredients that can be deliciously thawed in a short time, and check the inventory of the refrigerator 401 under such conditions.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 161, the electric energy control unit (HEMS) 448, the temperature monitoring device 440, and the alarm device 441 are connected to the router 530 via a wireless LAN such as WiFi (registered trademark) as described above. It is connected by the communication method by

In addition, between the refrigerator 401 and the portable information terminal device 418 may be changed to a form in which mutual communication is possible like between the heating cooker 1 . In this way, the mobile information terminal 418 can directly acquire inventory information from the refrigerator 401, and the mobile information terminal 418 can extract and provide a useful cooking menu to the heating cooker 1. FIG. Even in this case, the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 may be transmitted to the external server 417 and the specialized information processing capability of the external server 417 may be used to analyze the inventory information. A system in which the portable information terminal device 418 acquires information on cooking menus useful for the heating cooker 1 from the external server 417 and provides the information may be used.

In this modification, when the user holding the portable information terminal device 418 is far away from the heating cooker 1, mutual communication with the heating cooker 1 becomes impossible. When it is desired to exchange information with the heating cooker 1 at a remote location, the access point of the wide area communication network 416 is connected.

Embodiment 8.
FIG. 164 is an operation explanatory diagram relating to the heating cooker disclosed in the eighth embodiment, showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode in chronological order. be. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of Embodiment 1 described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 of the eighth embodiment has the function of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4. This cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is characterized in that the preheating process is performed in the heating chamber 113, the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, and the cooking process 2 is performed in the left heating section 17HL.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed to select one cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM3, the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 can be selected.

From the time when the input key 43MC is pressed, the oven heat source 189 of the heating chamber 113 starts heating with a predetermined electric power, and the ambient temperature of the heating chamber 113 is raised. It takes several minutes or more to reach the desired preheating temperature (at this stage, the cooking period P2 begins).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MS is pressed, the left heating unit 17HL, which is determined by the control program (of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in the cooking process 2, is exclusively used. The input functions of the keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 are disabled. In FIG. 164, the input key portion is indicated by a dashed frame to indicate this invalidation.

The ambient temperature of the heating chamber 113 is detected by the temperature sensor TS10 and the infrared temperature sensor 160. FIG. When the integrated controller MC determines that the predetermined preheating completion temperature has been reached, the user is notified that preheating has been completed in the heating chamber 113 (by the voice synthesizer 95).

The user opens the door 114 at this stage and puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 .
At the stage when the door 114 is opened, the instruction of "heat cooking start" by the input key 43MS is canceled. Therefore, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS is pressed again (At this stage, the heat cooking period P3 is started. That is, the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 113.

In the cooking step 1, the microwave heating source 189 may irradiate the microwaves, and the cooking step 1 may be finished with the oven heating source 188 alone.
Moreover, when it is necessary to raise the temperature of the inside and outside of the food to be cooked in as short a time as possible, it is also beneficial to use both microwave heating and radiant heat from the oven heating source 189 .

The cooking step 1 may be performed by setting the heat cooking time by the user, such as timer cooking, but there are also cases where the default value (time) is determined in advance depending on the cooking menu. Furthermore, it can be terminated by the user at any time.

The example of FIG. 164 shows the case where the user arbitrarily terminates at any time. When the input key 43MT is pressed, the cooking process 1 is immediately terminated. From this point, the heating suspension period P4 (transition period TR) begins.

On the other hand, when entering the heating pause period P4, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are restored (the input signal from the left operation unit 40L is treated as a valid signal in the integrated controller MC). become).

Therefore, even in the heating pause period P4, the left heating section 17HL can be selected by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L, and the left heating section 17HL (induction heating) can be selected by operating the input keys 43L1, 44L, etc. The cooking of the single cooking mode KM1 (by the source 9) can be started.

During the heating pause period P4, as shown in FIG. 164, the input function of the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is disabled.

On the other hand, during the heating pause period P4, the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1, the input key 43M2 for selecting the control conditions, etc. are input so that cooking other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be newly started. All key input functions are enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame). In addition, the input function of the input key 43MT is effectively maintained considering the case where the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is canceled at this stage.

FIG. 164 shows an example in which no cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking process 1. FIG.
On the other hand, in the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), the user moves the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 to above the left heating section 17HL.

When the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, etc. are operated during the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), the induction heating in the left heating section 17HL is started, and the cooking process 2 is started.
Then, if the input key 43L1 is pressed again, the cooking process 2 is immediately terminated, and at this point the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) is canceled.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. When the start switch (input key 43L1) of the left operation unit 17HL is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after finishing the cooking process 2 is a part of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, and waits for additional input from the user (operational input such as input keys 43L2 and 43L3 that can set heat power and time). good.

In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user checks the doneness of the food to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL, and if the heating is insufficient, immediately touches the input key. A method of performing additional heating can be adopted. This method can also improve usability for the user.

In FIG. 164, the left heating unit 17HL, which is determined by the control program (of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in the cooking process 2, is occupied from the time the input key 43MS is pressed. Although the input function of the input keys (43L1, etc.) of the unit 40L is disabled, the timing of disabling may be delayed until immediately before the cooking period P3 or the heating pause period P4 starts. This is because the preheating step P2 may take a long time depending on the target temperature for preheating, and it is conceivable that the left operating unit 17HL may feel inconvenient if the left operation unit 17HL cannot be used during that period.

The heating cooker 1 of this Embodiment 8 is
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ,
The start of the heating operation in the cooking step 2 is executed by the start input key (start unit) 43MS,
The end of the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is configured to be executed by the end input key (end portion) 43MT.

Therefore, since the heating operation of the cooking process 2 can be started and ended centrally in the central operation unit 40M, the user can start and end the cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 8 is
The second heating means HM2 has a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188),
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a combined cooking mode KM2 that combines and drives the plurality of heat sources of the second heating means HM2,
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key 43MS for shifting to the operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 and an end input key 43MT for canceling the operation of the composite cooking mode,
The start of the heating operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 is executed by the start input key (start section) 43MS,
The end of the heating operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 is executed by the end input key (termination section) 43MT,
The start input key (start portion) 43MS and the end input key (end portion) 43MT are shared for instructing the start and end of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.

That is, in the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the end input key (cancellation part) 43MT is operated once, the cooking process 2 is ended, and when it is pressed twice, the cooperative cooking This configuration cancels the operation of the mode KM2.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, the start and end of the heating operation in the combined cooking mode KM2 can be performed intensively.
Furthermore, depending on the number of times the termination input key (end portion) 43MT is operated, the cooking process 2 can be terminated or the operation of the linked cooking mode KM2 can be cancelled.
As a result, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability by using one input key (end portion) 43MT.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 8 is
The central operation unit 40M has an end input key (termination unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
In the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, when the termination input key (termination section) 43MT is operated, the display contents of the integrated display section 30 change from the first specific screen 30SP to the standby initial screen (Fig. 52) is automatically changed to
The heating cooker 1 of the structure was disclosed.

Therefore, when the heating in the linked cooking mode KM3 is canceled in the central operation unit 40M, the standby initial screen is automatically displayed. A cooker can be provided.

Summary of Embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, the eighth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the tenth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N to be heated on the top plate 15;
a second heating means (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
Notification means AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) for notifying information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input means (input operation unit) 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, and after the preheating step, using the second heating means HM2 to heat the object to be cooked. and after the cooking step 1, the object N heated in the cooking step 1 is further heated by heating the object N using the first heating means HM1. Equipped with a function to execute a linked preheating cooking mode KM4 having a cooking process 2 to heat,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized by:

With this configuration, the coordinated cooking mode can be performed using two or more locations, and the heating chamber 113 can also be used to perform a preheating process. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, the eighth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 as described below.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the main body, the front opening of which is openably closed by a door;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for respectively heating objects to be heated placed above the heating portions arranged at least on the left and right sides of the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit AN that notifies information about the cooking process;
a control unit MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the control unit MC,
The input operation section includes a central operation section 40M for the second heating means, and a left operation section 40L and a right operation section 40R for the first heating means,
The control unit MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 includes a program for sequentially executing a first cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1,
The control unit MC
(1) When the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected in the central operation unit 40M, the operation pattern of the cooperative cooking mode is changed,
(2) The start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 1 in the linked cooking mode KM3 are performed according to commands from the central operation unit 40M,
(3) during the period from the start to the end of the cooking process 1, some or all of the input functions of the left operation part 40L or the right operation part 40R of the first heating means HM1 are disabled;
(4) When the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function of the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R is restored, and the start and end of the heating operation in the cooking process 2 are performed by the left operating section 40L or the right operating section. execute according to instructions from the unit 40R;
It has disclosed a composite heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, the coordinated cooking mode can be performed using two or more locations, and the heating chamber 113 can also be used to perform a preheating process.
In addition, input functions are appropriately restricted so that there are no unnecessary input functions to prevent user operation errors.
As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, as is clear from the above description, in the eighth embodiment as well, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Other embodiments.
In Embodiment 1, regarding the induction heating source 9 that is first used in the (first) cooperative control mode (see FIG. 55), the input operation unit 40 prohibits or restricts operations other than in the cooperative control mode. Although the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR have been described, another induction heating section may be added to the target.

Furthermore, in the second coordinated control mode (see FIG. 55), the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, are driven simultaneously to initiate the cooking process. 189 or oven heat source 188, or both, may be prohibited or restricted from operating in cooking modes other than cooperative cooking mode KM3. In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, a wide range of cooking can be performed using a plurality of heating means in the cooperative cooking mode by preferentially securing the heat source required in the cooking process. .

In the description of Embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display corresponding to the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. As an operation, the first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, or the like. Ta.
Instead of such switching of the entire screen, the basic configurations of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC are unified, and a design is adopted to clearly distinguish between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3. can be

For example, on the first display screen 30SP, characters clearly indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, while on the second display screen 30SC, characters clearly indicate that the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. should be displayed in This makes it easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. , so that it can be recognized that it is the cooking mode on the side that emits light.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, and performs a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, this Such a cooking mode display portion (light emitting portion) may be provided.

The cooperative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 .
For example, the cooking process 1 is performed by the left heating part 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189. Finally, the food is returned to the top plate 15 to compensate for the insufficient heating. A cooking step 3 is provided for purposes such as adjusting, adding seasonings and other cooking liquids, and the like.

As one example, on the right heating unit 17HR, the final cooking is done while visually confirming directly. In other words, this is a case in which the material to be cooked, which has been substantially completed in the cooking step 2, is moved onto the right heating unit 17HR, and weakly heated for a long period of time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above explanation, when one cooking menu (for example, hamburger) is specified, the cooperative cooking mode automatically determines the heating sources to be used and their order, but the user's intention is given priority. can be changed to

For example, “item to be cooked X” and “item to be cooked Y”, which are one of the linked cooking modes, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR. Therefore, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating section 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "item to be cooked Z", which is one of the linked cooking modes, if the left heating unit 17HL is designated, the user may be confused about the operation because the user is not accustomed to using it. be.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the determination result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when selecting the cooperative cooking mode for the first time, the first specific screen 30SP prompts the user to The familiar right heating unit 17HR may be preferentially displayed. That is, for example, when selecting the heating section, the "right heating section" may always be displayed, and then the user may perform an input designating the left heating section 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat due to restrictions such as the heating power value for cooking the food and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side If the program allows only the specified (default setting) heating section to perform cooking, the user will not be misused or misunderstood. For example, in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, when a relatively weak heating unit such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided, if the user selects it, the cooking device 1 side notifies the user. , Correction (moving the object to be heated such as a pot to another heating unit) should be performed.

In the first embodiment, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, there are two routes: an internal route passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113, and an external route passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but you can replace this route and change it as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air sucked by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air inlet 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: The heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air inlet 152B, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally to the exhaust duct 102 .

In general, the heat radiating section 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat radiating plates (radiating fins) are stacked, and cooling air passes through the narrow space between the heat radiating plates to exchange heat (radiate heat). Therefore, the cooling air pressure loss is large. In other words, airflow resistance is large.
Therefore, by exhausting the cooling air passing through the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 without entering the heating chamber 113 (by shortening the length of the air path), the internal path and the external path are balanced. is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, so that the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced. It is one promising proposal for

After cooling the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is abolished, and the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is used as it is. The cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200 may be simplified by discharging to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the duct 307 . By reducing the airflow resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as being advantageous in terms of cost.

In the case of users who do not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to eighth embodiments, sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are performed separately. Become. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if a packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and a packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are separately set, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. never

In the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure, as shown in the first to eighth embodiments, it is not essential that the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are configured with separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured from one housing (body case HC) from the beginning.

In Embodiments 1 to 8, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are made of thin metal plates. However, one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be made of a plastic material. For example, it may be made of a thermoplastic plastic material. One material example is PET or PA, PP or ABS, or the like. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" means polyamide, and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be determined in consideration of heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Moreover, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be made of plastic, and the remaining parts may be made of a metal plate material.

The induction heating circuit may adopt various driving methods such as a half-bridge circuit, a full-bridge circuit, etc. according to the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, full bridge circuits are proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped shape. , a flat first sub-heating coil and a flat second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when induction heating is started, even if the heating power is not set, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (heating power value and heating power level), and then the user decides the desired heating power. I used a method of operation. However, a method other than this method may be used.
For example, after turning on the main power supply, be sure to determine the target induction heating source, thermal power value (watt), and thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "large" to "small"), and then enter the specified An operation method of issuing a start command using a key or the like may be adopted, and such a method does not affect the effects and essential effects of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower air passages during microwave heating are air passages (internal passages) for the cooling air that cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and for cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external passages) for cooling air, and these two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then through a common exhaust port 20 to heat. It was discharged to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not necessary to do so via a single (common) exhaust duct, nor to collect the exhaust flow to a single exhaust port 20 . For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 is provided at a different position (a position directly below the exhaust cover 19), and from the second exhaust port, cooling air is directed to either the internal route or the external route. You may make it exhaust. In particular, in the form (embodiment 1) in which the partition plate 52 partitions the rear portion of the upper unit 100 into the front and rear, it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the rear side of the partition plate 52 .

In Embodiment 1, the operation keys 98 of the main power switch 97 are arranged on the input operation section 40 (including the operation keys 98) exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and can be operated from above the main body case HC. It was in the form of Although the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, it basically has the same structure.

However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to such a form of the input operation unit 40 at all. For example, the input operation unit 40 need not always be exposed when viewed from above the body case HC, and may be stored inside the body case HC when not in use. Conventionally known forms of storage include those that move horizontally, such as drawers, and those that rotate around a single fulcrum.

The method of rotating and storing is called the operation part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2004-28569, 2004-3845, and 3-2h26. It is Also, the main power switch 97 may be a seesaw type switch as disclosed in JP-A-2004-3845.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC when in use. That is, since the user can turn on the main power source of the heating cooker 1 while standing near the front of the heating cooker 1, there is no problem in realizing the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and retracted in this manner may be provided on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment, for example.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that has a heating part (gas burner, etc.) exposed (facing) on the top plate and a heating part of the heating chamber (grilling chamber), and rotates and stores each operation part. A heating cooker employing the operation unit of is also proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941.

In Embodiments 1 to 8, an example in which a magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a heating cooker using a semiconductor oscillator has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and from this small signal generator a solid-state radio-frequency signal amplifier (one or more) for amplifying the radio-frequency signal of the . The solid-state amplifier then amplifies the first high frequency signal having a first low power level to a second high frequency signal having a second high power level and supplies the signal to a heating chamber containing food to be cooked. was
When realizing the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generation source configured with such a semiconductor device may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100 . That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third, fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 are not operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 38 of Embodiment 1, all the cooling fans are turned off for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 in FIG. 38) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control unit MC checks whether abnormal currents or voltages are generated in the circuit after trial operation only, and in this case, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, and 129 may be activated all at once, or may be sequentially activated one by one for a short period of time. Even in this way, the essential effects of the present disclosure are not lost.

In Embodiment 1, the user had to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 68, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL is selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require such a step of selecting a heating unit.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852,
A plurality of heating coils arranged regularly so as to be adjacent to each other under a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heating target directly above the heating coils. An object-to-be-heated placement determination unit that determines whether an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays the object to be heated in the display area of the display screen based on the result of the object to be heated placement determination unit determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil. to display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device detects that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first object to be heated, and operates so that the cooking conditions for the first object to be heated can be input. An induction cooker is disclosed.

Also, in Japanese Patent No. 5202064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. Continuously arranged band-shaped operation display means and control means,
The control means identifies a occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its peripheral area. Identifying the area of the object to be heated, estimating the central position and size of the identified occupied area, and displaying the operating means in the specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result to enable the operating means. An induction cooker is disclosed that allows access by external operation by

In other words, instead of placing an object to be heated such as a pot on a specific position of the top plate for cooking, the object to be heated can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion can be controlled. A technique has been proposed in which the device can detect and start cooking.

The technique as described above can also be applied to the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure. That is, it is not necessary to display the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L, which indicate that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment. .

In addition, the operation of first selecting either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL using the input key 43M2 becomes unnecessary, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiments 1 to 6, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc. for multifunctionality. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation cannot easily perform the desired operation.
Therefore, for a user who does not want to use all the functions from the beginning, the display of the input key itself is turned off when a specific switch is operated, and the input function of the input key is disabled, thereby reducing the number of input operation units 40. A form in which such a visual effect is expected may be used. Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771 has already proposed a heating cooker in which usable functions are limited according to the user's desire.

Also, either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode may be set so as not to be used by the user's operation. In that case, the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used for setting, or an input key or a push button switch may be provided that allows the function to be limited and expanded simply by the user's touch.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. All or part of the processes described as being performed manually can also be performed automatically by known methods.

In the first to eighth embodiments, there are two induction heating portions 17H, a left heating portion 17HL and a right heating portion 17HR, and inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating portions. However, it may be modified as follows.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of the two adjacent heating units when heating a large object that straddles two adjacent heating units (as a typical example, a Japanese patent See No. 5,188,215).

(2) four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction below the top plate 15 and arranged close to each other in substantially the same plane below the top plate; and two inverter circuits that supply power to the IH coils, dividing the four IH coils into two coil groups (groups), from the two inverter circuits to each of the two IH coil groups A method of supplying power to each (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (a plurality of) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil. A method comprising a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coil group (see Japanese Patent No. 5257542 as a representative) .

(4) a sub-IH coil group consisting of a main IH coil for heating an object placed on the top plate and a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other outside the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying a high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils; the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; To-be-heated object placement determination unit for determining whether or not the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the secondary IH coils, and the outputs of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group and an energization control circuit, wherein a plurality of the sub IH coils are provided at predetermined intervals with a predetermined insulating space around the main IH coil, and the outer diameter shape of the sub IH coil is The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit controls the main inverter so that the thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform a cooperative heating operation. In this case, a method of maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Each circuit, part, and component of the device shown in the figure is functionally conceptual, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Furthermore, the integrated controller MC, microwave heating controller 130, heating chamber controller 159, display drive circuit 63, and controller 105 described in FIGS. is possible, and the specific form is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and all or part of it can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in arbitrary units according to functions and operating conditions. can be done.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is implemented by a processing circuit. A processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware, or may be a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated controller MC and the IH controller 90 is implemented by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is a memory. The processor implements each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the integrated controller MC and the IH controller 90 . Note that the storage device MM is typically non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, and EEPROM.

Furthermore, part of the data and programs in the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. In this case, the heating cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63, which are described particularly with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved version as appropriate. In this case, the modification program may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49, for example.

One heating part 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) for cooking on the top plate 15 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is configured to be controlled by the controller.
Also, the induction heating source 9, microwave heating source 189, or oven heating source 188 may be replaced by a gas-fired burner.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R are all "contact input" operation units in which the user touches input keys to issue an input command. , but a non-contact method in which the movement of the user's finger or hand is detected and input in a non-contact manner may also be used. Furthermore, it may be changed to a voice input method in which the user's voice is recognized and input (see Embodiment 6). In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving section for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation section.

In Embodiments 1 to 3 and 5 to 7, the means for selecting various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP and the third specific screen 30ST is the input operation unit 40. However, it may be provided in the display screens of the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 30L and 30R.

For example, in the Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes compound cooking, a display screen of compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu of compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the menu selection part is displayed by the user. A technique of selecting a menu by touching it directly with a finger has been proposed.

Therefore, in the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, the menu of cooking possible in the combined cooking and the cooperative cooking mode, the name of the food to be cooked (one type of identification information), etc. are displayed, and the display part ( The user may directly touch the "icon" portion) with a finger to select the menu or the like of the cooperative cooking mode.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the heating cooker 1, and the heating cooker 1 transmits each operation signal and the command signals L1 to L10 to the outside. However, information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, such as the start and end, may also be transmitted. The user can know the progress information through the portable terminal device 418 or the like, which improves convenience.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, driving operation signals, etc. with the home gateway 411 inside the house HA. ) can be used.

In addition, in Embodiment 1, home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data of inventory information of refrigerator 401 was used as an information management device. communication network) 416 and connect to an external server 417 via the Internet 416 . In that case, the external server 417 may store and hold the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 .

Furthermore, the external server 417 is made to hold recipe information of various cooking that can be used in the heating cooker 1 . Then, in response to a request from the heating cooker 1 or the information communication terminal device 418, the system searches for recipe information and provides the extracted recipe information to the heating cooker 1 or the information communication terminal device 418. can be

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of claims.

The heating cooker according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in the kitchens of general houses, but also in the kitchens of public facilities, shops, and the like.

1 heating cooker 2 kitchen furniture 2A installation opening 2B front opening 2G stepped portion 2P mouth edge upper surface 2S right side surface 3 surface material 4 surface material 5 surface material 6 surface material 7 frame line 8 wall 9 induction heating source 10 body of upper unit 11 partition member (partition wall)
12 partition plate 13 partition plate 14 partition wall 15 top plate 16 upper case (upper housing)
16A flange 16B rear vertical wall 16BL auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX horizontal bent portion 16F front vertical wall 16L side vertical wall 16R side vertical wall 16S bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17CL coil wire 17H induction heating section 17HL left heating section (second heating section)
17HM Central heating section 17HR Right heating section (first heating section)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 opening 19 exhaust cover 20 exhaust port 21 decorative frame 22 reinforcing plate 23 right input control device 24 left input control device 25 decorative frame 26 cushion material 27 light emitting display 27L light emitting display 27M light emitting display 27R light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light-emitting section 27M1-27M6 Individual light-emitting section 27R1-27R5 Individual light-emitting section 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation 30G Caution 30H Recommendation 30J Specific text 30K Heat source display 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Character information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section 31L Left display section 31LW Display window 31R Right display section 31RW Display window 32 Central operation Substrate 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 rectifier circuit 36 power supply circuit B
37L drive circuit 37R drive circuit 38 exhaust window 39A signal line 39B signal line 40 input operation unit 40L left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal reception unit 40VS Audio signal analysis unit 40R Right operation unit (first individual operation unit)
41 Operation board 41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input keys 43L1 to 43L4 Input keys 43M1 Input keys 43M2 Input keys 43M3 Input keys (guide keys)
43KP Input key 43L1-43L4 Input key 43M1-43R3 Input key 43MC Input key 43MS Input key 43MT Input key 43R1-43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmission unit 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 holder 51 screw 52 partition plate 52A exhaust window 52B exhaust window 53L exhaust port plate 53R exhaust port plate 54 filter circuit board 55 power supply circuit board 56 choke coil 57 transformer 58 capacitor 59 diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 first cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A air outlet 60C fan case 60F rotor 60FL cooling air 60H inlet 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A air outlet 61C fan case 61F rotor 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 display unit Drive circuit 63CS Display command unit (for second specific screen)
63SP display command unit (for first specific screen)
63ST Display command section (for the 3rd specific screen)
64 vent hole 64S auxiliary vent hole 65 right exhaust port 66 magnetic shield ring 67L thermal power indicator 67H heat retention indicator 67R thermal power indicator 68 heating source indicator 68L indicator 68M indicator 68R indicator 69 high temperature indicator 70 cover 70A front notch Part 70B Suspended wall 70E Extension part 71 Support plate 72 Electric power control part (demand control part)
73 signal transmission unit 74 drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 resonance capacitor 76m resonance capacitor 77a input current detection unit 77am input current detection unit 77b output current detection unit 77bm output current detection unit 78a diode bridge 78am diode bridge 78b reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBTs
79bm IGBT
79c diode 79cm diode 79d diode 79dm diode 80 inverter circuit board 80F first inverter circuit board 80M second inverter circuit board 81 inverter circuit 81L inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 heat sink 82B heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heatsink (rear first heatsink)
82B2 heat sink (back second heat sink)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heatsink (front first heatsink)
82F2 heatsink (second heatsink in front)
82FN Radiation fin 82M Heat sink 82MF Radiation fin 82MF1 Radiation fin 82MF2 Radiation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensing device 85 Electric component 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drainage hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion Hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit 94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power supply Switch operation button or operation key 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 upper unit 101 lower case (lower housing)
101A flange 101B rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C inclined portion 101F front plate 101H body portion 101U bottom plate 101L side vertical wall 101R side vertical wall 101T front horizontal wall 102 exhaust duct 102A internal passage 102B internal passage 102E end portion 104 cavity 105 control device 106 power cord 106A plug 108A connection mouth (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A output terminal portion 109B output terminal portion 109C output terminal portion 110 main body 111 inclined portion 112 front cover 112P mounting leg 113 heating chamber 113A opening 113B back wall (rear wall surface)
113T recess 114 door 115 handle 117 through hole (guide hole)
118 connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power circuit unit 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillating section 122H Heat radiating section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 microwave heating control unit 131 door open/close detection mechanism 132A latch switch 132B door switch 133 monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A interlocking rod 136B interlocking rod 137 support plate 138A communication port 138B communication port 139 closure detection unit 140 oven heating device 141 space ( ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A lid body 154B main body 158 non-contact temperature measuring section (infrared temperature measuring section)
159 heating chamber control unit 160 temperature sensor 161 detection window 162 cooking plate 163 heater 163A upper heater 163B lower heater 164 vent (first intake port)
165 recess (air intake duct)
166L left partition plate 166R right partition plate 167 upper heat shield plate 168 lower heat shield plate 169 upper case 170 lower case 171 partition plate 172 passage 173 communication port 174 communication port 176 hinge 178A relay 178B relay 180 feeding port 181 cover 182 relay 184 Seal Material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 microwave heating source 190 frame 191 cover 192 inner frame 192W viewing window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Air vent 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right space (third space)
301L left gap (third gap)
302 front gap (third gap)
303 Air gap 304 Support fitting 304V Vertical portion 304H Horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 vent hole 306 communication window 307 exhaust duct 308 vertical portion 309 communication window 310 spacer (cushion material)
311 lower gap (third gap)
320 exhaust port 326 cushion material 330 identification information 331 additional information 332 cooking process information (display section of cooking process)
333 Time saving information 334 Refrigerator display unit 335D symbol 335U symbol 337 Display guide unit 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual ingredient information 340 Function setting title display section 341 Explanation display text 342L Linked cooking mode selection section 342M Combined (RG) cooking mode selection section 342R Previous cooking selection section 360 Icon 361 Menu display section 362 Linked cooking mode display information 373 Signal Line 400 Home appliance 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilator 406 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave Oven 409 Lighting Fixture 410 Kitchen 411 Home Gateway 412 Body Case 413 Environmental Detector 413A Sensor 413H Human Detector 414 Electricity Meter 415 Power Line (Main Line)
416 Wide area communication network 417 External server 418 Information communication terminal equipment 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Suction port 426 Electric fan 429 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Suction port 433 Air outlet 434 odor sensor 435 communication unit 436 vertical wall surface 440 temperature monitoring device 441 temperature detection unit 442 communication unit 443 temperature determination circuit 444 light receiving unit 445 alarm device 446 communication unit (transmitting unit/receiving unit)
447 central control unit 448 power amount control unit 449 input unit 450 storage device 451 schedule management unit 452 human detection sensor 453 environment sensor 460 transmission unit and reception unit 461 communication control unit 462 central processing unit (CPU)
463 ROM and RAM
464 speaker 465 operation unit 466 display unit 467 storage unit 468 cooker database (storage unit)
469 Posture detection unit 470 Remote operation information generation unit 471 Display operation unit 472 NFC input/output unit 473 Remote operation data 475 Voice input unit 480 Display screen 481 Display menu display unit 482 Left heating unit menu selection display unit 483 Heating source selection display Part 484 Range grill control menu selection display part 485 Linked cooking menu display part 486 Preparation information display part 487 Linked cooking menu name display part 488 Left heating part control menu display part (icon)
489 Left heating unit control menu display (icon)
490 Attention information display section 491M Central operation section selection section (icon)
491L Left operation section selection section (icon)
491R Right operation section selection section (icon)
492 Advice display selection part (icon)
493 Left heating unit control menu display (icon)
494 Range grill control menu display (icon)
495 Menu screen display (icons)
496 Input confirmation key display (icon)
497 Induction heating source selector (icon)
498 Microwave grill heating source selection part (icon)
499 Linked cooking selection part (icon)
500 RG control menu selection unit (icon)
500C Linked cooking menu selection unit (icon)
501 Screen switching mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark (icon)
503 Screen switching mark (icon)
504 RG control menu name display (icon)
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display area 507A to 507C Auxiliary information display area 509 Preparation work reference image 510 Preparation work reference image 511 Alert information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display area 514 Next process information display area 515 Recommended menu display area 516 Recommendation Display part of menu 517 Supplementary information of recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image of recommended menu 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Send key display (icon)
522 Stop key display (icon)
523 Detailed display indicator (icon)
524 key display (icon)
525 display section 526 key display section (icon)
527 Key display section 528 Display section 529 Key display section (icon)
530 router 550 function setting section 551 function setting data storage section AH upper air passage AL exposure range of top plate AN reporting section BL straight line (reference line)
BH Depth BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Front-back maximum dimension of upper case D6 Front-back maximum width dimension D7 Opposing distance DP1 Depth (dimension)
EM Abnormality detection unit F1 First air passage F2 Second air passage FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI Entrance FL1 Outlet line FL2 Outlet line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L Gap GP5R Gap GP6 Gap GP7 Gap GP8 Gap GP9 Gap GP10 Gap GP11 Gap GP12 Gap (Second Gap)
GP13 Gap between top plate and cover GP14 Gap between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Body case H1 Maximum height H2 Height H3 Height H4 Height H5 Height H6 Height Dimension H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HA House HB Base bottom HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selected value signal IP4 Selected value signal IP5 Image signal JC Human detection sensor LA Projection dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated controller MM Storage device MM1 to MM3 Storage unit MNP Search unit N Object to be heated QC Sensing Earthquake equipment RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width of installation opening W2 Maximum width of installation space W3 Heating cooker W4 Maximum horizontal width of the upper case W5 Maximum horizontal width of the upper case W6 Length of the inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of the inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum horizontal width of the inner side of the upper case W9 Hanging wall 70B facing distance (dimension of the space in the front-rear direction)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (4)

a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit;
In a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order, one cooking menu can be selected from a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of food to be cooked. a first selection section to be displayed;
A second selection for selecting one control menu from a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of food in a compound cooking mode in which the plurality of heat sources are automatically combined and driven simultaneously or with a time difference. Department and
a control unit that receives selections from the first selection unit and the second selection unit and controls the first heating means and the second heating means;
The control unit has a function of executing the cooperative cooking mode using both the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit determines whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode for the specific food item selected by the input operation unit, and permits cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. case, an operation step B of performing a first specific notification including information about the food to be cooked in the linked cooking mode, and a case where a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit after the first specific notification , an operation step C for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and
A heating cooker characterized by: The first specific notification includes identification information of the object to be cooked, and information of at least the first cooking process among the cooking process by the first heating means and the cooking process by the second heating means. , is to display the first specific screen displayed collectively,
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated on a top plate outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
a compound cooking mode with multiple control menus that operates two or more of the heat sources in a predetermined sequence;
a coordinated cooking mode having a plurality of coordinated cooking menus, in which objects to be cooked placed in respective locations inside the heating chamber and above the top plate are cooked in a predetermined order;
display means for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu;
input means for selecting the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode;
In the cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order, one cooking menu can be selected from a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of food to be cooked. a first selection unit to be displayed in the
In the compound cooking mode in which the plurality of heat sources are automatically combined and driven simultaneously or with a time difference, a second control menu is selected from among the plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked. a selection part of
a control unit that controls the first heating means and the second heating means in response to the selection of the first selection unit and the second selection unit;
with
When the start key of the input means is operated in a state in which at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the control menu displayed at the display position A of the display means is displayed. One is selected as a "control menu to be executed" to shift to the cooking process of the composite cooking mode,
When the start key is operated while at least two of the linked cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, one of the linked cooking menus displayed at the display position B is displayed as "execute". is selected as the "cooking menu to be done" and shifts to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode,
The input means includes an input key for forwardly displaying the control menu at the display position A each time it is operated, and an input key for backwardly displaying the control menu at the display position A each time it is operated. , adjacent to each other, and
The input means includes an input key for forwardly displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time the input means is operated, and an input key for backwardly displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time the key is operated. Place the keys and , next to each other, and
The input key for forwardly and reversely feeding the control menu and the linked cooking menu and displaying them at the display position A and the display position B, respectively, is shared by the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode. there is
A heating cooker characterized by: a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
a second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber;
Display means for notifying information on cooking with heat;
selection means for selecting a cooperative cooking menu for a cooperative cooking mode prepared for each type of food to be cooked, and one control menu from among a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked;
a control unit that receives a command from the selection unit and controls the display unit, the first heating unit, and the second heating unit;
and a function setting unit that limits the function of the control unit,
The control unit uses one or both of the plurality of heat sources of the second heating means in combination to execute a composite cooking mode having the plurality of control menus; a function of executing a coordinated cooking mode combining a cooking process using the heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means; and a function of controlling the display means according to the information set by the function setting unit. , has
After the main power supply is supplied and the display means is activated, the control unit selects the linked cooking menu or opens the door of the heating chamber. when the permission condition is satisfied, displaying the first specific screen for the cooperative cooking mode on the display means;
The selection means is
In the cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order, one cooking menu can be selected from a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of food to be cooked. a first selection unit to be displayed in the
In the compound cooking mode in which the plurality of heat sources are automatically combined and driven simultaneously or with a time difference, the one control menu is selected from among the plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked. 2 selection unit;
including
The control unit
Controlling the first heating means and the second heating means in response to the selection of the first selection section and the second selection section;
A heating cooker characterized by:

Images